WO2025026545A1 - Ionizable thioplipids and uses thereof - Google Patents
Ionizable thioplipids and uses thereof Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- WO2025026545A1 WO2025026545A1 PCT/EP2023/071270 EP2023071270W WO2025026545A1 WO 2025026545 A1 WO2025026545 A1 WO 2025026545A1 EP 2023071270 W EP2023071270 W EP 2023071270W WO 2025026545 A1 WO2025026545 A1 WO 2025026545A1
- Authority
- WO
- WIPO (PCT)
- Prior art keywords
- compound
- lipid
- optionally substituted
- bnt
- rna
- Prior art date
- Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
- Pending
Links
Classifications
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
- C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
- C07D295/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing polymethylene-imine rings with at least five ring members, 3-azabicyclo [3.2.2] nonane, piperazine, morpholine or thiomorpholine rings, having only hydrogen atoms directly attached to the ring carbon atoms
- C07D295/16—Heterocyclic compounds containing polymethylene-imine rings with at least five ring members, 3-azabicyclo [3.2.2] nonane, piperazine, morpholine or thiomorpholine rings, having only hydrogen atoms directly attached to the ring carbon atoms acylated on ring nitrogen atoms
- C07D295/20—Heterocyclic compounds containing polymethylene-imine rings with at least five ring members, 3-azabicyclo [3.2.2] nonane, piperazine, morpholine or thiomorpholine rings, having only hydrogen atoms directly attached to the ring carbon atoms acylated on ring nitrogen atoms by radicals derived from carbonic acid, or sulfur or nitrogen analogues thereof
- C07D295/21—Radicals derived from sulfur analogues of carbonic acid
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
- A61K31/00—Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
- A61K31/70—Carbohydrates; Sugars; Derivatives thereof
- A61K31/7088—Compounds having three or more nucleosides or nucleotides
- A61K31/7105—Natural ribonucleic acids, i.e. containing only riboses attached to adenine, guanine, cytosine or uracil and having 3'-5' phosphodiester links
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
- A61K31/00—Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
- A61K31/70—Carbohydrates; Sugars; Derivatives thereof
- A61K31/7088—Compounds having three or more nucleosides or nucleotides
- A61K31/711—Natural deoxyribonucleic acids, i.e. containing only 2'-deoxyriboses attached to adenine, guanine, cytosine or thymine and having 3'-5' phosphodiester links
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
- A61K31/00—Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
- A61K31/70—Carbohydrates; Sugars; Derivatives thereof
- A61K31/7088—Compounds having three or more nucleosides or nucleotides
- A61K31/713—Double-stranded nucleic acids or oligonucleotides
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
- A61K47/00—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient
- A61K47/50—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates
- A61K47/51—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates the non-active ingredient being a modifying agent
- A61K47/54—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates the non-active ingredient being a modifying agent the modifying agent being an organic compound
- A61K47/541—Organic ions forming an ion pair complex with the pharmacologically or therapeutically active agent
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
- A61K47/00—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient
- A61K47/50—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates
- A61K47/51—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates the non-active ingredient being a modifying agent
- A61K47/54—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates the non-active ingredient being a modifying agent the modifying agent being an organic compound
- A61K47/543—Lipids, e.g. triglycerides; Polyamines, e.g. spermine or spermidine
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
- A61K47/00—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient
- A61K47/50—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates
- A61K47/51—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates the non-active ingredient being a modifying agent
- A61K47/56—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates the non-active ingredient being a modifying agent the modifying agent being an organic macromolecular compound, e.g. an oligomeric, polymeric or dendrimeric molecule
- A61K47/59—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates the non-active ingredient being a modifying agent the modifying agent being an organic macromolecular compound, e.g. an oligomeric, polymeric or dendrimeric molecule obtained otherwise than by reactions only involving carbon-to-carbon unsaturated bonds, e.g. polyureas or polyurethanes
- A61K47/60—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates the non-active ingredient being a modifying agent the modifying agent being an organic macromolecular compound, e.g. an oligomeric, polymeric or dendrimeric molecule obtained otherwise than by reactions only involving carbon-to-carbon unsaturated bonds, e.g. polyureas or polyurethanes the organic macromolecular compound being a polyoxyalkylene oligomer, polymer or dendrimer, e.g. PEG, PPG, PEO or polyglycerol
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
- A61K47/00—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient
- A61K47/50—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates
- A61K47/51—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates the non-active ingredient being a modifying agent
- A61K47/62—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates the non-active ingredient being a modifying agent the modifying agent being a protein, peptide or polyamino acid
- A61K47/64—Drug-peptide, drug-protein or drug-polyamino acid conjugates, i.e. the modifying agent being a peptide, protein or polyamino acid which is covalently bonded or complexed to a therapeutically active agent
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
- A61K47/00—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient
- A61K47/50—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates
- A61K47/51—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates the non-active ingredient being a modifying agent
- A61K47/68—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates the non-active ingredient being a modifying agent the modifying agent being an antibody, an immunoglobulin or a fragment thereof, e.g. an Fc-fragment
- A61K47/6835—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates the non-active ingredient being a modifying agent the modifying agent being an antibody, an immunoglobulin or a fragment thereof, e.g. an Fc-fragment the modifying agent being an antibody or an immunoglobulin bearing at least one antigen-binding site
- A61K47/6849—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates the non-active ingredient being a modifying agent the modifying agent being an antibody, an immunoglobulin or a fragment thereof, e.g. an Fc-fragment the modifying agent being an antibody or an immunoglobulin bearing at least one antigen-binding site the antibody targeting a receptor, a cell surface antigen or a cell surface determinant
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
- A61K47/00—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient
- A61K47/50—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates
- A61K47/69—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates the conjugate being characterised by physical or galenical forms, e.g. emulsion, particle, inclusion complex, stent or kit
- A61K47/6921—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates the conjugate being characterised by physical or galenical forms, e.g. emulsion, particle, inclusion complex, stent or kit the form being a particulate, a powder, an adsorbate, a bead or a sphere
- A61K47/6927—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates the conjugate being characterised by physical or galenical forms, e.g. emulsion, particle, inclusion complex, stent or kit the form being a particulate, a powder, an adsorbate, a bead or a sphere the form being a solid microparticle having no hollow or gas-filled cores
- A61K47/6929—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates the conjugate being characterised by physical or galenical forms, e.g. emulsion, particle, inclusion complex, stent or kit the form being a particulate, a powder, an adsorbate, a bead or a sphere the form being a solid microparticle having no hollow or gas-filled cores the form being a nanoparticle, e.g. an immuno-nanoparticle
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
- A61P31/00—Antiinfectives, i.e. antibiotics, antiseptics, chemotherapeutics
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
- A61P35/00—Antineoplastic agents
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
- A61P37/00—Drugs for immunological or allergic disorders
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
- A61P43/00—Drugs for specific purposes, not provided for in groups A61P1/00-A61P41/00
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
- C07C—ACYCLIC OR CARBOCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
- C07C311/00—Amides of sulfonic acids, i.e. compounds having singly-bound oxygen atoms of sulfo groups replaced by nitrogen atoms, not being part of nitro or nitroso groups
- C07C311/30—Sulfonamides, the carbon skeleton of the acid part being further substituted by singly-bound nitrogen atoms, not being part of nitro or nitroso groups
- C07C311/31—Sulfonamides, the carbon skeleton of the acid part being further substituted by singly-bound nitrogen atoms, not being part of nitro or nitroso groups having the sulfur atoms of the sulfonamide groups bound to acyclic carbon atoms
- C07C311/32—Sulfonamides, the carbon skeleton of the acid part being further substituted by singly-bound nitrogen atoms, not being part of nitro or nitroso groups having the sulfur atoms of the sulfonamide groups bound to acyclic carbon atoms of an acyclic saturated carbon skeleton
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
- C07C—ACYCLIC OR CARBOCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
- C07C317/00—Sulfones; Sulfoxides
- C07C317/26—Sulfones; Sulfoxides having sulfone or sulfoxide groups and nitrogen atoms, not being part of nitro or nitroso groups, bound to the same carbon skeleton
- C07C317/28—Sulfones; Sulfoxides having sulfone or sulfoxide groups and nitrogen atoms, not being part of nitro or nitroso groups, bound to the same carbon skeleton with sulfone or sulfoxide groups bound to acyclic carbon atoms of the carbon skeleton
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
- C07C—ACYCLIC OR CARBOCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
- C07C323/00—Thiols, sulfides, hydropolysulfides or polysulfides substituted by halogen, oxygen or nitrogen atoms, or by sulfur atoms not being part of thio groups
- C07C323/23—Thiols, sulfides, hydropolysulfides or polysulfides substituted by halogen, oxygen or nitrogen atoms, or by sulfur atoms not being part of thio groups containing thio groups and nitrogen atoms, not being part of nitro or nitroso groups, bound to the same carbon skeleton
- C07C323/24—Thiols, sulfides, hydropolysulfides or polysulfides substituted by halogen, oxygen or nitrogen atoms, or by sulfur atoms not being part of thio groups containing thio groups and nitrogen atoms, not being part of nitro or nitroso groups, bound to the same carbon skeleton having the sulfur atoms of the thio groups bound to acyclic carbon atoms of the carbon skeleton
- C07C323/25—Thiols, sulfides, hydropolysulfides or polysulfides substituted by halogen, oxygen or nitrogen atoms, or by sulfur atoms not being part of thio groups containing thio groups and nitrogen atoms, not being part of nitro or nitroso groups, bound to the same carbon skeleton having the sulfur atoms of the thio groups bound to acyclic carbon atoms of the carbon skeleton the carbon skeleton being acyclic and saturated
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
- C07C—ACYCLIC OR CARBOCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
- C07C335/00—Thioureas, i.e. compounds containing any of the groups, the nitrogen atoms not being part of nitro or nitroso groups
- C07C335/04—Derivatives of thiourea
- C07C335/06—Derivatives of thiourea having nitrogen atoms of thiourea groups bound to acyclic carbon atoms
- C07C335/08—Derivatives of thiourea having nitrogen atoms of thiourea groups bound to acyclic carbon atoms of a saturated carbon skeleton
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
- C07C—ACYCLIC OR CARBOCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
- C07C335/00—Thioureas, i.e. compounds containing any of the groups, the nitrogen atoms not being part of nitro or nitroso groups
- C07C335/40—Thioureas, i.e. compounds containing any of the groups, the nitrogen atoms not being part of nitro or nitroso groups having nitrogen atoms of thiourea or isothiourea groups further bound to other hetero atoms
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
- C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
- C07D205/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing four-membered rings with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom
- C07D205/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing four-membered rings with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom not condensed with other rings
- C07D205/04—Heterocyclic compounds containing four-membered rings with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom not condensed with other rings having no double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
- A61K9/00—Medicinal preparations characterised by special physical form
- A61K9/48—Preparations in capsules, e.g. of gelatin, of chocolate
- A61K9/50—Microcapsules having a gas, liquid or semi-solid filling; Solid microparticles or pellets surrounded by a distinct coating layer, e.g. coated microspheres, coated drug crystals
- A61K9/51—Nanocapsules; Nanoparticles
- A61K9/5107—Excipients; Inactive ingredients
- A61K9/5123—Organic compounds, e.g. fats, sugars
Definitions
- LNPs lipid nanoparticles
- cationic or ionizable lipids that are capable of forming complexes with nucleic acids, but have improved manufacturability and improved properties (e.g., improved transfection of nucleic acids and improved stability) relative to previous lipid formulations.
- the present disclosure provides cationic or ionizable lipid compounds comprising one or more sulfur-based moieties that avoid the problems associated with lipid compounds, while exhibiting improved properties (e.g., improved transfection) and ease of manufacture.
- the present disclosure provides a compound represented by formula I:
- L 1 and L 2 are each independently an optionally substituted C1-C30 aliphatic group
- L 3 is a bond, optionally substituted C1-C10 aliphatic group, or optionally substituted 2- to 10-membered heteroaliphatic group;
- X 1 and X 2 are each independently selected from a bond, -OC(O)-, -C(O)O-, -S(O) 2 N(R 1 )- , -N(R 1 )S(O) 2 , -S(O)-, -S(O) 2 -, -S(O) 2 C(R 1 ) 2 -, -OC(S)C(R 1 ) 2 -, -C(R 1 ) 2 C(S)O-, and -S-, wherein one or both of X 1 or X 2 is selected from -S(O) 2 N(R 1 )-, -N(R 1 )S(O) 2 , -S(O)-, - S(O) 2 -, -S(O) 2 C(R 1 ) 2 -, -OC(S)C(R 1 ) 2 C(S)O-, and -S-, wherein one or both of X 1 or
- R 4 is optionally substituted 4- to 12-membered heterocycle, optionally substituted 4- to 12 membered heteroaryl, Ce-Ci 2 aryl substituted with one or more of -(CH 2 ) 0-6 -OH or - (CH 2 )O- 6 -N(R 5 ) 2 , or C 3 -Ci 2 cycloaliphatic substituted with one or more of oxo, -(CH 2 ) 0-6 - OH, or -(CH 2 )O- 6 -N(R 5 ) 2 ; each R 5 is independently selected from H and optionally substituted Ci-Ce aliphatic.
- the present disclosure provides a particle comprising a compound described herein and a nucleic acid. In some embodiments, the present disclosure provides a composition (e.g., a pharmaceutical composition) comprising particles described herein.
- a composition e.g., a pharmaceutical composition
- the present disclosure provides a method of treating a disease, disorder, or condition in a subject comprising administering to the subject a composition comprising particles described herein.
- the present disclosure provides a method of preparing a compound represented Formula IV:
- each of L 4 and L 5 are each independently an optionally substituted C1-C30 aliphatic group;
- L 6 is a bond, optionally substituted C1-C10 aliphatic group, or optionally substituted 2- to 10-membered heteroaliphatic group;
- X 3 and X 4 are each independently selected from a bond, -OC(O)-, -C(O)O-, -S(O) 2 N(R 40 )- , -N(R 40 )S(O) 2 , -S(O)-, -S(O) 2 -, -S(O) 2 C(R 40 ) 2 -, -OC(S)C(R 40 ) 2 -, -C(R 40 ) 2 C(S)O-, or -S-, wherein one or both of X 3 or X 4 is selected from -S(O) 2 N(R 40 )-, -N(R 40 )S(O) 2 , -S(O)-, - S(O) 2 -, -S(O) 2 C(R 40 ) 2 -, -OC(S)C(R 40 ) 2 C(S)O-, or -S-, wherein one or both of X 3 or
- T 3 and T 4 are each independently an optionally substituted Cs-C 2 o aliphatic;
- G 1 is -N(R 6 )C(S)N(R 6 ) 2 , -OH, -N(R 6 ) 2 , -N(R 9 )C(O)R 7 , -N(R 9 )S(O) 2 R 7 , -N(R 9 )C(O)N(R 7 ) 2 , -CH(N-R 7 ), or-R 8 ;
- each G 2 is independently O or N 2 ;
- each G 3 is independently halogen (e.g., Cl, Br, or I), -OTs, or OTf;
- each R 6 is, independently, at each instance, selected from the group consisting of H, optionally substituted Ci-Ce aliphatic or OR 7 ; or two instances of R 6 come together with the atoms to which they are attached to form an optionally substituted 4- to 12-membered heterocycle ring or an optionally substituted 4- to 12-membered heteroaryl ring;
- each R 7 is,
- R 8 is optionally substituted 4- to 12-membered heterocycle, optionally substituted 4- to 12 membered heteroaryl, Ce-Ci 2 aryl substituted with one or more of -(CH 2 )o- 6 -OH or - (CH 2 )O- 6 -N(R 9 ) 2 , or Cs-Ci 2 cycloaliphatic substituted with one or more of oxo, -(CH 2 )o- 6 - OH, or -(CH 2 )o- 6 -N(R 9 ) 2 ; and each R 9 is independently selected from H and optionally substituted Ci-Ce aliphatic.
- FIG. 1 Brief Description of the Drawing Figure 1 is a bar graph illustrating particle size and PDI of LNP formulations with BNT- 51 , BNT-52, BNT-54, BNT-56, BNT-57 or BNT-59.
- Figure 2 is a bar graph illustrating zeta potential values of LNP formulations with BNT- 51 , BNT-52, BNT-54, BNT-56, BNT-57 or BNT-59.
- Figures 3A and 3B are a bar graph illustrating mRNA encapsulation efficiency (Figure 3A) and agarose gel electropherogram (Figure 3B) of LNP formulations with BNT-51 , BNT-52, BNT-54, BNT-56, BNT-57 or BNT-59.
- Figure 4 is a bar graph illustrating mRNA integrity (%) of the LNP formulations with BNT- 51 , BNT-52, BNT-54, BNT-56, BNT-57 or BNT-59.
- Figure s is a series of bar graphs illustrating the effect of the LNP formulations with BNT- 51 , BNT-52, BNT-54, BNT-56, BNT-57 or BNT-59 on cell viability in C2C12 cells (top chart), HepG2 cells (middle chart) and RAW cells (bottom chart).
- Figure 6 is a series of bar graphs illustrating the effect of the LNP formulations with BNT- 51 , BNT-52, BNT-54, BNT-56, BNT-57 or BNT-59 on transfection efficiency in C2C12 cells (top chart), HepG2 cells (middle chart) and RAW cells (bottom chart).
- Figure 7 is a bar graph illustrating particle size and PDI of LNP formulations with BNT- sulfo-01 , BNT-sulfo-02, BNT-sulfo-03, or BNT-sulfo-04.
- Figure 8 is a bar graph illustrating Zeta potential values of LNP formulations with BNT- sulfo-01 , BNT-sulfo-02, BNT-sulfo-03, or BNT-sulfo-04.
- Figures 9A and 9B are a bar graph illustrating mRNA encapsulation efficiency (Figure 9A) and agarose gel electropherogram ( Figure 9B) of LNP formulations with BNT-sulfo- 01 , BNT-sulfo-02, BNT-sulfo-03, or BNT-sulfo-04.
- Figure 10 is a bar graph mRNA integrity (%) of the LNP formulations with BNT-sulfo-01 , BNT-sulfo-02, BNT-sulfo-03, or BNT-sulfo-04.
- Figures 11A-D are a series of bar graphs illustrating the effect of the LNP formulations with BNT-sulfo-01 , BNT-sulfo-02, BNT-sulfo-03, or BNT-sulfo-04 on cell viability in C2C12 cells (Figure 11 A), HepG2 cells ( Figure 11 B), RAW cells ( Figure 110) and Hek293 cells ( Figure 11 D).
- Figures 12A-D are a series of bar graphs illustrating the effect of the LNP formulations with BNT-51 , BNT-52, BNT-54, BNT-56, BNT-57 or BNT-59 on transfection efficiency in C2C12 cells (Figure 12A), HepG2 cells ( Figure 12B), RAW cells (Figure 12C) and Hek293 cells ( Figure 12D).
- Figures 13A and 13B are a bar graph illustrating the in vitro hemolytic effect of the LNP formulations with BNT-51 , BNT-52, BNT-54, BNT-56, BNT-57 or BNT-59 ( Figure 13A) and a bar graph illustrating the effect of LNP formulations on complement activation ( Figure 13B).
- Figure 14 is a bar graph illustrating particle size and PDI of LNP formulations with BNT- 51 and a helper lipid (DSPC or DOPE).
- Figure 15 is a bar graph illustrating zeta potential values of LNP formulations with BNT- 51 and a helper lipid (DSPC or DOPE).
- Figures 16A and 16B are a bar graph illustrating mRNA encapsulation efficiency (Figure 16A) and agarose gel electropherogram (Figure 16B) of LNP formulations with BNT-51 and a helper lipid.
- Figure 17 is a bar graph illustrating mRNA integrity (%) of the LNP formulations with BNT-51 and a helper lipid (DSPC or DOPE).
- Figures 18A-D are a bar graph illustrating the effect of the LNP formulations with BNT- 51 and a helper lipid on cell viability in C2C12 cells (Figure 18A), HepG2 cells (Figure 18B), RAW cells (Figure 18C) and Hek293 cells (Figure 18D).
- Figures 19A-D are a bar graph illustrating the effect of the LNP formulations with BNT- 51 and a helper lipid. on transfection efficiency in C2C12 cells (Figure 19A), HepG2 cells ( Figure 19B), RAW cells (Figure 19C) and Hek293 cells (Figure 19D).
- Figure 20 is a bar graph illustrating particle size and PDI of LNP formulations with BNT- 51 and a stealth lipid.
- Figure 21 is a bar graph illustrating zeta potential values of LNP formulations with BNT- 51 and a stealth lipid.
- Figures 22A-B are a bar graph illustrating mRNA encapsulation efficiency (Figure 22A) and agarose gel electropherogram (Figure 22B) of LNP formulations with BNT-51 and a stealth lipid.
- Figure 23 is a bar graph illustrating mRNA integrity (%) of the LNP formulations with BNT-51 and a stealth lipid.
- Figures 24A-D are a series of bar graphs illustrating the effect of the LNP formulations with BNT-51 and a stealth lipid on cell viability C2C12 cells (Figure 24A), HepG2 cells (Figure 24B), RAW cells (Figure 24C) and Hek293 cells (Figure 24D).
- Figures 25A-D are a series of bar graphs illustrating the effect of the LNP formulations with BNT-51 and a stealth lipid on transfection efficiency in C2C12 cells (Figure 25A), HepG2 cells (Figure 25B), RAW cells (Figure 25C) and Hek293 cells (Figure 25D).
- Figure 26 is a bar graph illustrating particle size and PDI of LNP formulations with BNT- 51 , BNT-51 _P(AEEA) or BNT-52.
- ISA/EP Figure 27 is a bar graph illustrating zeta potential values of LNP formulations with BNT- 51 , BNT-51_P(AEEA) or BNT-52.
- Figure 28 is a bar graph illustrating mRNA encapsulation efficiency of LNP formulations with BNT-51 , BNT-51_P(AEEA) or BNT-52.
- Figure 29A-D are a series of bar graphs illustrating the effect of the LNP formulations with BNT-51 , BNT-51_P(AEEA) or BNT-52 on cell viability in C2C12 cells (Figure 29A), HepG2 cells ( Figure 29B), RAW cells (Figure29C) and Hek293 cells (Figure 29D).
- Figures 30A-D are a series of bar graphs illustrating the effect of the LNP formulations with BNT-51 , BNT-51_P(AEEA) or BNT-52 on transfection efficiency in C2C12 cells (Figure 30A), HepG2 cells ( Figure 30B), RAW cells (Figure 30C) and Hek293 cells ( Figure 30D).
- Figures 31 A and 31 B are a set of bar graphs illustrating the effect of the LNP formulations with BNT-51 , BNT-51_P(AEEA) or BNT-52 on hemolysis ( Figure 31 A) and complement activation ( Figure 31 B).
- Figures 32A-C are a series of bioluminescence images of animals injected with the LNP formulations comprising BNT-51 , BNT-51_P(AEEA) or BNT-51 , after 6 and 24 h ( Figure 32A), and a bar graph illustrating total flux of anatomical location -liver- after 6 h ( Figure 32B) and after 24 h ( Figure 32C).
- Figures 33A-C are an ex vivo bioluminescence images of organs of animals injected with the LNP formulations comprising BNT-51 , BNT-51_P(AEEA) or BNT-51 (Figure 33A), a bar graph illustrating total flux ( Figure 33B) and a bar graph illustrating percent organ distribution of the total signal (Figure 33C) after 24 h.
- Figure 34 is a bar graph illustrating antibody levels in the sera of animals injected with the LNP formulations comprising BNT-51 , BNT-51_P(AEEA) or BNT-51 after 24 h.
- Figure 35 is a bar graph illustrating particle size and PDI of pre-formed LNPs with BNT51 and Ac-AEEA14-DMA subjected to at least three freeze thaw cycles from -20°C to room temperature and from -80°C to room temperature.
- Figures 36A-C are a series of bar graphs illustrating characterization of BNT51 functionalized lipid nanoparticles prepared with Ac-AEEA14-DMA as stealth moiety and DSPE-PEG2k-Alfa lipid (Figure 36A); particle size and PDI of functionalized LNP1 and LNP2; ( Figure 36B); Agarose Gel Electrophoresis of controls, untreated functionalized LNP1 and LNP2 (upper row) and functionalized LNP1 and LNP2 treated with release solution (lower row) ( Figure 36C); and particle size and PDI of functionalized LNP1 and LNP2 subjected to at least two freeze thaw cycles from -20°C to room temperature and from -80°C to room temperature, and after 2 weeks at 2-8°C and 25°C.
- Figures 37A-B are a series of bar graphs illustrating percentages of transfected cells (CD14+ Monocytes, CD19+ B cells, CD4+ T cells or CD8+ T cells) within all transfected PBMCs for both RNA (Thy1.1 ) ( Figure 37A) and DNA (Venus) ( Figure 37B), delivered using LNP1 or LNP2.
- Figure 38 is a bar graph illustrating particle size and PDI of preformed LNPs with BNT51 and Ac-AEEA14-VitE subjected to at least three freeze thaw cycles from -20°C to room temperature and from -80°C to room temperature.
- Figures 39A-C are a series of bar graphs illustrating characterization of BNT51 functionalized lipid nanoparticles prepared with Ac-AEEA14-VitE as stealth moiety and DSPE-PEG2k-Alfa lipid (Figure 39A); particle size and PDI of functionalized LNP1 and LNP2 ( Figure 39B); Agarose Gel Electrophoresis of controls, untreated functionalized LNP1 and LNP2 (upper row) and functionalized LNP1 and LNP2 treated with release solution (lower row) ( Figure 39C); and particle size and PDI of functionalized LNP1 and LNP2, subjected to at least two freeze thaw cycles from -20°C to room temperature and from -80°C to room temperature, and after 2 weeks at 2-8°C and 25°C.
- Figures 40A-B are a series of bar graphs illustrating percentages of transfected cell (CD14+ Monocytes, CD19+ B cells, CD4+ T cells or CD8+ T cells) within all transfected PBMCs for both RNA (Thy1 .1 ) ( Figure 40A) and DNA (Venus) ( Figure 40B), delivered using LNP1 or LNP2.
- Figures 41A-B are a set of bar graphs illustrating characterization of BNT51 functionalized lipid nanoparticles prepared with Ac-AEEA14-DMA as stealth moiety and DSPE-pAEEA14-Alfa lipid, including ( Figure 41 A): particle size and PDI of preformed LNPs subjected to at least two freeze thaw cycles from -20°C to room temperature and from -80°C to room temperature; and (Figure 41 B): particle size and PDI of functionalized RNA/DNA-LNP2 at tO and subjected to at least two freeze thaw cycles from -20°C to room temperature and from -80°C to room temperature.
- Figures 42A-B are a set of bar graphs illustrating characterization of BNT52 functionalized lipid nanoparticles prepared with Ac-AEEA14-DMA as stealth moiety and DSPE-pAEEA14-Alfa lipid
- Figure 42A particle size and PDI of preformed LNPs subjected to at least two freeze thaw cycles from -20°C to room temperature and from -80°C to room temperature
- Figure 42B Particle size and PDI of functionalized RNA/DNA-LNP2 at tO and subjected to at least two freeze thaw cycles from -20°C to room temperature and from -80°C to room temperature.
- Figure 43 is a set of bar graphs illustrating use of thiolipids described herein for targeted transfection of T-cells.
- Comparison of three different LNPs containing three different ionizable lipids show the superior RNA and DNA transfection efficiency of thiolipids described herein which were formulated in LNP2 and LNP3.
- Depicted in the upper graph are the percentages of Thy1 .1 -expressing cell subtypes (CD4+ T cells, CD8+ T cells, CD19+ B cells) out of all single and alive cells (y-axes).
- Depicted in the lower graph are the percentages of Venus-Nanoplasmid expressing cells for CD4+ T cells and CD8 + T cells.
- Figures 44A and 44B illustrate the use of reported thiolipids for targeted transfection of T-cells. In vitro evaluation in hPBMCs. Comparison of two different LNPs containing two different ionizable lipids show high RNA and DNA transfection efficiency of reported thiolipids which were formulated in LNP1 and LNP2. Depicted in Figure 44A are the percentages of Thy1 .1 -expressing cell subtypes (CD4+ T cells, CD8+ T cells, CD19+ B cells, CD14+ Monocytes) out of all single and alive cells (y-axes). Depicted in Figure 44B are the percentages of Venus-Nanoplasmid expressing cells for CD4+ T cells and CD8 + T cells.
- Figures 45A and 45B are a set of bar charts illustrating characterization of the LNP formulations with BNT-72, including particle size and PDI ( Figure 45A) and zeta potential ( Figure 45B).
- Figures 46A and 46B are a set of bar graphs illustrating mRNA encapsulation efficiency (Figure 46A) and mRNA integrity (Figure 46B) of the of LNP formulations with BNT-72.
- Figure 47 is a series of bar graphs illustrating the effect of the LNP formulations with BNT-72 on cell viability in C2C12 cells (top chart), HepG2 cells (middle chart) and RAW cells (bottom chart).
- Figure 48 is a bar graph illustrating the effect of the LNP formulations with BNT-72 on transfection efficiency in C2C12 cells (top chart), HepG2 cells (middle chart) and RAW cells (bottom chart).
- Figure 49 is a bar graph illustrating the size (nm) and polydispersity index (PDI) of complexes comprising BNT-76, BNT-90 or a benchmark lipid CM12_BM.
- Figure 50 is a bar graph illustrating Z-potential (mV) of complexes comprising BNT-76, BNT-90 or a benchmark lipid CM12_BM.
- Figure 51 is a bar graph illustrating RNA integrity (%) of complexes comprising BNT-76, BNT-90 or a benchmark lipid CM12_BM.
- Figure 52 is a bar graph illustrating osmolarity and pH of complexes comprising BNT- 76, BNT-90 or a benchmark lipid CM12_BM.
- Figures 53A-53D are a series of bar graphs illustrating transfection efficiency in C2C12 cells (Figure 53A), HepG2 cells (Figure 53B), RAW cells (Figure 53C) and Hek293 cells (Figure 53D).
- Figures 54A-54D are a series of bar graphs illustrating cell viability in C2C12 cells (Figure 54A), HepG2 cells (Figure 54B), RAW cells (Figure 54C) and Hek293 cells (Figure 54D).
- the present disclosure provides, among other things, the surprising discovery of particular cationic or ionizable lipids comprising at least one sulfur-containing moiety.
- Such cationic or ionizable lipids exhibit improved properties (e.g., improved transfection to cells) relative to previous lipids.
- thiolipids of the present disclosure exhibit improvements over previous lipids that lack a sulfur-containing moiety, including, for example, improved transfection of cells with RNA.
- Particles prepared using thiolipid compounds described herein exhibit narrow size distribution (i.e., are substantially uniform in size), high encapsulation efficiency, low cytotoxicity, and improved biodistribution and efficacy relative to particles comprising previous lipid compounds.
- structures depicted herein are meant to include all stereoisomeric (e.g., enantiomeric or diastereomeric) forms of the structure, as well as all geometric or conformational isomeric forms of the structure.
- R and S configurations of each stereocenter are contemplated as part of the disclosure. Therefore, single stereochemical isomers, as well as enantiomeric, diastereomeric, and geometric (or conformational) mixtures of provided compounds are within the scope of the disclosure.
- Table 1 shows one or more stereoisomers of a compound, and unless otherwise indicated, represents each stereoisomer alone and/or as a mixture. Unless otherwise stated, all tautomeric forms of provided compounds are within the scope of the disclosure.
- structures depicted herein are meant to include compounds that differ only in the presence of one or more isotopically enriched atoms.
- compounds having the present structures including replacement of hydrogen by deuterium or tritium, or replacement of a carbon by 13 C- or 14 C-enriched carbon are within the scope of this disclosure.
- the term "approximately” or “about” may encompass a range of values that are within (i.e., ⁇ ) 25%, 20%, 19%, 18%, 17%, 16%, 15%, 14%, 13%, 12%, 1 1 %, 10%, 9%, 8%, 7%, 6%, 5%, 4%, 3%, 2%, 1 %, or less of the referred value.
- Administering typically refers to the administration of a composition to a subject to achieve delivery of an agent that is, or is included in, a composition to a target site or a site to be treated.
- agents that are, or is included in, a composition to a target site or a site to be treated.
- routes that may, in appropriate circumstances, be utilized for administration to a subject, for example a human.
- administration may be ocular, oral, parenteral, topical, etc.
- administration may be bronchial (e.g., by bronchial instillation), buccal, dermal (which may be or comprise, for example, one or more of topical to the dermis, intradermal, interdermal, transdermal, etc.), enteral, intra-arterial, intradermal, intragastric, intramedullary, intramuscular, intranasal, intraperitoneal, intrathecal, intravenous, intraventricular, within a specific organ (e.g., intrahepatic), mucosal, nasal, oral, rectal, subcutaneous, sublingual, topical, tracheal (e.g., by intratracheal instillation), vaginal, vitreal, etc.
- bronchial e.g., by bronchial instillation
- buccal which may be or comprise, for example, one or more of topical to the dermis, intradermal, interdermal, transdermal, etc.
- enteral intra-arterial, intradermal, intragas
- administration may be parenteral. In some embodiments, administration may be oral. In some particular embodiments, administration may be intravenous. In some particular embodiments, administration may be subcutaneous. In some embodiments, administration may involve only a single dose. In some embodiments, administration may involve application of a fixed number of doses. In some embodiments, administration may involve dosing that is intermittent (e.g., a plurality of doses separated in time) and/or periodic (e.g., individual doses separated by a common period of time) dosing. In some embodiments, administration may involve continuous dosing (e.g., perfusion) for at least a selected period of time. In some embodiments, administration may comprise a prime-and-boost protocol.
- a prime-and-boost protocol can include administration of a first dose of a pharmaceutical composition (e.g., an immunogenic composition, e.g., a vaccine) followed by, after an interval of time, administration of a second or subsequent dose of a pharmaceutical composition (e.g., an immunogenic composition, e.g., a vaccine).
- a prime-and-boost protocol can result in an increased immune response in a patient.
- Aliphatic refers to a straight-chain (i.e., unbranched) or branched, substituted or unsubstituted hydrocarbon chain that is completely saturated or that contains one or more units of unsaturation, or a monocyclic hydrocarbon or bicyclic hydrocarbon that is completely saturated or that contains one or more units of unsaturation, but which is not aromatic (also referred to herein as “cycloaliphatic”), that has a single point or more than one points of attachment to the rest of the molecule.
- aliphatic groups contain 1 -12 aliphatic carbon atoms. In some embodiments, aliphatic groups contain 1 -6 aliphatic carbon atoms (e.g., Ci-e).
- aliphatic groups contain 1 -5 aliphatic carbon atoms (e.g., C1-5). In other embodiments, aliphatic groups contain 1-4 aliphatic carbon atoms (e.g., C1-4). In still other embodiments, aliphatic groups contain 1 -3 aliphatic carbon atoms (e.g., C1-3), and in yet other embodiments, aliphatic groups contain 1 -2 aliphatic carbon atoms (e.g., C1-2). Suitable aliphatic groups include, but are not limited to, linear or branched, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, alkenyl, or alkynyl groups and hybrids thereof. A preferred aliphatic group is C1-6 alkyl.
- Alkyl refers to a saturated, optionally substituted straight or branched chain hydrocarbon group having (unless otherwise specified) 1 -12, 1 -10, 1-8, 1 -6, 1 -4, 1 -3, or 1 -2 carbon atoms (e.g., C1-12, C1-10, C1-8, C1-6, C1-4, C1-3, or C1-2).
- exemplary alkyl groups include methyl, ethyl, propyl, butyl, pentyl, hexyl, and heptyl.
- Alkylene refers to a bivalent alkyl group. In some embodiments, “alkylene” is a bivalent straight or branched alkyl group. In some embodiments, an "alkylene chain" is a polymethylene group, i.e., -(CH2) n -, wherein n is a positive integer, e.g., from 1 to 6, from 1 to 4, from 1 to 3, from 1 to 2, or from 2 to 3.
- An optionally substituted alkylene chain is a polymethylene group in which one or more methylene hydrogen atoms is optionally replaced with a substituent. Suitable substituents include those described below for a substituted aliphatic group and also include those described in the specification herein.
- two substituents of the alkylene group may be taken together to form a ring system.
- two substituents can be taken together to form a 3- to 7-membered ring.
- the substituents can be on the same or different atoms.
- the suffix “-ene” or “-enyl” when appended to certain groups herein are intended to refer to a bifunctional moiety of said group.
- “-ene” or “-enyl” when appended to “cyclopropyl” becomes “cyclopropylene” intended to refer to a bifunctional cyclopropyl group, e.g.,
- Alkenyl refers to an optionally substituted straight or branched chain or cyclic hydrocarbon group having at least one double bond and having (unless otherwise specified) 2-12, 2-10, 2-8, 2-6, 2-4, or 2-3 carbon atoms(e.g., C2-12, C2-10, C2-8, C2-6, C2-4, or C2-3).
- alkenyl groups include ethenyl, propenyl, butenyl, pentenyl, hexenyl, and heptenyl.
- cycloalkenyl refers to an optionally substituted non-aromatic monocyclic or multicyclic ring system containing at least one carbon-carbon double bond and having about 3 to about 10 carbon atoms.
- exemplary monocyclic cycloalkenyl rings include cyclopentenyl, cyclohexenyl, and cycloheptenyl.
- Alkynyl refers to an optionally substituted straight or branched chain hydrocarbon group having at least one triple bond and having (unless otherwise specified) 2-12, 2-10, 2-8, 2-6, 2-4, or 2-3 carbon atoms (e.g., C2-12, C2-10, C2-8, C2-6, C2-4, or C2-3).
- exemplary alkynyl groups include ethynyl, propynyl, butynyl, pentynyl, hexynyl, and heptynyl.
- Aryl refers to monocyclic and bicyclic ring systems having a total of six to fourteen ring members (e.g., Ce-Cu), wherein at least one ring in the system is aromatic and wherein each ring in the system contains three to seven ring members. In some embodiments, an “aryl” group contains between six and twelve total ring members (e.g., C6-C12). The term “aryl” may be used interchangeably with the term “aryl ring”. In certain embodiments, “aryl” refers to an aromatic ring system which includes, but not limited to, phenyl, biphenyl, naphthyl, anthracyl and the like, which may bear one or more substituents.
- aryl groups are hydrocarbons.
- an “aryl” ring system is an aromatic ring (e.g., phenyl) that is fused to a non-aromatic ring (e.g., cycloalkyl). Examples of aryl rings include that are fused include
- Two events or entities are “associated” with one another, as that term is used herein, if the presence, level and/or form of one is correlated with that of the other.
- a particular entity e.g., polypeptide, genetic signature, metabolite, microbe, etc
- two or more entities are physically “associated” with one another if they interact, directly or indirectly, so that they are and/or remain in physical proximity with one another.
- two or more entities that are physically associated with one another are covalently linked to one another; in some embodiments, two or more entities that are physically associated with one another are not covalently linked to one another but are non-covalently associated, for example by means of hydrogen bonds, van der Waals interaction, hydrophobic interactions, magnetism, and combinations thereof.
- biological sample typically refers to a sample obtained or derived from a biological source (e.g., a tissue or organism or cell culture) of interest, as described herein.
- a source of interest comprises an organism, such as an animal or human.
- a biological sample is or comprises biological tissue or fluid.
- a biological sample may be or comprise bone marrow; blood; blood cells; ascites; tissue or fine needle biopsy samples; cell-containing body fluids; free floating nucleic acids; sputum; saliva; urine; cerebrospinal fluid, peritoneal fluid; pleural fluid; feces; lymph; gynecological fluids; skin swabs; vaginal swabs; oral swabs; nasal swabs; washings or lavages such as a ductal lavages or broncheoalveolar lavages; aspirates; scrapings; bone marrow specimens; tissue biopsy specimens; surgical specimens; feces, other body fluids, secretions, and/or excretions; and/or cells therefrom, etc.
- a biological sample is or comprises cells obtained from an individual.
- obtained cells are or include cells from an individual from whom the sample is obtained.
- a sample is a “primary sample” obtained directly from a source of interest by any appropriate means.
- a primary biological sample is obtained by methods selected from the group consisting of biopsy (e.g., fine needle aspiration or tissue biopsy), surgery, collection of body fluid (e.g., blood, lymph, feces etc.), etc.
- sample refers to a preparation that is obtained by processing (e.g., by removing one or more components of and/or by adding one or more agents to) a primary sample. For example, filtering using a semi-permeable membrane.
- processing e.g., by removing one or more components of and/or by adding one or more agents to
- a primary sample For example, filtering using a semi-permeable membrane.
- Such a “processed sample” may comprise, for example, nucleic acids or proteins extracted from a sample or obtained by subjecting a primary sample to techniques such as amplification or reverse transcription of mRNA, isolation and/or purification of certain components, etc.
- Carrier refers to a diluent, adjuvant, excipient, or vehicle with which a composition is administered.
- carriers can include sterile liquids, such as, for example, water and oils, including oils of petroleum, animal, vegetable or synthetic origin, such as, for example, peanut oil, soybean oil, mineral oil, sesame oil and the like.
- carriers are or include one or more solid components.
- Combination therapy refers to those situations in which a subject is simultaneously exposed to two or more therapeutic regimens (e.g., two or more therapeutic agents or modality(ies)).
- the two or more regimens may be administered simultaneously; in some embodiments, such regimens may be administered sequentially (e.g., all “doses” of a first regimen are administered prior to administration of any doses of a second regimen); in some embodiments, such agents are administered in overlapping dosing regimens.
- “administration” of combination therapy may involve administration of one or more agent(s) or modality(ies) to a subject receiving the other agent(s) or modality(ies) in the combination.
- combination therapy does not require that individual agents be administered together in a single composition (or even necessarily at the same time), although in some embodiments, two or more agents, or active moieties thereof, may be administered together in a combination composition, or even in a combination compound (e.g., as part of a single chemical complex or covalent entity).
- Comparable refers to two or more agents, entities, situations, sets of conditions, etc., that may not be identical to one another but that are sufficiently similar to permit comparison therebetween so that one skilled in the art will appreciate that conclusions may reasonably be drawn based on differences or similarities observed.
- comparable sets of conditions, circumstances, individuals, or populations are characterized by a plurality of substantially identical features and one or a small number of varied features.
- composition may be used to refer to a discrete physical entity that comprises one or more specified components.
- a composition may be of any form - e.g., gas, gel, liquid, solid, etc.
- Cycloaliphatic refers to a monocyclic C3-8 hydrocarbon or a bicyclic Ce -10 hydrocarbon that is completely saturated or that contains one or more units of unsaturation, but which is not aromatic, that has a single point or more than one points of attachment to the rest of the molecule.
- Cycloalkyl- refers to an optionally substituted saturated ring monocyclic or polycyclic system of about 3 to about 10 ring carbon atoms.
- Exemplary monocyclic cycloalkyl rings include cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, and cycloheptyl.
- DNA Deoxyribonucleic Acid
- DNA refers to a polymeric molecule of nucleotides that are typically double-stranded and comprise adenine, cytosine, guanine and thymine, and a deoxyribose sugar backbone structure as specified in the definition “Nucleic Acid/Polynucleotide.”
- DNA is linear DNA, plasmid DNA, minicircle DNA, nanoplasmid DNA, doggybone DNA, or a transposon.
- deoxyribonucleotide refers to unmodified and modified deoxyribonucleotides.
- unmodified deoxyribonucleotides include the purine bases adenine (A) and guanine (G), and the pyrimidine bases cytosine (C) and thymine (T).
- Modified deoxyribonucleotides may include one or more modifications including, but not limited to, for example, (a) end modifications, e.g., 5' end modifications (e.g., phosphorylation, dephosphorylation, conjugation, inverted linkages, etc.), 3' end modifications (e.g., conjugation, inverted linkages, etc.), (b) base modifications, e.g. , replacement with modified bases, stabilizing bases, destabilizing bases, or bases that base pair with an expanded repertoire of partners, or conjugated bases, (c) sugar modifications (e.g., at the 2' position or 4' position) or replacement of the sugar, and (d) internucleoside linkage modifications, including modification or replacement of the phosphodiester linkages.
- end modifications e.g., 5' end modifications (e.g., phosphorylation, dephosphorylation, conjugation, inverted linkages, etc.), 3' end modifications (e.g., conjugation, inverted linkages, etc.)
- base modifications
- Dosage form or unit dosage form may be used to refer to a physically discrete unit of an active agent (e.g., a therapeutic or diagnostic agent) for administration to a subject.
- an active agent e.g., a therapeutic or diagnostic agent
- each such unit contains a predetermined quantity of active agent.
- such quantity is a unit dosage amount (or a whole fraction thereof) appropriate for administration in accordance with a dosing regimen that has been determined to correlate with a desired or beneficial outcome when administered to a relevant population (i.e., with a therapeutic dosing regimen).
- Dosing regimen or therapeutic regimen may be used to refer to a set of unit doses (typically more than one) that are administered individually to a subject, typically separated by periods of time.
- a given therapeutic agent has a recommended dosing regimen, which may involve one or more doses.
- a dosing regimen comprises a plurality of doses each of which is separated in time from other doses.
- individual doses are separated from one another by a time period of the same length; in some embodiments, a dosing regimen comprises a plurality of doses and at least two different time periods separating individual doses.
- all doses within a dosing regimen are of the same unit dose amount. In some embodiments, different doses within a dosing regimen are of different amounts. In some embodiments, a dosing regimen comprises a first dose in a first dose amount, followed by one or more additional doses in a second dose amount different from the first dose amount. In some embodiments, a dosing regimen comprises a first dose in a first dose amount, followed by one or more additional doses in a second dose amount same as the first dose amount. In some embodiments, a dosing regimen is correlated with a desired or beneficial outcome when administered across a relevant population (i.e., is a therapeutic dosing regimen).
- Excipient refers to a non-therapeutic agent that may be included in a pharmaceutical composition, for example, to provide or contribute to a desired consistency or stabilizing effect.
- suitable pharmaceutical excipients include, for example, starch, glucose, lactose, sucrose, gelatin, malt, rice, flour, chalk, silica gel, sodium stearate, glycerol monostearate, talc, sodium chloride, dried skim milk, glycerol, propylene, glycol, water, ethanol and the like. Heteroaliphatic.
- heteroaliphatic or “heteroaliphatic group”, as used herein, denotes an optionally substituted hydrocarbon moiety having, in addition to carbon atoms, from one to five heteroatoms, that may be straight-chain (i.e., unbranched), branched, or cyclic (“heterocyclic”) and may be completely saturated or may contain one or more units of unsaturation, but which is not aromatic.
- heteroatom refers to nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, and includes any oxidized form of nitrogen or sulfur, and any quaternized form of a basic nitrogen.
- nitrogen also includes a substituted nitrogen.
- heteroaliphatic groups contain 1-10 carbon atoms wherein 1-3 carbon atoms are optionally and independently replaced with heteroatoms selected from oxygen, nitrogen, and sulfur. In some embodiments, heteroaliphatic groups contain 1-4 carbon atoms, wherein 1-2 carbon atoms are optionally and independently replaced with heteroatoms selected from oxygen, nitrogen, and sulfur. In yet other embodiments, heteroaliphatic groups contain 1-3 carbon atoms, wherein 1 carbon atom is optionally and independently replaced with a heteroatom selected from oxygen, nitrogen, and sulfur. Suitable heteroaliphatic groups include, but are not limited to, linear or branched, heteroalkyl, heteroalkenyl, and heteroalkynyl groups. For example, a 1 - to 10 atom heteroaliphatic group includes the following exemplary groups: -O-CH3, -CH2-O-CH3, -O-CH2-CH2-O-CH2-CH2-O-CH3, and the like.
- Heteroaryl and “heteroar-”, used alone or as part of a larger moiety, e.g., “heteroaralkyl”, or “heteroaralkoxy”, refer to monocyclic or bicyclic ring groups having 5 to 10 ring atoms (e.g., 5- to 6-membered monocyclic heteroaryl or 9- to 10-membered bicyclic heteroaryl); having 6, 10, or 14 ir-electrons shared in a cyclic array; and having, in addition to carbon atoms, from one to five heteroatoms.
- heteroaryl and “heteroar-”, used alone or as part of a larger moiety, e.g., “heteroaralkyl”, or “heteroaralkoxy”, refer to monocyclic or bicyclic ring groups having 5 to 10 ring atoms (e.g., 5- to 6-membered monocyclic heteroaryl or 9- to 10-membered bicyclic heteroaryl); having 6, 10, or 14 ir-e
- Heteroaryl groups include, without limitation, thienyl, furanyl, pyrrolyl, imidazolyl, pyrazolyl, triazolyl, tetrazolyl, oxazolyl, isoxazolyl, oxadiazolyl, thiazolyl, isothiazolyl, thiadiazolyl, pyridyl, pyridazinyl, pyrimidinyl, pyrazinyl, indolizinyl, purinyl, naphthyridinyl, pteridinyl, imidazo[1 ,2-a]pyrimidinyl, imidazo[1 ,2-a]pyridyl, imidazo[4,5-b]pyridyl, imidazo[4,5- c]pyridyl, pyrrolopyridyl, pyrrolopyrazinyl, thienopyrimidinyl, triazolopyridyl, and be
- heteroaryl and “heteroar-”, as used herein, also include groups in which a heteroaromatic ring is fused to one or more aryl, cycloaliphatic, or heterocyclyl rings, where the radical or point of attachment is on the heteroaromatic ring (i.e., a bicyclic heteroaryl ring having 1 to 3 heteroatoms).
- Nonlimiting examples include indolyl, isoindolyl, benzothienyl, benzofuranyl, dibenzofuranyl, indazolyl, benzimidazolyl, benzotriazolyl, benzothiazolyl, benzothiadiazolyl, benzoxazolyl, quinolyl, isoquinolyl, cinnolinyl, phthalazinyl, quinazolinyl, quinoxalinyl, 4/7-quinolizinyl, carbazolyl, acridinyl, phenazinyl, phenothiazinyl, phenoxazinyl, tetrahydroquinolinyl, tetrahydroisoquinolinyl, pyrido[2,3-b]-1 ,4-oxazin-3(4H)-one, 4H-thieno[3,2-b]pyrrole, and benzoisoxazolyl.
- heteroaryl
- Heteroatom refers to nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, and includes any oxidized form of nitrogen or sulfur, and any quaternized form of a basic nitrogen.
- Heterocycle As used herein, the terms “heterocycle”, “heterocyclyl”, “heterocyclic radical”, and “heterocyclic ring” are used interchangeably and refer to a stable 3- to 8- membered monocyclic, a 6- to 10-membered bicyclic, or a 10- to 16-membered polycyclic heterocyclic moiety that is either saturated or partially unsaturated, and having, in addition to carbon atoms, one or more, such as one to four, heteroatoms, as defined above.
- nitrogen includes a substituted nitrogen.
- the nitrogen may be N (as in 3,4-dihydro-2H-pyrrolyl), NH (as in pyrrolidinyl), or NR + (as in N-substituted pyrrolidinyl).
- a heterocyclic ring can be attached to its pendant group at any heteroatom or carbon atom that results in a stable structure and any of the ring atoms can be optionally substituted.
- saturated or partially unsaturated heterocyclic radicals include, without limitation, azetidinyl, oxetanyl, tetrahydrofuranyl, tetrahydrothienyl, pyrrolidinyl, piperidinyl, decahydroquinolinyl, oxazolidinyl, piperazinyl, dioxanyl, dioxolanyl, diazepinyl, oxazepinyl, thiazepinyl, morpholinyl, and thiamorpholinyl.
- a heterocyclyl group may be mono-, bi-, tri-, or polycyclic, preferably mono-, bi-, or tricyclic, more preferably mono- or bicyclic.
- a bicyclic heterocyclic ring also includes groups in which the heterocyclic ring is fused to one or more aryl rings.
- Exemplary bicyclic heterocyclic groups include indolinyl, isoindolinyl, benzodioxolyl, 1 ,3- dihydroisobenzofuranyl, 2,3-dihydrobenzofuranyl, and tetrahydroquinolinyl.
- a bicyclic heterocyclic ring can also be a spirocyclic ring system (e.g., 7- to 11 -membered spirocyclic fused heterocyclic ring having, in addition to carbon atoms, one or more heteroatoms as defined above (e.g., one, two, three or four heteroatoms)).
- a bicyclic heterocyclic ring can also be a bridged ring system (e.g., 7- to 11 -membered bridged heterocyclic ring having one, two, or three bridging atoms.
- Nanoparticle refers to a discrete entity of small size, e.g., typically having a longest dimension that is shorter than about 1000 nanometers (nm) and often is shorter than 500 nm, or even 100 nm or less. In many embodiments, a nanoparticle may be characterized by a longest dimension between about 1 nm and about 100 nm, or between about 1 pm and about 500 nm, or between about 1 nm and 1000 nm.
- a population of microparticles is characterized by an average size (e.g., longest dimension) that is below about 1000 nm, about 500 nm, about 100 nm, about 50 nm, about 40 nm, about 30 nm, about 20 nm, or about 10 nm and often above about 1 nm.
- a microparticle may be substantially spherical (e.g., so that its longest dimension may be its diameter).
- a nanoparticle has a diameter of less than 100 nm as defined by the National Institutes of Health.
- nanoparticles are micelles in that they comprise an enclosed compartment, separated from the bulk solution by a micellar membrane, typically comprised of amphiphilic entities which surround and enclose a space or compartment (e.g., to define a lumen).
- a micellar membrane is comprised of at least one polymer, such as for example a biocompatible and/or biodegradable polymer.
- nucleic acid refers to a polymer of at least 10 nucleotides or more.
- a nucleic acid is or comprises DNA.
- a nucleic acid is or comprises RNA.
- a nucleic acid is or comprises a mixture of DNA and RNA.
- a nucleic acid is or comprises peptide nucleic acid (PNA).
- PNA peptide nucleic acid
- a nucleic acid is or comprises a single stranded nucleic acid.
- a nucleic acid is or comprises a double-stranded nucleic acid.
- a nucleic acid comprises both single and double-stranded portions.
- a nucleic acid comprises a backbone that comprises one or more phosphodiester linkages.
- a nucleic acid comprises a backbone that comprises both phosphodiester and non-phosphodiester linkages.
- a nucleic acid may comprise a backbone that comprises one or more phosphorothioate, phosphorodithioate, phosphoramide, phosphite-borane complexes, or 5'-N-phosphoramidite linkages and/or one or more peptide bonds, e.g., as in a “peptide nucleic acid”.
- a nucleic acid comprises one or more, or all, natural residues (e.g., adenine, cytosine, deoxyadenosine, deoxycytidine, deoxyguanosine, deoxythymidine, guanine, thymine, uracil). In some embodiments, a nucleic acid comprises on or more, or all, non-natural residues.
- natural residues e.g., adenine, cytosine, deoxyadenosine, deoxycytidine, deoxyguanosine, deoxythymidine, guanine, thymine, uracil.
- a non-natural residue comprises a nucleoside analog (e.g., 2-aminoadenosine, 2- thiothymidine, inosine, pyrrolo-pyrimidine, 3 -methyl adenosine, 5-methylcytidine, C-5 propynyl-cytidine, C-5 propynyl-uridine, 2-aminoadenosine, C5-bromouridine, C5- fluorouridine, C5-iodouridine, C5-propynyl-uridine, C5 -propynyl-cytidine, C5- methylcytidine, 2-aminoadenosine, 7-deazaadenosine, 7-deazaguanosine, 8- oxoadenosine, 8-oxoguanosine, 6-O-methylguanine, 2-thiocytidine, methylated bases, intercalated bases, and combinations thereof).
- a non-natural residue comprises one or more modified sugars (e.g., 2'-fluororibose, ribose, 2'- deoxyribose, arabinose, and hexose) as compared to those in natural residues.
- a nucleic acid has a nucleotide sequence that encodes a functional gene product such as an RNA or polypeptide.
- a nucleic acid has a nucleotide sequence that comprises one or more introns.
- a nucleic acid may be prepared by isolation from a natural source, enzymatic synthesis (e.g., by polymerization based on a complementary template, e.g., in vivo or in vitro, reproduction in a recombinant cell or system, or chemical synthesis.
- enzymatic synthesis e.g., by polymerization based on a complementary template, e.g., in vivo or in vitro, reproduction in a recombinant cell or system, or chemical synthesis.
- a nucleic acid is at least 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60, 65, 70, 75, 80, 85, 90, 95, 100, 110, 120, 130, 140, 150, 160, 170, 180, 190, 20, 225, 250, 275, 300, 325, 350, 375, 400, 425, 450, 475, 500, 600, 700, 800, 900, 1000, 1500, 2000, 2500, 3000, 3500, 4000, 4500, 5000, 5500, 6000, 6500, 7000, 7500, 8000, 8500, 9000, 9500, 10,000, 10,500, 11 ,000, 11 ,500, 12,000, 12,500, 13,000,
- Nucleic acid particle can be used to deliver nucleic acid to a target site of interest (e.g., cell, tissue, organ, and the like).
- a nucleic acid particle may be formed from at least one cationic or cationically ionizable lipid or lipid-like material, at least one cationic polymer such as protamine, or a mixture thereof and nucleic acid.
- Nucleic acid particles include lipid nanoparticle (LNP)-based and lipoplex (LPX)-based formulations.
- nucleotide refers to its art-recognized meaning. When a number of nucleotides is used as an indication of size, e.g., of a polynucleotide, a certain number of nucleotides refers to the number of nucleotides on a single strand, e.g., of a polynucleotide.
- parenteral administration and “administered parenterally” as used herein have their art-understood meaning referring to modes of administration other than enteral and topical administration, usually by injection, and include, without limitation, intravenous, intramuscular, intra-arterial, intrathecal, intracapsular, intraorbital, intracardiac, intradermal, intraperitoneal, transtracheal, subcutaneous, subcuticular, intraarticulare, subcapsular, subarachnoid, intraspinal, and intrasternal injection and infusion.
- Partially unsaturated refers to a ring moiety that includes at least one double or triple bond between ring atoms.
- the term “partially unsaturated” is intended to encompass rings having multiple sites of unsaturation, but is not intended to include aromatic (e.g., aryl or heteroaryl) moieties, as herein defined.
- a patient refers to any organism to which a provided composition is or may be administered, e.g., for experimental, diagnostic, prophylactic, cosmetic, and/or therapeutic purposes. Typical patients or subjects include animals (e.g., mammals such as mice, rats, rabbits, non-human primates, and/or humans). In some embodiments, a patient is a human. In some embodiments, a patient or a subject is suffering from or susceptible to one or more disorders or conditions. In some embodiments, a patient or subject displays one or more symptoms of a disorder or condition. In some embodiments, a patient or subject has been diagnosed with one or more disorders or conditions. In some embodiments, a patient or a subject is receiving or has received certain therapy to diagnose and/or to treat a disease, disorder, or condition.
- animals e.g., mammals such as mice, rats, rabbits, non-human primates, and/or humans.
- a patient is a human.
- a patient or a subject is suffering from or susceptible to one or more disorders or conditions
- composition refers to an active agent, formulated together with one or more pharmaceutically acceptable carriers.
- the active agent is present in unit dose amount appropriate for administration in a therapeutic or dosing regimen that shows a statistically significant probability of achieving a predetermined therapeutic effect when administered to a relevant population.
- compositions may be specially formulated for administration in solid or liquid form, including those adapted for the following: oral administration, for example, drenches (aqueous or non-aqueous solutions or suspensions), tablets, e.g., those targeted for buccal, sublingual, and systemic absorption, boluses, powders, granules, pastes for application to the tongue; parenteral administration, for example, by subcutaneous, intramuscular, intravenous or epidural injection as, for example, a sterile solution or suspension, or sustained-release formulation; topical application, for example, as a cream, ointment, or a controlled-release patch or spray applied to the skin, lungs, or oral cavity; intravaginally or intrarectally, for example, as a pessary, cream, or foam; sublingually; ocularly; transdermally; or nasally, pulmonary, and to other mucosal surfaces.
- oral administration for example, drenches (aqueous or non-aqueous solutions or suspension
- pharmaceutically acceptable refers to those compounds, materials, compositions, and/or dosage forms which are, within the scope of sound medical judgment, suitable for use in contact with the tissues of human beings and animals without excessive toxicity, irritation, allergic response, or other problem or complication, commensurate with a reasonable benefit/risk ratio.
- compositions that are appropriate for use in pharmaceutical contexts, i.e., salts which are, within the scope of sound medical judgment, suitable for use in contact with the tissues of humans and lower animals without undue toxicity, irritation, allergic response and the like, and are commensurate with a reasonable benefit/risk ratio.
- Pharmaceutically acceptable salts are well known in the art. For example, S. M. Berge, et al. describes pharmaceutically acceptable salts in detail in J. Pharmaceutical Sciences, 66: 1-19 (1977).
- Physiological conditions has its art-understood meaning referencing conditions under which cells or organisms live and/or reproduce.
- the term refers to conditions of the external or internal mileu that may occur in nature for an organism or cell system.
- physiological conditions are those conditions present within the body of a human or non-human animal, especially those conditions present at and/or within a surgical site.
- Physiological conditions typically include, e.g., a temperature range of 20 - 40°C, atmospheric pressure of 1 , pH of 6-8, glucose concentration of 1 -20 mM, oxygen concentration at atmospheric levels, and gravity as it is encountered on earth.
- conditions in a laboratory are manipulated and/or maintained at physiologic conditions.
- physiological conditions are encountered in an organism.
- polycyclic refers to a saturated or unsaturated ring system having two or more rings (for example, heterocyclyl rings, heteroaryl rings, cycloalkyl rings, or aryl rings), having between 7 and 20 atoms, in which one or more carbon atoms are common to two adjacent rings.
- a polycyclic ring system refers to a saturated or unsaturated ring system having three or more rings (for example, heterocyclyl rings, heteroaryl rings, cycloalkyl rings, or aryl rings), having between 14 and 20 atoms, in which one or more carbon atoms are common to two adjacent rings.
- polycyclic ring system may be fused (i.e., bicyclic or tricyclic), spirocyclic, or a combination thereof.
- An example polycyclic ring is a steroid.
- Polypeptide typically has its art- recognized meaning of a polymer of at least three amino acids or more.
- polypeptide is intended to be sufficiently general as to encompass not only polypeptides having a complete sequence recited herein, but also to encompass polypeptides that represent functional, biologically active, or characteristic fragments, portions or domains (e.g., fragments, portions, or domains retaining at least one activity) of such complete polypeptides.
- polypeptides may contain L-amino acids, D-amino acids, or both and/or may contain any of a variety of amino acid modifications or analogs known in the art. Useful modifications include, e.g., terminal acetylation, amidation, methylation, etc.
- polypeptides may comprise natural amino acids, non-natural amino acids, synthetic amino acids, and combinations thereof (e.g., may be or comprise peptidomimetics).
- Reference As used herein describes a standard or control relative to which a comparison is performed. For example, in some embodiments, an agent, animal, individual, population, sample, sequence or value of interest is compared with a reference or control agent, animal, individual, population, sample, sequence or value. In some embodiments, a reference or control is tested and/or determined substantially simultaneously with the testing or determination of interest. In some embodiments, a reference or control is a historical reference or control, optionally embodied in a tangible medium. Typically, as would be understood by those skilled in the art, a reference or control is determined or characterized under comparable conditions or circumstances to those under assessment. Those skilled in the art will appreciate when sufficient similarities are present to justify reliance on and/or comparison to a particular possible reference or control.
- Ribonucleotide encompasses unmodified ribonucleotides and modified ribonucleotides.
- unmodified ribonucleotides include the purine bases adenine (A) and guanine (G), and the pyrimidine bases cytosine (C) and uracil (U).
- Modified ribonucleotides may include one or more modifications including, but not limited to, for example, (a) end modifications, e.g., 5' end modifications (e.g., phosphorylation, dephosphorylation, conjugation, inverted linkages, etc.), 3' end modifications (e.g., conjugation, inverted linkages, etc.), (b) base modifications, e.g. , replacement with modified bases, stabilizing bases, destabilizing bases, or bases that base pair with an expanded repertoire of partners, or conjugated bases, (c) sugar modifications (e.g., at the 2' position or 4' position) or replacement of the sugar, and (d) internucleoside linkage modifications, including modification or replacement of the phosphodiester linkages.
- end modifications e.g., 5' end modifications (e.g., phosphorylation, dephosphorylation, conjugation, inverted linkages, etc.), 3' end modifications (e.g., conjugation, inverted linkages, etc.)
- base modifications
- RNA Ribonucleic acid
- an RNA refers to a polymer of ribonucleotides.
- an RNA is single stranded.
- an RNA is double stranded.
- an RNA comprises both single and double stranded portions.
- an RNA can comprise a backbone structure as described in the definition of “Nucleic acid / Polynucleotide” above.
- An RNA can be a regulatory RNA (e.g., siRNA, microRNA, etc.), or a messenger RNA (mRNA). In some embodiments where an RNA is a mRNA.
- RNA typically comprises at its 3’ end a poly(A) region.
- an RNA typically comprises at its 5’ end an art-recognized cap structure, e.g., for recognizing and attachment of a mRNA to a ribosome to initiate translation.
- a RNA is a synthetic RNA. Synthetic RNAs include RNAs that are synthesized in vitro (e.g., by enzymatic synthesis methods and/or by chemical synthesis methods).
- substituted whether preceded by the term “optionally” or not, means that one or more hydrogens of the designated moiety are replaced with a suitable substituent.
- “optionally substituted” group may have a suitable substituent at each substitutable position of the group, and when more than one position in any given structure may be substituted with more than one substituent selected from a specified group, the substituent may be either the same or different at every position.
- Combinations of substituents envisioned by this invention are preferably those that result in the formation of stable or chemically feasible compounds.
- the term “stable,” as used herein, refers to compounds that are not substantially altered when subjected to conditions to allow for their production, detection, and, in certain embodiments, their recovery, purification, and use for one or more of the purposes provided herein.
- Groups described as being “substituted” preferably have between 1 and 4 substituents, more preferably 1 or 2 substituents.
- Groups described as being “optionally substituted” may be unsubstituted or be “substituted” as described above.
- Suitable monovalent substituents on R° are independently halogen, - OSiR* 3 , -C(O)SR* -(C1-4 straight or branched alkylene)C(O)OR*, or -SSR* wherein each R* is unsubstituted or where preceded by “halo” is substituted only with one or more halogens, and is independently selected from C1-4 aliphatic, -CH 2 Ph, -0(CH 2 )o- iPh, or a 3- to 6-membered saturated, partially unsaturated, or aryl ring having 0-4 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur.
- Suitable divalent substituents that are bound to vicinal substitutable carbons of an “optionally substituted” group include: -O(CR* 2 ) 2-3 O-, wherein each independent occurrence of R* is selected from hydrogen, C1-6 aliphatic which may be substituted as defined below, or an unsubstituted 5-6-membered saturated, partially unsaturated, or aryl ring having 0-4 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur.
- Suitable substituents on the aliphatic group of R* include halogen, -R*, -(haloR*), -OH, -OR*, -O(haloR’), -CN, -C(O)OH, -C(O)OR*, -NH 2 , -NHR*, -NR* 2 , or -NO 2 , wherein each R* is unsubstituted or where preceded by “halo” is substituted only with one or more halogens, and is independently C1-4 aliphatic, -CH 2 Ph, -O(CH 2 ) 0 -I Ph, or a 3- to 6- membered saturated, partially unsaturated, or aryl ring having 0-4 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur.
- each R f is independently hydrogen, C1-6 aliphatic which may be substituted as defined below, unsubstituted -OPh, or an unsubstituted 3- to 6-membered saturated, partially unsaturated, or aryl ring having 0-4 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, or, notwithstanding the definition above, two independent occurrences of R f , taken together with their intervening atom(s) form an unsubstituted 3- to 12-membered saturated, partially unsaturated, or aryl mono- or bicyclic ring having 0- 4 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur.
- Suitable substituents on the aliphatic group of R f are independently halogen, - R*, -(haloR*), -OH, -OR*, -O(haloR*), -CN, -C(O)OH, -C(O)OR*, -NH 2 , -NHR*, - NR* 2 , or -NO 2 , wherein each R* is unsubstituted or where preceded by “halo” is substituted only with one or more halogens, and is independently C1-4 aliphatic, -CH 2 Ph, -0(CH 2 )O-I Ph, or a 3- to 6-membered saturated, partially unsaturated, or aryl ring having 0-4 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur.
- Small molecule means a low molecular weight organic and/or inorganic compound.
- a “small molecule” is a molecule that is less than about 5 kilodaltons (kD) in size.
- a small molecule is less than about 4 kD, 3 kD, about 2 kD, or about 1 kD.
- the small molecule is less than about 800 daltons (D), about 600 D, about 500 D, about 400 D, about 300 D, about 200 D, or about 100 D.
- a small molecule is less than about 2000 g/mol, less than about 1500 g/mol, less than about 1000 g/mol, less than about 800 g/mol, or less than about 500 g/mol. In some embodiments, a small molecule is not a polymer.
- a small molecule does not include a polymeric moiety. In some embodiments, a small molecule is not and/or does not comprise a protein or polypeptide (e.g., is not an oligopeptide or peptide). In some embodiments, a small molecule is not and/or does not comprise a polynucleotide (e.g., is not an oligonucleotide). In some embodiments, a small molecule is not and/or does not comprise a polysaccharide; for example, in some embodiments, a small molecule is not a glycoprotein, proteoglycan, glycolipid, etc.). In some embodiments, a small molecule is not a lipid.
- a small molecule is a modulating agent (e.g., is an inhibiting agent or an activating agent). In some embodiments, a small molecule is biologically active. In some embodiments, a small molecule is detectable (e.g., comprises at least one detectable moiety). In some embodiments, a small molecule is a therapeutic agent.
- a modulating agent e.g., is an inhibiting agent or an activating agent.
- a small molecule is biologically active.
- a small molecule is detectable (e.g., comprises at least one detectable moiety). In some embodiments, a small molecule is a therapeutic agent.
- certain small molecule compounds have structures that can exist in one or more steroisomeric forms.
- such a small molecule may be utilized in accordance with the present disclosure in the form of an individual enantiomer, diastereomer or geometric isomer, or may be in the form of a mixture of stereoisomers; in some embodiments, such a small molecule may be utilized in accordance with the present disclosure in a racemic mixture form.
- certain small molecule compounds have structures that can exist in one or more tautomeric forms. In some embodiments, such a small molecule may be utilized in accordance with the present disclosure in the form of an individual tautomer, or in a form that interconverts between tautomeric forms.
- small molecule compounds have structures that permit isotopic substitution (e.g., 2 H or 3 H for H; 11 C, 13 C or 14 C for 12 C; 13 N or 15 N for 14 N; 17 O or 18 O for 16 O; 36 CI for 35 CI or 37 CI; 18 F for 19 F; 131 l for 127 l; etc.).
- isotopic substitution e.g., 2 H or 3 H for H; 11 C, 13 C or 14 C for 12 C; 13 N or 15 N for 14 N; 17 O or 18 O for 16 O; 36 CI for 35 CI or 37 CI; 18 F for 19 F; 131 l for 127 l; etc.
- such a small molecule may be utilized in accordance with the present disclosure in one or more isotopically modified forms, or mixtures thereof.
- reference to a particular small molecule compound may relate to a specific form of that compound.
- a particular small molecule compound may be provided and/or utilized in a salt form (e.g., in an acid-addition or base-addition salt form, depending on the compound); in some such embodiments, the salt form may be a pharmaceutically acceptable salt form.
- a small molecule compound is one that exists or is found in nature
- that compound may be provided and/or utilized in accordance in the present disclosure in a form different from that in which it exists or is found in nature.
- a reference preparation of interest e.g., in a primary sample from a source of interest such as a biological or environmental source
- a preparation of a single stereoisomer of a small molecule compound may be considered to be a different form of the compound than a racemic mixture of the compound; a particular salt of a small molecule compound may be considered to be a different form from another salt form of the compound; a preparation that contains only a form of the compound that contains one conformational isomer ((Z) or (E)) of a double bond may be considered to be a different form of the compound from one that contains the other conformational isomer ((E) or (Z)) of the double bond; a preparation in which one or more atoms is a different isotope than is present in a reference preparation may be considered to be a different form; etc.
- the symbol refers to a point of attachment between two atoms. Additionally or alternatively, the symbol refers to a point of attachment ring in a spirocyclic manner.
- Treat As used herein, the terms “treat,” “treatment,” or “treating” refer to any method used to partially or completely alleviate, ameliorate, relieve, inhibit, prevent, delay onset of, reduce severity of, and/or reduce incidence of one or more symptoms or features of a disease, disorder, and/or condition. Treatment may be administered to a subject who does not exhibit signs of a disease, disorder, and/or condition. In some embodiments, treatment may be administered to a subject who exhibits only early signs of the disease, disorder, and/or condition, for example, for the purpose of decreasing the risk of developing pathology associated with the disease, disorder, and/or condition.
- the present disclosure provides, among other things, cationic or ionizable thiolipid compounds useful for forming particles comprising nucleic acids. As described herein, in some embodiments, the present disclosure provides a compound represented by formula I:
- L 1 and L 2 are each independently an optionally substituted C1-C30 aliphatic group
- L 3 is a bond, optionally substituted C1-C10 aliphatic group, or optionally substituted 2- to 10-membered heteroaliphatic group;
- X 1 and X 2 are each independently selected from a bond, -OC(O)-, -C(O)O-, -S(O) 2 N(R 1 )- , -N(R 1 )S(O) 2 , -S(O)-, -S(O) 2 -, -S(O) 2 C(R 1 ) 2 -, -OC(S)C(R 1 ) 2 -, -C(R 1 ) 2 C(S)O-, and -S-, wherein one or both of X 1 or X 2 is selected from -S(O) 2 N(R 1 )-, -N(R 1 )S(O) 2 , -S(O)-, - S(O) 2 -, -S(O) 2 C(R 1 ) 2 -, -OC(S)C(R 1 ) 2 C(S)O-, and -S-, wherein one or both of X 1 or
- G is -N(R 2 )C(S)N(R 2 ) 2 , -OH, -N(R 2 ) 2 , , -N + (R 3 ) 3 , -N(R 5 )C(O)R 3 , -N(R 5 )S(O) 2 R 3 , - N(R 5 )C(O)N(R 3 ) 2 , -CH(N-R 2 ), or -R 4 ; each R 2 is, independently, at each instance, selected from the group consisting of H, optionally substituted Ci-Ce aliphatic and OR 3 ; or two instances of R 2 come together with the atoms to which they are attached to form an optionally substituted 4- to 12-membered heterocycle ring or an optionally substituted 4- to 12-membered heteroaryl ring; each R 3 is, independently, at each instance, selected from the group consisting of H and optionally substituted C1-C10 aliphatic; and
- R 4 is optionally substituted 4- to 12-membered heterocycle, optionally substituted 4- to 12 membered heteroaryl, C6-C12 aryl substituted with one or more of -(CH2)o e-OH or - (CH 2 )O- 6 -N(R 5 )2, or C3-C12 cycloaliphatic substituted with one or more of oxo, -(CH 2 ) 0 -6- OH, or -(CH 2 )o- 6 -N(R 5 )2; each R 5 is independently selected from H and optionally substituted Ci-Ce aliphatic.
- L 1 and L 2 are each independently an optionally substituted C1-C30 aliphatic group.
- L 1 is optionally substituted C1-C30 aliphatic.
- L 1 is C1-C10 aliphatic.
- L 1 is optionally substituted C1-C30 alkylene.
- L 1 is optionally substituted C1-C30 alkenylene.
- L 1 is C1-C10 alkylene.
- L 1 is — (CH 2 )I io--
- L 2 is optionally substituted C1-C30 aliphatic.
- L 2 is C1-C10 aliphatic.
- L 2 is optionally substituted C1-C30 alkylene. In some embodiments, L 2 is optionally substituted C1-C30 alkenylene. In some embodiments, L 2 is C1-C10 alkylene. In some embodiments, L 2 is -(CH2)I-IO-. In some embodiments, L 1 is -(CH2)e-, and L 2 is -(CH2)s-. In some embodiments, L 1 and L 2 are each C1-C30 alkylene. In some embodiments, L 1 and L 2 are each -(CH 2 ) 6 -w- In some embodiments, L 1 and L 2 are each -(CH2)e-.
- L 1 and L 2 are each -(CH 2 ) 7 -. In some embodiments, L 1 and L 2 are each -(CH2)s-. In some embodiments, L 1 and L 2 are each -(CH 2 ) 9 -.
- L 1 and L 2 are the same. In some embodiments, L 1 and L 2 are different.
- X 1 and X 2 are each independently selected from a bond, -OC(O)-, -C(O)O-, -S(O) 2 N(R 1 )-, -N(R 1 )S(O) 2 , -S(O)-, -S(O) 2 -, -S(O) 2 C(R 1 ) 2 -, -OC(S)C(R 1 ) 2 -, - C(R 1 )2C(S)O-, and -S-, wherein one or both of X 1 or X 2 is selected from -S(O)2N(R 1 )-, - N(R 1 )S(O) 2 , -S(O)-, -S(O) 2 -, -S(O) 2 C(R 1 ) 2 -, -OC(S)C(R 1 ) 2 -, -C(R 1 ) 2 C(S)O-, and
- one of X 1 and X 2 is a bond, -OC(O)-, -C(O)O-, -S(O)2N(R 1 )-, - N(R 1 )S(O) 2 , -S(O)-, -S(O) 2 -, -S(O) 2 C(R 1 ) 2 -, -OC(S)C(R 1 ) 2 -, -C(R 1 ) 2 C(S)O-, or -S-, and the other of X 1 and X 2 is -S(O) 2 N(R 1 )-, -N(R 1 )S(O) 2 , -S(O)-, -S(O) 2 -, -S(O) 2 C(R 1 ) 2 -, - OC(S)C(R 1 )2-, -C(R 1 )2C(S)O-, or -S-.
- X 1 and X 2 are each As described herein, T 1 and T 2 are each independently an optionally substituted C3-C30 aliphatic. In some embodiments, T 1 is C3-C30 aliphatic. In some embodiments, T 1 is optionally substituted C3-C30 alkyl. In some embodiments, T 1 is optionally substituted C3- C20 alkyl. In some embodiments, T 1 is optionally substituted C5-C20 alkyl. In some embodiments, T 1 is optionally substituted straight-chained C3-C20 alkyl. In some embodiments, T 1 is optionally substituted branched C3-C20 alkyl.
- T 1 is optionally substituted C3-C20 alkenyl. In some embodiments, T 1 is optionally substituted C10-C20 alkenyl. In some embodiments, T 2 is C3-C30 aliphatic. In some embodiments, T 2 is optionally substituted C3-C30 alkyl. In some embodiments, T 2 is optionally substituted C3-C20 alkyl. In some embodiments, T 2 is optionally substituted C 5 - C20 alkyl. In some embodiments, T 2 is optionally substituted straight chained C3-C20 alkyl. In some embodiments, T 2 is optionally substituted branched C3-C20 alkyl.
- T 2 is optionally substituted C3-C20 alkenyl. In some embodiments, T 1 is optionally substituted C10-C20 alkenyl. In some embodiments, T 1 and T 2 are the same. In some embodiments, T 1 and T 2 are different.
- T 1 and T 2 are each independently selected from:
- moiety -L 1 -X 1 -T 1 is selected from the group consisting of:
- moiety -L 2 -X 2 -T 2 is selected from the group consisting of:
- moiety -L 1 -X 1 -T 1 and moiety -L 2 -X 2 -T 2 are each independently selected from:
- L 3 is a bond, optionally substituted C1-C10 aliphatic group, or optionally substituted 2- to 10-membered heteroaliphatic group. In some embodiments, L 3 is a bond. In some embodiments L 3 is optionally substituted C1-C10 aliphatic group, or optionally substituted 2- to 10-membered heteroaliphatic group. In some embodiments, L 3 is optionally substituted C1-C10 aliphatic. In some embodiments, L 3 is optionally substituted C1-C10 alkylene. In some embodiments, L 3 is optionally substituted C1-C10 alkenylene. In some embodiments, L 3 is optionally substituted alkynylene.
- L 3 is Ci-Ce alkylene. In some embodiments, L 3 is -(CH2)I 6-- In some embodiments, L 3 is -(CH2)2-4-. In some embodiments, L 3 is -(CH2)2-. In some embodiments, L 3 is -(CH2) 3 -. In some embodiments, L 3 is -(CH2)4-. In some embodiments, L 3 is -(CH2)5-. In some embodiments, L 3 is
- L 3 is optionally substituted 2- to 2-membered heteroaliphatic. In some embodiments L 3 is:
- G is G is - N(R 2 )C(S)N(R 2 ) 2 , -OH, -N(R 2 ) 2 , -N(R 5 )C(O)R 3 , -N(R 5 )S(O) 2 R 3 , -N(R 5 )C(O)N(R 3 ) 2 , -CH(N- R 2 ), or -R 4 .
- G is -N(R 2 )C(S)N(R 2 )2. In some embodiments, G is - N(H)C(S)N(R 2 )2. In some embodiments, G is -N(H)C(S)N(H)(R 2 ). In some embodiments, G is -N(CH 3 )C(S)N(R 2 ) 2 . In some embodiments, G is -N(OH)C(S)N(R 2 ) 2 .
- G is -N(H)C(S)N(R 2 )2, where each R 2 is selected from optionally substituted Ci-Ce aliphatic and OH. In some embodiments, G is -N(H)C(S)N(OH)(R 2 ), where R 2 is optionally substituted Ci-Ce aliphatic. In some embodiments, G is - N(H)C(S)N(R 2 ) 2 , where each R 2 is selected from optionally substituted Ci-Ce aliphatic. In some embodiments, G is -N(H)C(S)N(R 2 )2, where each R 2 is methyl, ethyl, propyl, or butyl.
- G is -N(H)C(S)N(CH 3 )2. In some embodiments, G is - N(H)C(S)N(CH 3 )(OCH 3 ). In some embodiments, G is -N(H)C(S)N(CH 3 )(OH). In some embodiments, G is -N(OH)C(S)N(CH 3 ) 2 .
- G is -N(H)C(S)N(R 2 )2, where two instances of R 2 come together with the atoms to which they are attached to form an optionally substituted 4- to 12- membered heterocycle ring or an optionally substituted 4- to 12-membered heteroaryl ring. In some embodiments, G is -N(H)C(S)N(R 2 )2, where two instances of R 2 come together with the atoms to which they are attached to form an optionally substituted 4- to 12-membered heterocycle ring.
- G is -N(H)C(S)N(R 2 )2, where two instances of R 2 come together with the atoms to which they are attached to form an optionally substituted azetidine, pyrrolidine, piperdine, piperazine, or azepane ring.
- G is - N(R 2 )C(S)N(H)(R 2 ), where two instances of R 2 come together with the atoms to which they are attached to form an optionally substituted 4- to 12- membered heterocycle ring.
- G is:
- G is -OH.
- G is -N(R 2 )2. In some embodiments, G is -N(R 2 )2, wherein each R 2 is independently H or optionally substituted Ci-Ce aliphatic. In some embodiments, G is -N(R 2 ) 2 , wherein each R 2 is optionally substituted Ci-Ce aliphatic. In some embodiments, G is-N(R 2 )2, wherein each R 2 is independently methyl, ethyl, propyl, butyl, pentyl, or hexyl. In some embodiments, G is -N(CH3)2.
- G is -N + (R 3 )2. It is understood that when G is -N + (R 3 )2, G is paired with a suitable counterion, such as halogen (e.g., Cl , F , Br , or I j to provide a chemically stable compound at neutral or physiological pH. In some embodiments, G is -N + (CH 3 ) 3 .
- halogen e.g., Cl , F , Br , or I j
- G is -N(R 5 )C(O)R 3 . In some embodiments G is -N(H)C(O)R 3 . In some embodiments, G is -N(H)C(O)-Ci-Ce aliphatic. In some embodiments, G is - N(H)C(O)-CH 3 .
- G is -N(R 5 )S(O)2R 3 . In some embodiments, G is -N(H)S(O)2R 3 . In some embodiments, G is -N(H)S(O)2-Ci-Ce aliphatic. In some embodiments, G is - N(H)S(O) 2 -CH 3 .
- G is -N(R 5 )C(O)N(R 3 )2. In some embodiments, G is - N(H)C(O)N(R 3 ) 2 . In some embodiments, G is -N(H)C(O)N(H)(R 3 ). G is - N(H)C(O)N(H)(CH 3 ). G is -N(H)C(O)N(CH 3 )2.
- G is -CH(N-R 2 ). In some embodiments, G is -CH(N-Ci-Ce aliphatic). In some embodiments, G is -CH(N-CH 3 ).
- G is R 4 , and R 4 is optionally substituted 4- to 12-membered heterocycle. In some embodiments, G is optionally substituted 4- to 6-membered monocyclic heterocycle. In some embodiments, G is optionally substituted azetidine, pyrrolidine, piperidine, piperazine, or azepane. In some embodiments, G is 6- to 12- membered bicyclic heterocycle. In some embodiments, G is 4- to 12-membered 31 heterocycle optionally substituted with -(CH 2 )o-4N(R°) 2 or -(CH 2 )o-40R°, and where R° is hydrogen or Ci-Ce aliphatic.
- G is R 4 and R 4 is optionally substituted 5- to 12-membered heteroaryl. In some embodiments, G is optionally substituted 5- to 6-membered monocyclic heteroaryl. In some embodiments, G is optionally substituted pyrrole, imidazole, pyrazole, thiazole, oxazole, or furan. In some embodiments, G is 6- to 12- membered bicyclic heteroaryl. In some embodiments, G is 5- to 12-membered heteroaryl optionally substituted with -(CH 2 ) 0 -4SR°, and where R° is hydrogen or Ci- Ce aliphatic. In some embodiments, G is
- G is R 4 , where R 4 is Ce-Ci 2 aryl substituted with one or more of -(CH 2 )O- 6 -OH or -(CH 2 )O 6-N(R 5 ) 2 . In some embodiments, G is phenyl substituted one or more of -(CH 2 ) 0-6 -OH or -(CH 2 ) 0-6 -N(R 5 ) 2 .
- G is R 4 , where R 4 Cs-Ci 2 cycloaliphatic substituted one or more of oxo, -(CH 2 )O- 6 -OH or-(CH 2 )o 6-N(R 5 ) 2 .
- G is C3-C6 cycloaliphatic substituted with one or more of oxo, -(CH 2 )oe-OH, or -(CH 2 )oe-N(R 5 )2.
- G is cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, or cyclohexyl optionally substituted with one or more of oxo, -OH, or -N(R 5 ) 2 .
- G is selected from:
- a moiety -L 3 -G can be a cationic or ionizable group, such that particular atoms, e.g., nitrogen atoms, in the moiety -L 3 -G can have a positive charge at either neutral pH or at physiological pH.
- a head group further comprises a suitable counterion (e.g., a halogen atom, such as Cl , Br , I , F , and the like).
- a moiety -L 3 -G is selected from:
- each R 2 is, independently, at each instance, selected from the group consisting of H, optionally substituted Ci-Ce aliphatic and OR 3 ; or two instances of R 2 come together with the atoms to which they are attached to form an optionally substituted 4- to 12-membered heterocycle ring or an optionally substituted 4- to 12- membered heteroaryl ring.
- each R 2 is, independently, at each instance, selected from the group consisting of H, optionally substituted Ci-Ce aliphatic, and OR 3 .
- two instances of R 2 come together with the atoms to which they are attached to form an optionally substituted 4- to 12-membered heterocycle ring or an optionally substituted 4- to 12-membered heteroaryl ring.
- each R 3 is, independently, at each instance, selected from the group consisting of H and optionally substituted C1-C10 aliphatic.
- R 4 is optionally substituted 4- to 12-membered heterocycle, optionally substituted 4- to 12 membered heteroaryl, C6-C12 aryl substituted with one or more of -(CH 2 )o- 6 -OH or -(CH 2 )o 6 -N(R 5 ) 2 , or Cs-Ci 2 cycloaliphatic substituted with one or more of oxo, -(CH 2 )o 6 -OH, or -(CH 2 )o 6 -N(R 5 ) 2 .
- each R 5 is independently selected from H and optionally substituted Ci-Ce aliphatic.
- a compound described herein is a compound represented by Formula Ila:
- a compound described herein is a compound represented by
- Formula lib lib or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein G, L 1 , L 2 , and L 3 are as described in classes and subclasses herein.
- a compound described herein is a compound represented by Formula lie:
- a compound described herein is represented by Formula Illa:
- Illa or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein L 1 , L 2 , X 1 , X 2 , T 1 , and T 2 are as described in classes and subclasses herein.
- a compound described herein is represented by Formula 11 lb: lllb or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein L 1 , L 2 , X 1 , X 2 , R 1 , T 1 , and T 2 are as described in classes and subclasses herein.
- a compound described herein is represented by Formula 11 Ic: or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein L 1 , L 2 , X 1 , X 2 , T 1 , and T 2 are as described in classes and subclasses herein.
- a compound described herein is represented by Formula 11 Id : or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein L 1 , L 2 , X 1 , X 2 , T 1 , and T 2 are as described in classes and subclasses herein.
- a compound described herein is represented by Formula 11 le: or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein L 1 , L 2 , R 1 , T 1 , and T 2 are as described in classes and subclasses herein.
- a compound described herein is represented by Formula lllf: or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein L 1 , L 2 , T 1 , and T 2 are as described in classes and subclasses herein.
- a compound described herein is represented by Formula Illg: mg or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein L 1 , L 2 , X 1 , X 2 , T 1 , and T 2 are as described in classes and subclasses herein.
- a compound described herein is represented by Formula lllg-1 : nig-1 or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein L 1 , L 2 , R 1 , T 1 , and T 2 are as described in classes and subclasses herein.
- a compound described herein is represented by Formula lllh-1 : lllh-1 or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein X 50 is -S-, -S(O)-, or -S(O)a-, n’ is 1-6, and R 100 is optionally substituted C1-C16 aliphatic.
- a compound described herein is represented by Formula lllh-2:
- a compound described herein is represented by Formula lllh-3: or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein X 50 is -S-, -S(O)-, or -S(O)a-, and n’ is 1 -6.
- a compound described herein is represented by Formula lllh-4: or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein n’ is 1 -6 and R 100 is optionally substituted C1-C16 aliphatic.
- a compound described herein is represented by Formula lllh-5: or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein n’ is 1-6 .
- a compound described herein is selected from Table 1 :
- provided compounds are provided and/or utilized in a salt form (e.g., a pharmaceutically acceptable salt form).
- a salt form e.g., a pharmaceutically acceptable salt form.
- Reference to a compound provided herein is understood to include reference to salts thereof, unless otherwise indicated.
- thiolipid compounds described herein are particularly useful over previous lipid compounds due, at least in part, to the ease of preparation.
- diverse fragments can be coupled through sulfur linkages in order to provide a wide array of thiolipid compounds that are useful for the preparation of nucleic acid particles.
- thiolipid compounds of the present disclosure can be prepared according to the following General
- a tail-linker moiety is any bivalent linker, such as an aliphatic or heteroaliphatic group; a tail-end is a hydrophobic group, e.g., an aliphatic group, a head group is a polar or cationic or ionizable head group, a tail junction is a biodegradeable group, such as an ester, or a sulfur-containing moiety (e.g., thioether, sulfonyl, or sulfonamide), and a headtail junction is a central atom or functional group connecting a tail or tails to the head group (e.g., a tertiary amine group).
- a tail-end is a hydrophobic group, e.g., an aliphatic group
- a head group is a polar or cationic or ionizable head group
- a tail junction is a biodegradeable group, such as an ester, or a sulfur-containing moiety (
- the present disclosure provides a method of preparing a compound represented by Formula IV:
- each of L 4 and L 5 are each independently an optionally substituted C1-C30 aliphatic group;
- L 6 is a bond, optionally substituted C1-C10 aliphatic group, or optionally substituted 2- to 10-membered heteroaliphatic group;
- X 3 and X 4 are each independently selected from a bond, -OC(O)-, -C(O)O-, -S(O) 2 N(R 40 )- , -N(R 40 )S(O) 2 , -S(O)-, -S(O) 2 -, -S(O) 2 C(R 40 ) 2 -, -OC(S)C(R 40 ) 2 -, -C(R 40 ) 2 C(S)O-, or -S-, wherein one or both of X 3 or X 4 is selected from -S(O) 2 N(R 40 )-, -N(R 40 )S(O) 2 , -S(O)-, - S(O) 2 -, -S(O) 2 C(R 40 ) 2 -, -OC(S)C(R 40 ) 2 C(S)O-, or -S-, wherein one or both of X 3 or
- T 3 and T 4 are each independently an optionally substituted Cs-C 2 o aliphatic;
- G 1 is -N(R 6 )C(S)N(R 6 ) 2 , -OH, -N(R 6 ) 2 , -N(R 9 )C(O)R 7 , -N(R 9 )S(O) 2 R 7 , -N(R 9 )C(O)N(R 7 ) 2 , -CH(N-R 7 ), or-R 8 ;
- each G 2 is independently O or N 2 ;
- each G 3 is independently halogen (e.g., Cl, Br, or I), -OTs, or OTf;
- each R 6 is, independently, at each instance, selected from the group consisting of H, optionally substituted Ci-Ce aliphatic or OR 7 ; or two instances of R 6 come together with the atoms to which they are attached to form an optionally substituted 4- to 12-membered heterocycle ring or an optionally substituted 4- to 12-membered heteroaryl ring;
- each R 7 is,
- R 8 is optionally substituted 4- to 12-membered heterocycle, optionally substituted 4- to 12 membered heteroaryl, Ce-Ci 2 aryl substituted with one or more of -(CH 2 )o- 6 -OH or - (CH 2 )O 6-N(R 9 ) 2 , or Cs-Ci 2 cycloaliphatic substituted with one or more of oxo, -(CH 2 )o 6- OH, or -(CH 2 )o- 6 -N(R 9 ) 2 ; and each R 9 is independently selected from H and optionally substituted Ci-Ce aliphatic.
- a reducing agent is NaBH 3 CN or NaBH(OCOCH 3 ) 3 .
- a reducing agent is NaBH 3 CN.
- a reducing agent is NaBH(OCOCH 3 ) 3 .
- a method of preparing a compound described herein further comprises preparing a compound represented by Formula Via or the compound represented by Formula Vila, wherein G 1 is O,
- an oxidizing agent is DMSO, PCC, or DMP. In some embodiments, an oxidizing agent is DMSO, and the method further comprises contacting the compound represented by Formula VIII or IX and DMSO with a sulfur trioxide pyridine complex (SOs'pyridine).
- SOs'pyridine sulfur trioxide pyridine complex
- a method of preparing a compound described herein further comprises preparing the compound represented by Formula VIII or IX:
- particles of the present disclosure comprise a compound described herein (e.g., a compound of one or more of formulae l-lllh-5), a nucleic acid (such as RNA (e.g., mRNA), DNA or mixtures thereof), and one or more of a polymer- conjugated lipid, a helper lipid, and a steroid.
- particles of the present disclosure comprise a compound described herein (e.g., a compound of one or more of formulae l-lllh-5), a nucleic acid (such as RNA (e.g., mRNA), DNA or mixtures thereof), a helper lipid, and a steroid.
- particles of the present disclosure comprise a compound described herein (e.g., a compound of one or more of formulae l-lllh-5), a nucleic acid (such as RNA (e.g., mRNA), DNA or mixtures thereof), a polymer-conjugated lipid, a helper lipid, and a steroid.
- a compound described herein e.g., a compound of one or more of formulae l-lllh-5
- a nucleic acid such as RNA (e.g., mRNA), DNA or mixtures thereof
- a polymer-conjugated lipid such as a helper lipid, and a steroid.
- Thiolipid compounds described herein comprise a cationic or cationically ionizable moiety that is capable of forming electrostatic interactions between the positively charged moiety and negatively charged nucleic acids, resulting in particle formation.
- particles described herein comprise more than one type of nucleic acid molecules, where the molecular parameters of the nucleic acid molecules may be similar or different from each other, like with respect to molar mass or fundamental structural elements such as molecular architecture, capping, coding regions or other features.
- a nucleic acid particle described herein is a nanoparticle.
- nanoparticle refers to a particle having an average diameter suitable for parenteral administration and is less than 1000 nm in diameter.
- a composition comprising nanoparticles can have an average nanoparticle size (e.g., mean diameter) of about 30 nm to about 150 nm, about 40 nm to about 150 nm, about 50 nm to about 150 nm, about 60 nm to about 130 nm, about 70 nm to about 110 nm, about 70 nm to about 100 nm, about 70 to about 90 nm, or about 70 nm to about 80 nm.
- a composition comprising nanoparticles can have an average nanoparticle size (e.g., mean diameter) of about 50 nm to about 100 nm. In some embodiments, a composition comprising nanoparticles can have an average nanoparticle size (e.g., mean diameter) of about 50 nm to about 150 nm. In some embodiments, a composition comprising nanoparticles can have an average nanoparticle size (e.g., mean diameter) of about 60 nm to about 120 nm.
- a composition comprising nanoparticles can have an average nanoparticle size (e.g., mean diameter) of about 30 nm, 35 nm, 40 nm, 45 nm, 50 nm, 55 nm, 60 nm, 65 nm, 70 nm, 75 nm, 80 nm, 85 nm, 90 nm, 95 nm, 100 nm, 105 nm, 110 nm, 115 nm, 120 nm, 125 nm, 130 nm, 135 nm, 140 nm, 145 nm, or 150 nm.
- average nanoparticle size e.g., mean diameter
- a composition comprising nucleic acid particles (e.g., ribonucleic acid particles or deoxyribonucleic acid particles) described herein may exhibit a polydispersity index less than about 0.5, less than about 0.4, less than about 0.3, or about 0.2 or less of said nanoparticles.
- a composition comprising nucleic acid particles (e.g., ribonucleic acid particles or deoxyribonucleic acid particles) described herein can exhibit a polydispersity index in a range of about 0.1 to about 0.3 or about 0.2 to about 0.3.
- Nucleic acid particles e.g., ribonucleic acid particles or deoxyribonucleic acid particles
- N/P ratio is the molar ratio of cationic (nitrogen) groups (the “N” in N/P) in the cationic polymer to the anionic (phosphate) groups (the “P” in N/P) in RNA.
- N cationic
- a cationic group is one that is either in cationic form (e.g., N + ), or one that is ionizable to become cationic.
- nucleic acid particle e.g., a ribonucleic acid particle
- N/P ratio greater than or equal to 4.
- nucleic acid particle e.g., a ribonucleic acid particle
- nucleic acid particle e.g., a ribonucleic acid particle
- a nucleic acid particle (e.g., a ribonucleic acid particle) described herein has an N/P ratio that is about 6 to about 12. In some embodiments, a nucleic acid particle described herein has an N/P ratio that is about 4 to about 12. In some embodiments, a nucleic acid particle (e.g., a ribonucleic acid particle) described herein has an N/P ratio that is about 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11 , 12, 13, 14, 15, or 16. In some embodiments, an N/P ratio for a nucleic acid particle (e.g., a ribonucleic acid particle) described herein is about 6. In some embodiments, an N/P ratio for a nucleic acid particle (e.g., a ribonucleic acid particle) described herein is about 12.
- lipids are intended to mean compounds that, in some embodiments, are capable of becoming cationic (i.e., becoming positively charged) at physiological pH.
- average diameter refers to the mean hydrodynamic diameter of particles as measured by dynamic laser light scattering (DLS) with data analysis using the so-called cumulant algorithm, which provides as results the so-called Z-average with the dimension of a length, and the polydispersity index (PDI), which is dimensionless (Koppel, D., J. Chem. Phys. 57, 1972, pp 4814-4820, ISO 13321 ).
- PDI polydispersity index
- the “polydispersity index” is preferably calculated based on dynamic light scattering measurements by the so-called cumulant analysis as mentioned in the definition of the “average diameter.” Under certain prerequisites, it can be taken as a measure of the size distribution of an ensemble of ribonucleic acid nanoparticles (e.g., ribonucleic acid nanoparticles).
- nucleic acid particles Different types have been described previously to be suitable for delivery of nucleic acid in particulate form (e.g. Kaczmarek, J. C. et al., 2017, Genome Medicine 9, 60).
- nanoparticle encapsulation of nucleic acid physically protects nucleic acid from degradation and, depending on the specific chemistry, can aid in cellular uptake and endosomal escape.
- nucleic acid species may be RNA and/or DNA.
- the particles described herein may contain one species of RNA (e.g., one species of mRNA) and one species of DNA.
- each nucleic acid species is separately formulated as an individual nucleic acid particle formulation.
- each individual nucleic acid particle formulation will comprise one nucleic acid species.
- the individual nucleic acid particle formulations may be present as separate entities, e.g., in separate containers. Such formulations are obtainable by providing each nucleic acid species separately (typically each in the form of a nucleic acid-containing solution) together with a particle-forming agent, thereby allowing the formation of particles.
- Respective particles will contain exclusively the specific nucleic acid species that is being provided when the particles are formed (individual particulate formulations).
- a composition such as a pharmaceutical composition comprises more than one individual nucleic acid particle formulation.
- Respective pharmaceutical compositions are referred to as “mixed particulate formulations.”
- Mixed particulate formulations according to the present disclosure are obtainable by forming, separately, individual nucleic acid particle formulations, as described above, followed by a step of mixing of the individual nucleic acid particle formulations. By the step of mixing, a formulation comprising a mixed population of nucleic acid-containing particles is obtainable. Individual nucleic acid particle populations may be together in one container, comprising a mixed population of individual nucleic acid particle formulations.
- nucleic acid species are formulated together as a “combined particulate formulation.”
- Such formulations are obtainable by providing a combined formulation (typically combined solution) of different nucleic acid species together with a particle-forming agent, thereby allowing the formation of particles.
- a “combined particulate formulation” will typically comprise particles that comprise more than one nucleic acid species.
- different nucleic acid species are typically present together in a single particle.
- nucleic acids when present in provided nucleic acid particles are resistant in aqueous solution to degradation with a nuclease.
- nucleic acid particles are lipid nanoparticles.
- lipid nanoparticles are cationic lipid nanoparticles comprising one or more cationic lipids (e.g., ones described herein), a nucleic acid (e.g., RNA and/or DNA), a polymer-conjugated lipid, a helper lipid, and a sterol.
- Lipid nanoparticles have proven useful for the delivery of nucleic acid cargo to tissue of interest. LNPs are used, for example, in certain commercial vaccines for treatment of COVID-19.
- LNPs of the present disclosure comprise i) a cationic lipid (e.g., a thiolipid compound described herein, such as a compound of any one of formulae I- lllh-5); ii) a helper lipid; iii) a polymer-conjugated lipid (e.g., a polyethylene glycol bound lipid “a PEG lipid”); and iv) a steroid.
- a cationic lipid e.g., a thiolipid compound described herein, such as a compound of any one of formulae I- lllh-5
- helper lipid e.g., a helper lipid
- a polymer-conjugated lipid e.g., a polyethylene glycol bound lipid “a PEG lipid”
- a steroid e.g., a steroid.
- a helper lipid is or comprises phosphatidylcholines, phosphatidylethanolamines, phosphatidylglycerols, phosphatidic acids, phosphatidylserines or sphingomyelin.
- a helper lipid is or comprises diacylphosphatidylcholines, such as distearoylphosphatidylcholine (DSPC), dioleoylphosphatidylcholine (DOPC), dimyristoylphosphatidylcholine (DMPC), dipentadecanoylphosphatidylcholine, dilauroylphosphatidylcholine, dipalmitoylphosphatidylcholine (DPPC), diarachidoylphosphatidylcholine (DAPC), dibehenoylphosphatidylcholine (DBPC), ditricosanoylphosphatidylcholine (DTPC), dilignoceroylphatidylcholine (DLPC), palmitoyloleoyl-phosphatidylcholine (POPC), 1 ,2- di-O-octadecenyl-sn-glycero-3-phosphocholine (18:0 Diether PC), 1
- helper lipids suitable for use in a lipid nanoparticle are described in WO2021/026358, WO 2017/075531 , and WO 2018/081480, the entire contents of each of which are incorporated herein by reference in their entirety.
- a lipid nanoparticle comprises about 5 to about 15 mol% of a phospholipid. In some embodiments, a lipid nanoparticle comprises about 8 to about 12 mol% of a phospholipid. In some embodiments, a lipid nanoparticle comprises about 10 mol% of a phospholipid. In some embodiments, a lipid nanoparticle comprises about 5 to about 15 mol% of DSPC. In some embodiments, a lipid nanoparticle comprises about 8 to about 12 mol% of DSPC. In some embodiments, a lipid nanoparticle comprises about 10 mol% of DSPC.
- LNPs of the present disclosure comprise a polymer-conjugated lipid.
- a polymer conjugated lipid is a lipid conjugated to polyethylene glycol (PEG-lipid).
- a PEG lipid is selected from pegylated di acyl glycerol (PEG-DAG) such as l-(monomethoxy-polyethyleneglycol)- 2,3- dimyristoylglycerol (PEG-DMG) (e.g., 1 ,2-dimyristoyl-rac-glycero-3- methoxypolyethylene glycol-2000 (PEG2000-DMG)), a pegylated phosphatidylethanoloamine (PEG-PE), a PEG succinate di acyl glycerol (PEG-S-DAG) such as 4-O-(2',3'-di(tetradecanoyloxy)propyl-1 -O-(w- me
- PEG-DAG pegy
- a PEG-lipid is PEG2000-DMG:
- a PEG-lipid is DMG-PEG.
- a PEG-lipid is provided in WO2021/026358, WO 2017/075531 , or WO 2018/081480, each of which is incorporated by reference in its entirety.
- a polymer-conjugated lipid is 2-[(polyethylene glycol)-2000]-N,N- ditetradecylacetamide (ALC-0159).
- a polymer-conjugated lipid is: or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, where n’ is an integer from about 45 to about 50.
- a polymer conjugated lipid is C16 PEG2000: wherein n in the formula above is from 30 to 60, such as about 50.
- the PEG-conjugated lipid is PEG2000-C-DMA which preferably refers to 3-N-[(w-methoxy polyethylene glycol)2000)carbamoyl]-1 ,2-dimyristyloxy-propylamine (MPEG-(2 kDa)-C-DMA) or methoxy-polyethylene glycol-2,3- bis(tetradecyloxy)propylcarbamate (2000).
- a PEG-lipid is selected from PEG-DAG, PEG-PE, PEG-S-DAG, PEG2000-DMG, PEG-S-DMG, PEG-cer, a PEG dialkyoxypropylcarbamate (e.g., co- methoxy(polyethoxy)ethyl-N-(2,3-di(tetradecanoxy)propyl)carbamate or 2,3- di(tetradecanoxy)propyl-N-(® methoxy(polyethoxy)ethyl)carbamate), ALC-0159, and combinations thereof.
- a PEG-lipid is ALC-0159 or PEG2000- DMG.
- a PEG-lipid is ALC-0159. In some embodiments, a PEG- lipid is PEG2000-DMG. In some embodiments, a PEG-lipid is PEG-DAG. In some embodiments, a PEG-lipid is PEG-PE. In some embodiments, a PEG-lipid is PEG-S- DAG. In some embodiments, a PEG-lipid is PEG-cer. In some embodiments, a PEG- lipid is a PEG dialkyoxypropylcarbamate.
- a PEG group that is part of a PEG-lipid has, on average in a composition comprising one or more PEG-lipid molecules, a weight average molecular weight (M w ) of about 2000 g/mol.
- a polymer-conjugated lipid is a polysarcosine-conjugated lipid, also referred to herein as sarcosinylated lipid or pSar-lipid.
- the term "sarcosinylated lipid” refers to a molecule comprising both a lipid portion and a polysarcosine (poly(N- methylglycine) portion.
- a polymer-conjugated lipid is a polyoxazoline (POX)-conjugated and/or polyoxazine (POZ)-conjugated lipid, also referred to herein as a conjugate of a POX and/or POZ polymer and one or more hydrophobic chains or as oxazolinylated and/or oxazinylated lipid or POX- and/or POZ-lipid.
- POX polyoxazoline
- POZ polyoxazine
- oxazinylated lipid or "POZ-lipid” refers to a molecule comprising both a lipid portion and a polyoxazine portion.
- oxazolinylated/oxazinylated lipid or "POX/POZ-lipid” or “POXZ-lipid” refers to a molecule comprising both a lipid portion and a portion of a copolymer of polyoxazoline and polyoxazine.
- an LNP described herein may comprise a sarcosinylated lipid.
- the nucleic acid compositions (such as DNA or RNA compositions, especially mRNA compositions) described herein comprise a sarcosinylated lipid and are substantially free of a pegylated lipid (or do not contain a pegylated lipid).
- the nucleic acid compositions (such as DNA or RNA compositions) described herein comprise a cationic/cationically ionizable lipid as described herein and a sarcosinylated lipid (pSAR-conjugated lipid).
- the nucleic acid compositions (such as DNA or RNA compositions, especially mRNA compositions) described herein may further comprise a neutral lipid (e.g., a phospholipid, cholesterol or a derivative thereof) or a combination of neutral lipids (e.g., a phospholipid, and cholesterol or a derivative thereof).
- the nucleic acid compositions (such as DNA or RNA compositions, especially mRNA compositions) described herein comprise a cationic/cationically ionizable lipid as described herein, a sarcosinylated lipid, a neutral lipid (e.g., a phospholipid), and cholesterol or a derivative thereof.
- the phospholipid is DSPC.
- nucleic acid compositions such as DNA or RNA compositions, especially mRNA compositions
- said compositions are substantially free of a pegylated lipid (or do not contain a pegylated lipid).
- the sarcosinylated lipid comprises between 2 and 200 sarcosine units, such as between 5 and 100 sarcosine units, between 10 and 50 sarcosine units, between 15 and 40 sarcosine units, e.g., about 23 sarcosine units.
- the sarcosinylated lipid comprises the structure of the following general formula (XVII): ber of sarcosine units.
- the sarcosinylated lipid comprises the structure of the following general formula (XVIII): d R22 comprises a hydrophobic group and the other is H, a hydrophilic group or a functional group optionally comprising a targeting moiety; and x is the number of sarcosine units.
- an LNP herein may comprise an oxazolinylated and/or/oxazinylated lipid.
- the nucleic acid compositions (such as DNA or RNA compositions, especially mRNA compositions) described herein comprise an oxazolinylated and/or/oxazinylated lipid and are substantially free of a pegylated lipid (or do not contain a pegylated lipid).
- a polymer-conjugated lipid comprises monomers of 2-(2-(2- aminoethoxy)ethoxy)acetic acid. In some embodiments, a polymer-conjugated lipid comprises monomers of 2-(2-(2-aminoethoxy)ethoxy)acetic acid. In some embodiments, the polymer of the polymer-conjugated lipid is or comprises poly-2-(2-(2- aminoethoxy)ethoxy)acetic acid (pAEEA) or poly-2-(2-(2- methylaminoethoxy)ethoxy)acetic acid (pMAEEA), or a derivative thereof, as defined herein.
- pAEEA poly-2-(2-(2- aminoethoxy)ethoxy)acetic acid
- pMAEEA poly-2-(2-(2- methylaminoethoxy)ethoxy)acetic acid
- the polymer comprises the following general formula: wherein X 11 and X 12 taken together are optionally substituted amide, optionally substituted thioamide or ester; Y is -CH 2 -, -(CH 2 ) 2 -, or -(CH 2 ) 3 -; z is 2 to 24; and n is 1 to 100.
- X 11 when X 11 is -C(O)- then X 12 is -NR 10 -; (ii) when X 11 is -NR 10 - then X 12 is -C(O)-; (iii) when X 11 is -C(S)- then X 12 is -NR 1 -; (iv) when X 11 is -NR 1 - then X 12 is -C(S)-; (v) when X 11 is -C(O)- then X 12 is -O-; or (vi) when X 11 is -O- then X 12 is - C(O)-; wherein R 10 is hydrogen or Ci s alkyl.
- X 11 is -C(O)- and X 12 is -NR 10 -, wherein R 10 is hydrogen or Ci s alkyl. In some embodiments, X 11 is -C(O)- and X 12 is -NR 10 -, wherein R 10 is hydrogen or methyl. In some embodiments, X 11 is -C(O)- and X 12 is -NR 10 -, wherein R 10 is hydrogen. In some embodiments, Y is -CH 2 - or -(CH 2 ) 2 - . In some embodiments, Y is -CH 2 -.
- the polymer comprises the following general formula: wherein R 10 is hydrogen or C1 -8 alkyl; z is 2 to 24; and n is 1 to 100. In some embodiments of the above formulas, z is 2 to 10. In some embodiments, z is 2 to 5. In some embodiments, z is 2. In some embodiments of the above formulas, R 10 is hydrogen or methyl. In some embodiments, R 10 is hydrogen.
- a polymer conjugated lipid comprises “n” monomers of the following structure:
- n is 5 to 50. In some embodiments, n is 5 to 25. In some embodiments, n is 7 to 14. In some embodiments, n is 10 to 25. In some embodiments, n is 14 to 17. In some embodiments, n is 8 or 14.
- a polymer conjugated lipid comprises monomers of the following structure:
- a polymer conjugated lipid is selected from:
- a polymer-conjugated lipid is about 0.5 to about 5 mol% relative to total lipids in the LNP.
- an LNP comprises about 1 .0 to about 2.5 mol% of a polymer-conjugated lipid.
- an LNP comprises about 1.5 to about 2.0 mol% of a polymer-conjugated lipid.
- an LNP comprises about 1 .5 to about 1 .8 mol% of a polymer-conjugated lipid.
- a molar ratio of total cationic lipid to total polymer-conjugated lipid is from about 100:1 to about 20:1 . In some embodiments, a molar ratio of total cationic lipid to total polymer-conjugated lipid is from about 50:1 to about 20:1. In some embodiments, a molar ratio of total cationic lipid to total polymer-conjugated lipid is from about 40:1 to about 20:1. In some embodiments, a molar ratio of total cationic lipid to total polymer-conjugated lipid (e.g., PEG-conjugated lipid) is from about 35:1 to about 25:1.
- PEG-conjugated lipid e.g., PEG-conjugated lipid
- LNPs of the present disclosure may further comprise a compound of Formula (A1):
- L-X10-P-X20-B (A1) wherein P comprises a polymer; L comprises a hydrophobic moiety (e.g., lipid) attached to a first end of the polymer; B comprises a binding moiety attached to a second end of the polymer; X10 is absent or a first linking moiety; and X20 is absent or a second linking moiety.
- P comprises a polymer
- L comprises a hydrophobic moiety (e.g., lipid) attached to a first end of the polymer
- B comprises a binding moiety attached to a second end of the polymer
- X10 is absent or a first linking moiety
- X20 is absent or a second linking moiety.
- X10 comprises a carbonyl group.
- X20 comprises the reaction product of a thiol or cysteine reactive group, e.g., a maleimide group, with a thiol or cysteine group of a compound comprising the binding moiety.
- L comprises a lipid as described above.
- L comprises DSPE (distearoylphosphatidylethanolamine), DPPE (dipalmitoylphosphatidylethanolamine), DOPE (dioleoylphosphatidylethanolamine), and POPE (palmitoyloleylphosphatidylethanolamine) which may be linked to P by an amide group.
- P comprises a polymer as described above.
- P comprises a polymer selected from the group consisting of polyethylene glycol) (PEG), polysarcosine (pSar) (poly(N-methylglycine), polyoxazoline (POX), polyoxazine (POZ), poly-2-(2-(2-aminoethoxy)-ethoxy)acetic acid (pAEEA), and poly-2-(2-(2-methylamino-ethoxy)ethoxy)acetic acid (pMAEEA) (including derivatives thereof).
- P comprises poly(ethylene glycol) (PEG); e.g., PEG as described above.
- the binding moiety B comprises a moiety (e.g., an antibody or antigen-binding fragment thereof) binding to a cell surface antigen (e.g., a receptor, antigen or marker displayed on the surface of a target cell, such as a T cell, a B cell or a cancer cell).
- a cell surface antigen e.g., a receptor, antigen or marker displayed on the surface of a target cell, such as a T cell, a B cell or a cancer cell.
- the binding moiety B comprises or is a polypeptide (e.g., such as an epitope tag), e.g., an ALFA-tag, as described herein.
- the binding moiety B comprises or is an ALFA-tag comprises or consisting of a sequence selected from the group
- RECTIFIED SHEET (RULE 91) ISA/EP consisting of sequences SEQ.ID.NO. 1 , SEQ.ID.NO. 2, SEQ.ID.NO. 3, and SEQ.ID.NO. 4.
- the compound of formula (A1) may be a peptide-conjugated lipid.
- the compound of formula (A1) may be DSPE-PEG2K-alfa.
- the LNPs of the present disclosure may further comprise a peptide-conjugated lipid, which is optionally DSPE-PEG2K-alfa.
- a lipid nanoparticle comprises about 0.05 to about 5 mol%, optionally about 0.1 to about 2 mol% of a compound of formula (A1) (where the mol% may be provided by replacement of steroid).
- LNPs comprising a compound of formula (A1), wherein the binding moiety B comprises or is a peptide
- a “docking compound” which is typically a bispecific polypeptide (such as a bispecific antibody, or antigen binding fragment thereof), wherein the docking compound comprises (i) a moiety binding the peptide of binding moiety B, and (ii) a moiety binding a cell surface antigen on target cells.
- LNPs comprising a compound of formula (A1), wherein the binding moiety B comprises or is an ALFA-tag (as described herein) can be further functionalized by binding to the ALFA- tag a “docking compound” comprising (i) an NbAlfa VHH domain comprising the CDR1 sequence SEQ.ID.NO. 5, the CDR2 sequence SEQ.ID.NO. 6, and the CDR3 sequence SEQ.ID.NO. 7; and (ii) an anti-CD3 binding VHH comprising the CDR1 sequence SEQ.ID.NO. 8, the CDR2 sequence SEQ.ID.NO. 9, and the CDR3 sequence SEQ.ID.NO. 10.
- a “docking compound” comprising (i) an NbAlfa VHH domain comprising the CDR1 sequence SEQ.ID.NO. 5, the CDR2 sequence SEQ.ID.NO. 6, and the CDR3 sequence SEQ.ID.NO. 7; and (ii) an anti-CD3 binding VHH comprising the CDR
- a nucleic acid particle further comprises a steroid.
- a steroid is a sterol.
- a sterol is p-sitosterol, stigmasterol, cholesterol, cholecalciferol, ergocalciferol, calcipotriol, botulin, lupeol, ursolic acid, oleanolic acid, cycloartenol, lanosterol, or a-tocopherol.
- a sterol is p-sitosterol.
- a sterol is stigmasterol.
- a sterol is cholesterol.
- a sterol is cholecalciferol. In some embodiments, a sterol is ergocalciferol. In some embodiments, a sterol is calcipotriol. In some embodiments, a sterol is botulin. In some embodiments, a sterol is lupeol. In some embodiments, a sterol is ursolic acid. In some embodiments, a sterol is oleanolic acid. In some embodiments, a sterol is cycloartol. In some embodiments, a sterol is lanosterol. In some embodiments, a sterol is a-tocopherol.
- a lipid nanoparticle comprises about 30 to about 50 mol% of a steroid. In some embodiments, a lipid nanoparticle comprises about 35 to about 45 mol% of a steroid. In some embodiments, a lipid nanoparticle comprises about 38 to about 40 mol% of a steroid. In some embodiments, a lipid nanoparticle comprises about 38.5 mol% of a steroid. In some embodiments, a lipid nanoparticle comprises about 40 mol% of a steroid.
- a lipid nanoparticle comprises about 30 to about 50 mol% of cholesterol. In some embodiments, a lipid nanoparticle comprises about 35 to about 45 mol% of cholesterol. In some embodiments, a lipid nanoparticle comprises about 38 to about 41 mol% of cholesterol. In some embodiments, a lipid nanoparticle comprises about 38.5 mol% of cholesterol. In some embodiments, a lipid nanoparticle comprises about 40.7 mol% of cholesterol.
- a lipid nanoparticle comprises: about 40 to about 50 mol% of a thiolipid compound; about 30 to about 50 mol% of a steroid; about 5 to about 15 mol% of a helper lipid; and about 1 to about 5 mol% of a polymer conjugated lipid.
- a lipid nanoparticle comprises: about 45 to about 50 mol% of a thiolipid compound; about 35 to about 45 mol% of a steroid; about 5 to about 15 mol% of a helper lipid; and about 1 to about 5 mol% of a polymer conjugated lipid.
- a lipid nanoparticle comprises: about 47.5 mol% of a thiolipid compound; about 40.5 mol% of a steroid; about 10 mol% of a helper lipid; and about 2 mol% of a polymer conjugated lipid.
- Lipids and lipid nanoparticles comprising nucleic acids and their method of preparation are known in the art, including, e.g., as described in U.S. Patent Nos. 8,569,256, 5,965,542 and U.S. Patent Publication Nos. 2016/0199485, 2016/0009637, 2015/0273068, 2015/0265708, 2015/0203446, 2015/0005363, 2014/0308304,
- cationic lipids, helper lipids, and steroids are solubilized in ethanol at a pre- determined weight or molar ratios/percentages (e.g., ones described herein).
- lipid nanoparticles are prepared at a total lipid to RNA or DNA molar ratio of approximately 10:1 to 30:1.
- such RNA or DNA can be diluted to 0.2 mg/ml_ in acetate buffer.
- a colloidal lipid dispersion comprising nucleic acids can be formed as follows: an ethanol solution comprising lipids, such as thiolipids described herein, helper lipids, steroids, and polymer-conjugated lipids, is injected into an aqueous solution comprising nucleic acids (e.g., RNA or DNA).
- lipid and nucleic acid solutions can be mixed at room temperature by pumping each solution (e.g., a lipid solution comprising a thiolipid compound described herein, a helper lipid, steroids, and any other additives) at controlled flow rates into a mixing unit, for example, using piston pumps.
- the flow rates of a lipid solution and a nucleic acid solution into a mixing unit are maintained at a ratio of 1 :3.
- nucleic acid-lipid particles are formed as the ethanolic lipid solution is diluted with aqueous RNAs. The lipid solubility is decreased, while cationic lipids bearing a positive charge interact with the negatively charged nucleic acid.
- a solution comprising nucleic acid (e.g., RNA)-encapsulated lipid nanoparticles can be processed by one or more of concentration adjustment, buffer exchange, formulation, and/or filtration.
- a composition or complex described herein further comprises a pharmaceutically acceptable surfactant.
- a pharmaceutically acceptable surfactant is selected from a polysorbate (e.g., polysorbate 20 (Tween20), polysorbate 40 (Tween40), polysorbate 60 (Tween60), and polysorbate 80 (Tween80)), poloxamers, and an amphiphilic group comprising a moiety selected from polyalkylene glycols (e.g., polyethylene glycol), poly(2-oxazoline), poly(2-methyl-2-oxazoline), polysarcosine, polyvinylpyrrolidone, and poly[N-(2-hydroxypropyl)methacrylamide, wherein the moiety is bound to one or more C12-C20 aliphatic groups.
- polysorbate e.g., polysorbate 20 (Tween20), polysorbate 40 (Tween40), polysorbate 60 (Tween60), and polysorbate 80 (Tween80)
- a particle described herein comprises one or more oligosaccharide compositions and a nucleic acid.
- a nucleic acid is RNA.
- an RNA amenable to technologies described herein is a singlestranded RNA.
- an RNA as disclosed herein is a linear RNA.
- a single-stranded RNA is a non-coding RNA in that its nucleotide sequence does not include an open reading frame (or complement thereof).
- a single-stranded RNA has a nucleotide sequence that encodes (or is the complement of a sequence that encodes) a polypeptide or a plurality of polypeptides (e.g., epitopes) of the present disclosure.
- an RNA is or comprises an siRNA, an miRNA, or other noncoding RNA.
- a relevant RNA includes at least one open reading frame (ORF) (e.g., is an mRNA); in some embodiments, a relevant RNA includes a single ORF; in some embodiments, a relevant RNA includes more than one ORF.
- ORF open reading frame
- an RNA comprises an ORF, e.g., encoding a polypeptide of interest or encoding a plurality of polypeptides of interest.
- an RNA produced in accordance with technologies provided herein comprises a plurality of ORFs (e.g., encoding a plurality of polypeptides).
- an RNA produced in accordance with technologies herein comprises a single ORF that encodes a plurality of polypeptides.
- polypeptides are or comprise antigens or epitopes thereof (e.g., relevant antigens).
- an ORF for use in accordance with the present disclosure encodes a polypeptide that includes a signal sequence, e.g., that is functional in mammalian cells, such as an intrinsic signal sequence or a heterologous signal sequence.
- a signal sequence directs secretion of an encoded polypeptide
- a signal sequence directs transport of an encoded polypeptide into a defined cellular compartment, preferably the cell surface, the endoplasmic reticulum (ER) or the endosomal-lysosomal compartment.
- an ORF encodes a polypeptide that includes a multimerization element (e.g., an intrinsic or heterologous multimerization element).
- an ORF that encodes a surface polypeptide e.g., that includes a signal sequence directing surface localization
- an ORF encodes a polypeptide that includes a transmembrane element or domain.
- an ORF is codon-optimized for expression in a cells of a particular host, e.g., a mammalian host, e.g., a human.
- an RNA includes unmodified uridine residues; an RNA that includes only unmodified uridine residues may be referred to as a “uRNA”.
- an RNA includes one or more modified uridine residues; in some embodiments, such an RNA (e.g., an RNA including entirely modified uridine residues) is referred to as a “modRNA”.
- an RNA may be a self-amplifying RNA (saRNA).
- an RNA may be a trans-amplifying RNA (taRNA) (see, for example, WO2017/162461 ).
- a relevant RNA includes a polypeptide-encoding portion or a plurality of polypeptide-encoding portions.
- a portion or portions may encode a polypeptide or polypeptides that is or comprises a biologically active polypeptide or portion thereof (e.g., an enzyme or cytokine or therapeutic protein such as a replacement protein or antibody or portion thereof).
- a portion or portions may encode a polypeptide or polypeptides that is or comprises an antigen (or an epitope thereof), a cytokine, an enzyme, etc.
- an encoded polypeptide or polypeptides may be or include one or more neoantigens or neoepitopes associated with a tumor.
- an encoded polypeptide or polypeptides may be or include one or more antigens (or epitopes thereof) of an infectious agent (e.g., a bacterium, fungus, virus, etc.).
- an encoded polypeptide may be a variant of a wild type polypeptide.
- a single-stranded RNA may comprise a secretion signal-encoding region (e.g., a secretion signal-encoding region that allows an encoded target entity or entities to be secreted upon translation by cells).
- a secretion signal-encoding region may be or comprise a non-human secretion signal.
- such a secretion signal-encoding region may be or comprise a human secretion signal.
- a single-stranded RNA e.g., mRNA
- non-coding elements include but are not limited to a 3’ untranslated region (UTR), a 5’ UTR, a cap structure (e.g., in some embodiments, an enzymatically-added cap; in some embodiments, a co-transcriptional cap), a poly adenine (polyA) tail (e.g., that, in some embodiments, may be or comprise 100 A residues or more, and/or in some embodiments may include one or more “interrupting” [i.e., non-A] sequence elements), and any combinations thereof.
- UTR untranslated region
- 5 UTR
- a cap structure e.g., in some embodiments, an enzymatically-added cap; in some embodiments, a co-transcriptional cap
- polyA tail e.g., that, in some embodiments, may be or comprise 100 A residues or more, and/or in some embodiments may include one or more “interrupting” [i.e., non-A] sequence elements
- non-coding elements may be found, for example, in WO2011015347, WO2017053297, US 10519189, US 10494399, W02007024708, W02007036366, WO2017060314, WO2016005324, W02005038030, WO2017036889, WO2017162266, and WO2017162461 , each of which is incorporated herein by referenced in its entirety.
- RNA pharmaceutical compositions e.g., immunogenic compositions or vaccines
- uRNA non-modified uridine containing mRNA
- modRNA nucleosidemodified mRNA
- saRNA self-amplifying mRNA
- trans-amplifying RNAs e.g., trans-amplifying RNAs.
- non-modified uridine platform may include, for example, one or more of intrinsic adjuvant effect, good tolerability and safety, and strong antibody and T cell responses.
- modified uridine e.g., pseudouridine
- pseudouridine may include reduced adjuvant effect, blunted immune innate immune sensor activating capacity and thus augmented antigen expression, good tolerability and safety, and strong antibody and CD4-T cell responses.
- the present disclosure provides an insight that such strong antibody and CD4 T cell responses may be particularly useful for vaccination.
- self-amplifying platform may include, for example, long duration of polypeptide (e.g., protein) expression, good tolerability and safety, higher likelihood for efficacy with very low vaccine dose.
- polypeptide e.g., protein
- a self-amplifying platform (e.g., saRNA) comprises a nucleic acid molecule, encoding both a replicase (e.g., a viral replicase) and a gene of interest, wherein the nucleic acid molecule is capable of being replicated by said replicase in cis (c/s-replication system).
- a replicase e.g., a viral replicase
- a gene of interest e.g., a gene of interest
- a trans-amplifying platform (e.g., taRNA) comprises two nucleic acid molecules, wherein one nucleic acid molecule encodes a replicase (e.g., a viral replicase) and the other nucleic acid molecule is capable of being replicated (e.g., a replicon) by said replicase in trans (trans-replication system).
- a self/trans-amplifying platform (e.g., RNA) comprises a plurality of nucleic acid molecules, wherein said nucleic acids encode a plurality of replicases and/or replicons.
- a trans-replication system comprises the presence of both nucleic acid molecules in a single host cell.
- a nucleic acid encoding a replicase is not capable of self-replication in a target cell and/or target organism.
- a nucleic acid encoding a replicase e.g., a viral replicase
- a self-amplifying RNA comprises a 5’-cap; in some trans- replication systems, at least an RNA encoding a replicase is capped.
- a 5’-cap can be important for high level expression of a gene of interest in trans.
- a self/trans-amplifying platform does not require propagation of virus particles (e.g., is not associated with undesired virus-particle formation). In some embodiments, a self/trans-amplifying platform is not capable of forming virus particles.
- an RNA may comprise an Internal Ribosomal Entry Site (IRES) element.
- IRES Internal Ribosomal Entry Site
- an RNA does not comprise an IRES site; in particular, in some embodiments, an saRNA does not comprise an IRES site.
- translation of a gene of interest and/or replicase is not driven by an IRES element.
- an IRES element is substituted by a 5’-cap. In some such embodiments, substitution by a 5’-cap does not affect the sequence of a polypeptide encoded by an RNA.
- a complex described herein comprises modRNA, saRNA, taRNA, or uRNA. In some embodiments, a complex comprises modRNA. In some embodiments, a complex comprises saRNA. In some embodiments, a complex comprises taRNA. In some embodiments, a complex comprises uRNA.
- Particles described herein are useful in the treatment and prophylaxis in a subject of diseases, disorders, and conditions described herein.
- the present disclosure provides a method of treating a disease, disorder or condition comprising administering to a patient a composition comprising particles described herein.
- the present disclosure provides use of a composition comprising particles described herein for the treatment of a disease, disorder, or condition.
- a disease, disorder, or condition is an infectious disease, cancer, an autoimmune disease, or a rare disease.
- an infectious disease is caused by or associated with a viral pathogen.
- a viral pathogen is of a family selected from poxviridae, rhabdoviridae, filoviridae, paramyxoviridae, hepadnaviridae, coronaviridae, caliciviridae, picornaviridae, reoviridae, retroviridae, and orthomyxoviridae.
- an infectious disease is caused by or associated with a virus selected from SARS-CoV-2, influenza, Crimean-Congo Hemorhhagic Fever (CCHF), Ebola virus, Lassa virus, Marburg virus, HIV, Nipah virus, and MERS-CoV.
- a virus selected from SARS-CoV-2, influenza, Crimean-Congo Hemorhhagic Fever (CCHF), Ebola virus, Lassa virus, Marburg virus, HIV, Nipah virus, and MERS-CoV.
- an infectious disease is caused by or associated with a bacterial pathogen.
- a bacterial pathogen is of a species selected from Actinomyces israelii, bacillus antracis, Bacteroides fragilis, Bordetella pertussis, Borrelia burgdorferi, Borrelia garinii, Borrelia afzelii, Borrelia recurrentis, Brucella abortus, Brucella canis, Brucella melitensis, Brucella suis, Campolobacter jejuni, Chlamydia pneumoniae, Chlamydia trachomatis, Chlamydophila psittaci, Clostridium botulinum, Clostridium difficile, Clostridium perfringens, Clostridium tetani, Corynebacterium idphteriae, Ehrlichia canis, Ehrlichia chaffeensis, Enterococcus fae
- an infectious disease is caused by or associated with a parasite.
- a parasite is of a family selected from Plasmodium, Leishmania, Cryptosporidium, Entamoeba, Trypanosomas, Schistosomes, Ascaris, Echinococcus and Taeniidae.
- a disease, disorder, or condition is a cancer.
- a cancer is selected from bladder cancer, breast cancer, colorectal cancer, kidney cancer, lung cancer, lymphoma, melanoma, oral/oropharyngeal cancer, pancreatic cancer, prostate cancer, thyroid cancer, and uterine cancer.
- a disease, disorder, or condition is a genetic disorder.
- a genetic disorder is associated with a gain-of-function mutation or a loss- of-function mutation.
- a disease, disorder, or condition is a rare disease.
- a rare disease refers to a life-threatening or chronically debilitating diseases which are of such low prevalence (e.g., fewer than 1/2000 people) that special combined efforts are needed to address them.
- the present disclosure provides complexes that can selectively target particular systems within a body.
- targeting a particular system refers to causing increased expression of RNA derived from cargo in the complex in the desired system.
- complexes described herein can selectively target the lungs, liver, spleen, heart, brain, lymph nodes, bladder, kidneys, and pancreas.
- a complex “selectively targets” an organ when a single target expresses mRNA in an amount that is 65% or greater than expression in other organs post administration (e.g., 65% or more of mRNA throughout the body is expressed from a single organ, with the remaining 35% distributed between one or more different organs).
- a complex described herein selectively targets the lungs.
- a complex described herein selectively targets the liver.
- a complex described herein selectively targets the spleen.
- a complex described herein selectively targets the heart.
- a particle that is incorporated into a composition to be administered to a subject.
- a composition comprising particles described herein is administered as a monotherapy.
- a a composition comprising particles described herein is administered as part of a combination therapy.
- a concentration of total RNA (e.g., a total concentration of all of the one or more RNA molecules) in a composition described herein is of about 0.01 mg/ml_ to about 0.5 mg/ml_, or about 0.05 mg/ml_ to about 0.1 mg/mL.
- compositions may additionally comprise a pharmaceutically acceptable excipient, which, as used herein, includes any and all solvents, dispersion media, diluents, or other liquid vehicles, dispersion or suspension aids, surface active agents, isotonic agents, thickening or emulsifying agents, preservatives, solid binders, lubricants and the like, as suited to the particular dosage form desired.
- a pharmaceutically acceptable excipient includes any and all solvents, dispersion media, diluents, or other liquid vehicles, dispersion or suspension aids, surface active agents, isotonic agents, thickening or emulsifying agents, preservatives, solid binders, lubricants and the like, as suited to the particular dosage form desired.
- Remington's The Science and Practice of Pharmacy 21st Edition, A. R. Gennaro (Lippincott, Williams & Wilkins, Baltimore, MD, 2006; incorporated herein by reference in its entirety) discloses various excipients
- an excipient is approved for use in humans and for veterinary use. In some embodiments, an excipient is approved by the United States Food and Drug Administration. In some embodiments, an excipient is pharmaceutical grade. In some embodiments, an excipient meets the standards of the United States Pharmacopoeia (USP), the European Pharmacopoeia (EP), the British Pharmacopoeia, and/or the International Pharmacopoeia.
- USP United States Pharmacopoeia
- EP European Pharmacopoeia
- British Pharmacopoeia the British Pharmacopoeia
- International Pharmacopoeia International Pharmacopoeia
- compositions used in the manufacture of pharmaceutical compositions include, but are not limited to, inert diluents, dispersing and/or granulating agents, surface active agents and/or emulsifiers, disintegrating agents, binding agents, preservatives, buffering agents, lubricating agents, and/or oils. Such excipients may optionally be included in pharmaceutical formulations. Excipients such as cocoa butter and suppository waxes, coloring agents, coating agents, sweetening, flavoring, and/or perfuming agents can be present in the composition, according to the judgment of the formulator.
- compositions described herein can be administered by appropriate methods known in the art.
- the route and/or mode of administration may depend on a number of factors, including, e.g., but not limited to stability and/or pharmacokinetics and/or pharmacodynamics of pharmaceutical compositions described herein.
- compositions described herein are formulated for parenteral administration, which includes modes of administration other than enteral and topical administration, usually by injection, and includes, without limitation, intravenous, intramuscular, intraarterial, intrathecal, intracapsular, intraorbital, intracardiac, intradermal, intraperitoneal, transtracheal, subcutaneous, subcuticular, intraarticular, subcapsular, subarachnoid, intraspinal, epidural and intrasternal injection and infusion.
- pharmaceutical compositions described herein are formulated for intravenous administration.
- pharmaceutically acceptable carriers that may be useful for intravenous administration include sterile aqueous solutions or dispersions and sterile powders for preparation of sterile injectable solutions or dispersions.
- compositions described herein are formulated for subcutaneous (s.c) administration. In some particular embodiments, pharmaceutical compositions described herein are formulated for intramuscular (i.m) administration.
- compositions typically must be sterile and stable under the conditions of manufacture and storage.
- the composition can be formulated as a solution, dispersion, powder (e.g., lyophilized powder), microemulsion, lipid nanoparticles, or other ordered structure suitable to high drug concentration.
- the carrier can be a solvent or dispersion medium containing, for example, water, ethanol, polyol (for example, glycerol, propylene glycol, and liquid polyethylene glycol, and the like), and suitable mixtures thereof.
- the proper fluidity can be maintained, for example, by the use of a coating such as lecithin, by the maintenance of the required particle size in the case of dispersion and by the use of surfactants.
- isotonic agents for example, sugars, polyalcohols such as mannitol, sorbitol, or sodium chloride in the composition.
- prolonged absorption of the injectable compositions can be brought about by including in the composition an agent that delays absorption, for example, monostearate salts and gelatin.
- Sterile injectable solutions can be prepared by incorporating the active compound in the required amount in an appropriate solvent with one or a combination of ingredients enumerated above, as required, followed by sterilization microfiltration.
- dispersions are prepared by incorporating the active compound into a sterile vehicle that contains a basic dispersion medium and the required other ingredients from those enumerated above.
- a sterile vehicle that contains a basic dispersion medium and the required other ingredients from those enumerated above.
- the preferred methods of preparation are vacuum drying and freeze-drying (lyophilization) that yield a powder of the active ingredient plus any additional desired ingredient from a previously steri le-f i Itered solution thereof.
- aqueous and nonaqueous carriers examples include water, ethanol, polyols (such as glycerol, propylene glycol, polyethylene glycol, and the like), and suitable mixtures thereof, vegetable oils, such as olive oil, and injectable organic esters, such as ethyl oleate.
- polyols such as glycerol, propylene glycol, polyethylene glycol, and the like
- vegetable oils such as olive oil
- injectable organic esters such as ethyl oleate.
- Proper fluidity can be maintained, for example, by the use of coating materials, such as lecithin, by the maintenance of the required particle size in the case of dispersions, and by the use of surfactants.
- compositions may also contain adjuvants such as preservatives, wetting agents, emulsifying agents and dispersing agents. Prevention of the presence of microorganisms may be ensured both by sterilization procedures, and by the inclusion of various antibacterial and antifungal agents, for example, paraben, chlorobutanol, phenol sorbic acid, and the like. It may also be desirable to include isotonic agents, such as sugars, sodium chloride, and the like into pharmaceutical compositions described herein. In addition, prolonged absorption of the injectable pharmaceutical form may be brought about by the inclusion of agents which delay absorption such as aluminum monostearate and gelatin.
- Formulations of pharmaceutical compositions described herein may be prepared by any method known or hereafter developed in the art of pharmacology. In general, such preparatory methods include the step of bringing active ingredient(s) into association with a diluent or another excipient and/or one or more other accessory ingredients, and then, if necessary and/or desirable, shaping and/or packaging the product into a desired single- or multi-dose unit.
- a pharmaceutical composition in accordance with the present disclosure may be prepared, packaged, and/or sold in bulk, as a single unit dose, and/or as a plurality of single unit doses.
- a "unit dose" is discrete amount of the pharmaceutical composition comprising a predetermined amount of at least one RNA product produced using a system and/or method described herein.
- an active agent that may be included in a pharmaceutical composition described herein is or comprises a therapeutic agent administered in a combination therapy described herein.
- Pharmaceutical compositions described herein can be administered in combination therapy, i.e., combined with other agents.
- such therapeutic agents may include agents leading to depletion or functional inactivation of regulatory T cells.
- a combination therapy can include a provided pharmaceutical composition with at least one immune checkpoint inhibitor.
- composition described herein may be administered in conjunction with radiotherapy and/or autologous peripheral stem cell or bone marrow transplantation.
- a pharmaceutical composition described herein can be frozen to allow long-term storage.
- compositions suitable for administration to humans are principally directed to pharmaceutical compositions that are suitable for administration to humans, it will be understood by the skilled artisan that such compositions are generally suitable for administration to animals of all sorts. Modification of pharmaceutical compositions suitable for administration to humans in order to render the compositions suitable for administration to various animals is well understood, and the ordinarily skilled veterinary pharmacologist can design and/or perform such modification with merely ordinary, if any, experimentation.
- Embodiment 1 A compound represented by formula I:
- L 1 and L 2 are each independently an optionally substituted C1-C30 aliphatic group
- L 3 is a bond, optionally substituted C1-C10 aliphatic group, or optionally substituted 2- to 10-membered heteroaliphatic group;
- X 1 and X 2 are each independently selected from a bond, -OC(O)-, -C(O)O-, -S(O) 2 N(R 1 )- , -N(R 1 )S(O) 2 , -S(O)-, -S(O) 2 -, -S(O) 2 C(R 1 ) 2 -, -OC(S)C(R 1 ) 2 -, -C(R 1 ) 2 C(S)O-, and -S-, wherein one or both of X 1 or X 2 is selected from -S(O) 2 N(R 1 )-, -N(R 1 )S(O) 2 , -S(O)-, - S(O) 2 -, -S(O) 2 C(R 1 ) 2 -, -OC(S)C(R 1 ) 2 C(S)O-, and -S-, wherein one or both of X 1 or
- T 1 and T 2 are each independently an optionally substituted C3-C30 aliphatic;
- G is -N(R 2 )C(S)N(R 2 ) 2 , -OH, -N(R 2 ) 2 , -N + (R 3 ) 3 , -N(R 5 )C(O)R 3 , -N(R 5 )S(O) 2 R 3 , - N(R 5 )C(O)N(R 3 ) 2 , -CH(N-R 2 ), or -R 4 ; each R 2 is, independently, at each instance, selected from the group consisting of H, optionally substituted Ci-Ce aliphatic or OR 3 ; or two instances of R 2 come together with the atoms to which they are attached to form an optionally substituted 4- to 12-membered heterocycle ring or an optionally substituted 4- to 12-membered heteroaryl ring; each R 3 is, independently, at each instance, selected from the group consisting of H and optionally substituted C1-C10 aliphatic; and
- R 4 is optionally substituted 4- to 12-membered heterocycle, optionally substituted 4- to 12 membered heteroaryl, Ce-Ci 2 aryl substituted with one or more of -(CH 2 )o- 6 -OH or - (CH 2 )O 6-N(R 5 ) 2 , or Cs-Ci 2 cycloaliphatic substituted with one or more of oxo, -(CH 2 )o 6- OH, or -(CH 2 )O- 6 -N(R 5 ) 2 ; each R 5 is independently selected from H and optionally substituted Ci-Ce aliphatic.
- Embodiment 2 The compound of Embodiment 1 , wherein L 1 and L 2 are each C1- C30 alkylene.
- Embodiment 3 The compound of Embodiments 1 or 2, wherein L 1 and L 2 are each independently -(CH 2 ) 6 -10- ⁇
- Embodiment 4 The compound of any one of Embodiments 1 -3, wherein L 1 and L 2 are the same.
- Embodiment 5 The compound of any one of Embodiments 1 -3, wherein L 1 and L 2 are different.
- Embodiment 6. The compound of any one of Embodiments 1 -5, wherein X 1 and X 2 are each independently selected from a -S(O) 2 N(R 1 )-, -N(R 1 )S(O) 2 , -S(O)-, -S(O) 2 -, - S(O) 2 C(R 1 ) 2 -, -OC(S)C(R 1 ) 2 -, -C(R 1 ) 2 C(S)O-, and -S-.
- Embodiment 7 The compound of any one of Embodiments 1 -5, wherein one of X 1 and X 2 is a bond, -OC(O)-, or -C(O)O-, and the other of X 1 and X 2 is -S(O)2N(R 1 )-, - N(R 1 )S(O) 2 , -S(O)-, -S(O) 2 -, -S(O) 2 C(R 1 ) 2 -, -OC(S)C(R 1 ) 2 -, -C(R 1 ) 2 C(S)O-, or -S-.
- Embodiment 8 The compound of any one of Embodiments 1-5, wherein X 1 is - S(O) 2 N(R 1 )-, where R 1 is C1-C10 aliphatic, and X 2 is -C(O)O-.
- Embodiment 9 The compound of any one of Embodiments 1 -5, wherein X 1 and X 2 are each -S(O) 2 N(R 1 )-, where each R 1 is independently R 1 is C1-C10 aliphatic.
- Embodiment 10 The compound of any one of Embodiments 1 -5, wherein X 1 and
- Embodiment 11 The compound of any one of Embodiments 1 -5, wherein X 1 and
- Embodiment 12 The compound of any one of Embodiments 1 -11 , wherein T 1 and T 2 are each independently selected from optionally substituted Cs-C 2 o alkyl.
- Embodiment 13 The compound of any one of Embodiments 1 -11 , wherein T 1 and
- T 2 are each independently selected from:
- Embodiment 14 The compound of Embodiment 1 , wherein a moiety -L 1 -X 1 -T 1 is selected from the group consisting of:
- Embodiment 15 The compound of Embodiment 1 or Embodiment 14, wherein a moiety -L 2 -X 2 -T 2 is selected from the group consisting of:
- Embodiment 16 The compound of Embodiment 1 , wherein a moiety -L 1 -X 1 -T 1 and moiety -L 2 -X 2 -T 2 are each independently selected from:
- Embodiment 17 The compound of any one of Embodiments 1 -16, wherein L 3 is optionally substituted C1-C10 aliphatic.
- Embodiment 18 The compound of any one of Embodiments 1 -17, wherein G is - N(R 2 )C(S)N(R 2 ) 2 or -N(R 5 )S(O) 2 R 3 .
- Embodiment 19 The compound of Embodiment 18, wherein G is - N(R 2 )C(S)N(R 2 ) 2 .
- Embodiment 20 The compound of Embodiment 19, wherein G is -N(H)C(S)N(R 2 ) 2 , where each R 2 is selected from optionally substituted Ci-Ce aliphatic and OH.
- Embodiment 21 The compound of any one of Embodiments 1 -17, wherein G is - OH.
- Embodiment 22 The compound of any one of Embodiments 1 -17, wherein G is optionally substituted 4- to 12-membered heterocycle.
- Embodiment 23 The compound of any one of Embodiments 1 -17, wherein G is selected from:
- Embodiment 24 The compound of Embodiment 1 , wherein moiety -L 3 -G is
- Embodiment 25 The compound of Embodiment 1 , wherein -L 3 -G is selected from:
- Embodiment 26 The compound of Embodiment 1 , wherein the compound is represented by Formula Ila:
- Embodiment 27 The compound of Embodiment 1 , wherein the compound is represented by Formula lib: lib or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
- Embodiment 28 The compound of Embodiment 1 , wherein the compound is represented by Formula lie: or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
- Embodiment 29 The compound of Embodiment 1 , wherein the compound is represented by Formula Illa: or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
- Embodiment 30 The compound of Embodiment 1 , wherein the compound is represented by Formula lllb: or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
- Embodiment 31 The compound of Embodiment 1 , wherein the compound is represented by Formula I lie: or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
- Embodiment 32 The compound of Embodiment 1 , wherein the compound is represented by Formula 11 Id: or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
- Embodiment 33 The compound of Embodiment 1 , wherein the compound is represented by Formula llle: or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
- Embodiment 34 The compound of Embodiment 1 , wherein the compound is represented by Formula lllf: or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
- Embodiment 35 The compound of Embodiment 1 , wherein the compound is represented by Formula Illg:
- Embodiment 36 The compound of Embodiment 1 , wherein the compound is selected from Table 1 .
- Embodiment 37 A particle comprising a compound of any one of Embodiments 1 - 36, and a nucleic acid.
- Embodiment 38 The particle of Embodiment 37, wherein the nucleic acid is RNA, DNA, or mixtures thereof.
- Embodiment 39 The particle of Embodiment 38, the RNA is mRNA.
- Embodiment 40 The particle of Embodiment 39, wherein the RNA is modRNA, circRNA, saRNA, taRNA, or uRNA.
- Embodiment 41 The particle of Embodiment 37, wherein the DNA is linear DNA, plasmid DNA, minicircle DNA, nanoplasmid DNA, doggybone DNA, or a transposon.
- Embodiment 42 The particle of any one of Embodiments 37-41 , wherein the particle further comprises one or more of a helper lipid, a polymer-conjugated lipid, or a sterol.
- Embodiment 43 The particle of Embodiment 42, wherein the helper lipid is a phospholipid.
- Embodiment 44 The particle of Embodiment 43, wherein the phospholipid is selected from: phosphatidylcholines, phosphatidylethanolamines, phosphatidylglycerols, phosphatidic acids, phosphatidylserines and sphingomyelins, more preferably selected from the group consisting of distearoylphosphatidylcholine (DSPC), dioleoylphosphatidylcholine (DOPC), dimyristoylphosphatidylcholine (DMPC), dipentadecanoylphosphatidylcholine, dilauroylphosphatidylcholine, dipalmitoylphosphatidylcholine (DPPC), diarachidoylphosphatidylcholine (DAPC), dibehenoylphosphatidylcholine (DBPC), ditricosanoylphosphatidylcholine (DTPC), dilignoceroylphatidylcho
- Embodiment 45 The particle of any one of Embodiments 42-44, wherein the polymer-conjugated lipid is selected from the group consisting of a polyethylene glycol) (PEG)-conjugated lipid, a poly(sarcosine) (pSar)-conjugated lipid, a poly(aminoethoxy ethoxy acetic acid) (pAEEA)-conjugated lipid; and a poly(2-methylaminoethoxy ethoxy acetic acid) (pmAEEA)-conjugated lipid.
- PEG polyethylene glycol
- pSar poly(sarcosine)
- pAEEA poly(aminoethoxy ethoxy acetic acid)
- pmAEEA poly(2-methylaminoethoxy ethoxy acetic acid)
- Embodiment 46 The particle of any one of Embodiments 42-45, wherein the polymer-conjugated lipid is a PEG-lipid selected from PEG-DAG, PEG-PE, PEG-S-DAG, PEG2000-DMG, PEG-cer, a PEG dialkyoxypropylcarbamate, ALC-0159, and combinations thereof.
- the polymer-conjugated lipid is a PEG-lipid selected from PEG-DAG, PEG-PE, PEG-S-DAG, PEG2000-DMG, PEG-cer, a PEG dialkyoxypropylcarbamate, ALC-0159, and combinations thereof.
- Embodiment 47 The particle of any one of Embodiments 42-46, wherein the sterol is selected from p-sitosterol, stigmasterol, cholesterol, cholecalciferol, ergocalciferol, calcipotriol, botulin, lupeol, ursolic acid, oleanolic acid, cycloartenol, lanosterol, or a- tocopherol.
- the sterol is selected from p-sitosterol, stigmasterol, cholesterol, cholecalciferol, ergocalciferol, calcipotriol, botulin, lupeol, ursolic acid, oleanolic acid, cycloartenol, lanosterol, or a- tocopherol.
- Embodiment 48 The particle of any one of Embodiments 42-47, wherein the particle is characterized by an N/P ratio that is about 4 to about 16.
- Embodiment 49 A method of increasing or causing increased expression of RNA in a target in a subject, the method comprising administering to the subject a composition comprising particles of any one of Embodiments 42-48.
- Embodiment 50 The method of Embodiment 49, wherein the target is selected from the lungs, liver, spleen, heart, brain, lymph nodes, bladder, kidneys, and pancreas.
- Embodiment 51 A method of treating a disease, disorder, or condition in a subject comprising administering to the subject a composition comprising the particles of any one of Embodiments 42-48.
- Embodiment 52 The method of Embodiment 51 , wherein the disease, disorder, or condition is an infectious disease, cancer, a genetic disorder, an autoimmune disease, or a rare disease.
- Embodiment 53 The method of any one of Embodiments 48-52, wherein the particle is administered parenterally or intranasally.
- Embodiment 54 The method of Embodiment 53, wherein the particle is administered intramuscularly, subcutaneously, intradermally, or intravenously.
- Embodiment 55 A particle of any one of Embodiments 42-48 for use as a medicament.
- Embodiment 56 A particle of any one of Embodiments 42-48 for use in the treatment and/or prevention of a disease or disorder, wherein the disease or disorder is an infectious disease, cancer, a genetic disorder, an autoimmune disease, or a rare disease.
- Reference to an Alfa-Tag or Alfa peptide refers to a peptide of sequence SEQ.ID.NO. 1.
- Reference to NbAlfa refers to a VHH domain comprising the CDR1 sequence SEQ.ID.NO. 5, the CDR2 sequence SEQ.ID.NO. 6, and the CDR3 sequence SEQ.ID.NO. 7.
- Reference to aCD3-VHH refers to an anti-CD3 binding VHH comprising the CDR1 sequence SEQ.ID.NO. 8, the CDR2 sequence SEQ.ID.NO. 9, and the CDR3 sequence SEQ.ID.NO. 10.
- the present example provides a method preparing tail-end-fragments with tail-linkers via unoxidized junction residue “-S-“ having an oxidation state of -2.
- Example compounds BNT-21 , BNT-46, and BNT-20 were prepared according to the methods provided above.
- the organic phase was washed with brine (150 mL), then dried over anhydrous NaaSCh. After filtration of the salt, the crude product was purified by flash chromatography on silica gel using ethyl acetate/n-hexane. The product fractions were identified using ELSD and UV detectors of the effluent.
- the crude product was purified by flash chromatography on silica gel using ethyl acetate/n-hexane.
- the product fractions were identified using ELSD and UV detectors of the effluent. Evaporation of the product fractions resulted in the thiolipid alcohol as colorless oil representing the precursor for the tail group aldehydes.
- the present example also provides synthesis of thiolipid alcohols from two alcohols in a one pot reaction sequence:
- the mesylate product may then be converted further to the thioacetate without further purification.
- the product was evaporated to a solid in vacuo at maximally 40 °C. It was taken up by an emulsion of n-hexane (50 mL) and 1 M aqueous NaOH(50mL). The n-hexane was concentrated to a pale yellow oil being mainly to be converted further to the branched thiolipid alcohol according to the subsequent general procedures.
- the reaction mixture was transferred into 10% aqueous NaH 2 PO4 (200 mL) and diethyl ether (200mL). After the phase separation occurred, the turbid organic phase was removed. The turbid aqueous phase was washed twice successively with 10OmL diethyl ether each. The organic phases are combined and passed through a silica 60-plug (height: 30 mm, diameter 55mm) to remove the turbidity resulting from remaining SO3- complex. The filtrate was concentrated to a clear oil that may be chromatographed on silica or used directly for the formation of thiolipids using the following multicomponent reaction.
- This procedure may also provide pure thiolipids from impure aldehydes made in the previous procedure.
- the reaction mixture was evaporated to a white paste.
- the latter was resuspended in an emulsion of diethyl ether/saturated aqueous sodium bicarbonate solution.
- the organic phase was removed; the aqueous phase was extracted twice with 20 mL diethyl ether each.
- the ether layers were combined and washed with brine (100 mL), then dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate.
- the salt is removed by filtration, the filtrate evaporated to a pale yellow or white oil which may be taken up in hexane prior to subjection to 14.09.
- reaction mixture was neutralized with (10 ml) NaHCOs at 0°C, the mixture was diluted (100 ml) EtOAc, washed with (2 X 50 ml) H2O, then with (2 X 50 ml) brine. The organic layer was collected, dried over Na2SO4, and the solvent was evaporated under reduced pressure. The product was purified with column chromatography (SiC ; n-hexane/EtOAc; 1/1).
- the product was purified with column chromatography (SiO 2 ; from n-hexane/EtOAc/TEA; 4/1/1% to n-hexane/EtOAc/TEA; 1/1/1% for BNT-72, -73 & -76).
- Octyl hexyl amine (CAS:82223-69-6; CAS:86933-36-0 (HCI-salt) is commercially available by Enamine US Inc., Aidlab Chemicals, LLC, and Bridgewater Pharmtech, Inc.
- 7-Octene-1 -sulfonyl chloride (CAS:923279-52-1 ) is commercially available by Hong Kong Chemhere Co., Ltd., or otherwise prepared according to Kirschberg, Thorsten A.; et al. Bioorganic & Medicinal Chemistry Letters (2014), 24(3), 969-972.
- 7- octene-1 -sulfonyl chloride can be prepared in high yield from 7-bromo-1 -octene with sodium sulfite and treatment of the resultant acid with phosphorylchloride.
- the terminal alkene (compound 3) was converted to an aldehyde by ozonolysis to provide a compound 4.
- the aldehyde compound (e.g., compound 4 in the scheme above) was reacted with the primary amine bearing the head group in presence of Na[HB(OAc)s], NaaSCXi, in DCM at RT to obtain the lipid with either a functional head group or a protected precursor of the final lipid.
- the BOC-derivatized lipids can be deprotected using TFA. After removal of the protective 5 group the terminal amino groups were being deprotonated to afford the thioureas. The amino groups are then acylated by thioacyl halides in presence of DMAP and TEA.
- CAS: 16420-13-6 Dimethylthiocarbamoyl chloride, commercially available.
- CAS: 19009-42-8 1 -Pyrrolidinecarbothioyl chloride, commercially available.
- CAS: 16420-13-6 Dimethylthiocarbamoyl chloride, commercial available.
- Thiolipid compounds of the present disclosure can be prepared according to analogous methods known to those of skill in the art.
- Example 2 Manufacturability and in vitro investigation of LNP formulations 20 consisting of novel ionizable lipids, BNT-51, BNT-52, BNT-54, BNT-56, BNT-57 or BNT-59.
- the present example describes process for preparing lipid nanoparticles (LNPs) using particular thiolipid compounds (e.g., BNT-51 , BNT-52, BNT-54, BNT-56, BNT-57 or BNT- 59) described herein, as well as in vitro biological effects.
- LNPs of the present example lipid nanoparticles (LNPs) using particular thiolipid compounds (e.g., BNT-51 , BNT-52, BNT-54, BNT-56, BNT-57 or BNT- 59) described herein, as well as in vitro biological effects.
- the sizes of the LNPs have been analyzed by DLS ( Figure 1).
- the hydrodynamic diameters for all formulations have been found to be below 111 nm except for BNT-56.
- the formulations have displayed narrow size distribution (PDI ⁇ 0.2).
- the lipids with identical sulfone-amide tails tail group 1 : BNT-51 , BNT-52 and BNT-54; tail group 2: 5 BNT-56, BNT-57 and BNT-59) showed slightly different sizes due to different head groups.
- Lipids with the thiourea head group led to formulations with smaller sizes compared to lipids with hydroxyl head group (BNT-51 from tail group 1 and BNT-56 from tail group 2).
- thiourea heads with the hydroxyl groups (BNT-54 from tail group 1 ; 10 BNT-59 from tail group 2) showed the lowest sizes in their corresponding groups.
- Tail group 1 showed smaller sizes compared to their tail group 2 analogs indicating that the branching position and the length of the branches effect the hydrodynamic diameters.
- the zeta potential values of the formulations have been investigated by electrophoretic light scattering ( Figure 2).
- the formulations showed neutral-to-negative zeta potential 15 values.
- Example 3 Manufacturability and in vitro investigation of LNP formulations consisting of ionizable lipids, BNT-sulfo-01, BNT-sulfo-02, BNT-sulfo-03, or BNT- sulfo-04.
- the present example describes manufacturability and in vitro biological effects of the0 LNPs consisting of the following lipids: BNT-sulfo-01 , BNT-sulfo-02, BNT-sulfo-03, or BNT-sulfo-04.
- BNT-51 and BNT-52 have also been formulated for the present example.
- Example LNPs have been prepared by microfluidic mixing of the lipid mixture in ethanol and RNA solution in aqueous, acidic buffer. The details of the formulations have been given in the table below. 5
- the sizes of the LNPs were analyzed by DLS (Figure 7).
- the hydrodynamic diameters for all formulations have been found to be below 100 nm except BNT-sulfo-04.
- PDI values was found to be ⁇ 0.2 indicating a narrow size distribution.
- Cyclic amine head groups (BNT-sulfo-02 and BNT-sulfo-03) have been well accommodated and did not alter the size and size distribution significantly compared to the parent lipid, BNT-52.
- BNT-sulfo-01 has led to smaller size compared to BNT-52 (55 and 79 nm, respectively).
- the zeta potential values of the formulations have been investigated by electrophoretic light scattering (Figure 8). All formulations showed very similar (neutral-to-negative) zeta potential values.
- the cytotoxicity and transfection efficiency of the formulations have been tested at three different mRNA concentrations (12.5, 25 and 50 ng) on four different cell lines (C2C12, HepG2, RAW 264.7 and Hek 293) ( Figures 11A-D and Figures 12A-D)
- the formulations did not show significant cytotoxicity at the tested conditions.
- Formulations were effectively able to transfect the cell lines that have been tested ( Figures 12A-D).
- BNT-51 has showed the highest in vitro transfection efficiency at all concentrations on all tested cell lines.
- BNT-sulfo-04 has showed the lowest transfection efficiency most likely due to decreased potency caused by the short tailing.
- BNT-52 showed slightly better expression than BNT-sulfo-01.
- the formulations with cyclic amine head groups (BNT-sulfo-02 and BNT-sulfo-03) showed similar in vitro performance with the parent lipid, BNT-52.
- Example 4 In vitro investigation of the effect of helper lipid on the LNP formulations consisting of novel ionizable lipid, BNT-51
- the present example investigates the manufacturability and in vitro biological effects of the LNPs consisting of BNT-51 with two different helper lipids (DSPC or DOPE).
- LNPs with the same composition but different helper lipids have been prepared, characterized, and tested in vitro.
- LNPs have been prepared 5 by microfluidic mixing of the lipid mixture in ethanol and RNA solution in aqueous, acidic buffer. The details of the formulations have been given in the table below.
- the sizes of the LNPs were analyzed DLS ( Figure 14).
- the hydrodynamic diameter of 10 the DSPC having formulation was found to be higher than DOPE having BNT-51 formulation (106 and 72 nm, respectively).
- BNT-51_DOPE has displayed higher PDI (0.28) than BNT-51_DSPC (0.13).
- the zeta potential values of the formulations have been investigated by electrophoretic light scattering (Figure 15).
- the helper lipid did not significantly affect the zeta potential 15 values.
- the formulations showed neutral zeta potential.
- the cytotoxicity and transfection efficiency of the formulations have been tested at three different mRNA concentrations (12.5, 25 and 50 ng) on four different cell lines (C2C12, 25 HepG2, RAW 264.7, HEK-293) ( Figures 18A-D and Figures 19A-D)
- the formulations have not altered the cell viability significantly at the tested conditions (no cytotoxicity).
- Example 5 In vitro investigation of the effect of stealth lipid and the stealth lipid anchor on the LNP formulations consisting of novel ionizable lipid, BNT-51
- LNPs consisting of the same novel ionizable lipid (BNT-51 ), varying stealth lipids (PEG-DMG, 5 VE-(AEEA)14_AC_2 or DMG-(AEEA)14_AC_2)
- BNT-51 novel ionizable lipid
- PEG-DMG varying stealth lipids
- 5 VE-(AEEA)14_AC_2 or DMG-(AEEA)14_AC_2 varying stealth lipids
- LNPs with the same composition but different stealth lipids have been prepared, characterized, and tested in vitro.
- LNPs have been prepared by microfluidic mixing of the lipid mixture in ethanol and RNA solution in aqueous, acidic buffer. The details of the formulations have been given in the table below.
- the sizes of the LNPs have been investigated by DLS ( Figure 20).
- Well-defined formulations with diameters of ⁇ 100 nm and PDI of ⁇ 0.2 (narrow polydispersity) were able to be obtained.
- the hydrodynamic diameters and PDIs of the formulations are 15 substantially similar.
- the mRNA encapsulation efficiency of the formulations was assessed by Ribogreen 20 assay (Figure 22A).
- the formulations having the same stealth lipid anchor (BNT- 51_PEG-DMG and BNT_51_DMG-AEEA) showed similar levels of encapsulation efficiency (82% and 88%, respectively).
- the formulation with vitamin E lipid anchor (BNT-51_VitE-AEEA) has showed lower encapsulation efficiency indicating that the stealth lipid anchor but not the stealth lipid itself had effect on the mRNA encapsulation efficiency.
- AGE agarose gel electrophoresis
- the cytotoxicity and transfection efficiency of the formulations have been tested at three different mRNA concentrations (12.5, 25 and 50 ng) on four different cell lines (C2C12, HepG2, RAW 264.7, HEK-293) ( Figures 24A-D and Figure 25A-D)
- the formulations have not showed any cytotoxicity at the tested conditions.
- the luciferase expression levels showed that all formulations were able to effectively transfect the tested cell lines (RLU approx. 10 6 - 10 8 ) ( Figures 25A-D). Dose and cell-line dependent differences in the transfection efficiency have been observed.
- BNT-51 formulations with DMG stealth lipid anchor (BNT-51_PEG-DMG and BNT_51_DMG-AEEA formulation) have showed slightly higher transfection efficiency than BNT-51 formulation with Vitamin E lipid anchor (BNT-51_VitE-AEEA).
- Example 6 The in vivo investigation of the biodistribution and antibody expression level of LNP formulations consisting of novel ionizable lipids, BNT-51 or BNT-52.
- the present example assesses the in vivo biodistribution profile of the LNPs composed of BNT-51 or BNT-52 ionizable lipids.
- the in vivo luciferase expression efficacy and antibody expression levels of the formulations have been investigated to reveal the potency of the formulations.
- first LNPs having either BNT-51 or BNT-52 as ionizable lipids have been prepared and characterized in vitro and later tested in vivo.
- LNPs have been prepared by microfluidic mixing of the lipid mixture in ethanol and RNA solution in aqueous, acidic buffer. The details of the formulations have been given in the table below.
- PEG* refers to a PEG lipid.
- the in vitro hemolytic effect of the formulations was investigated at the mRNA dose of 16 mg/kg (the mRNA dose equals to 16 mg/kg in in vivo matrix) (Figure 31 A).
- the formulations showed negligible hemolysis indicating that the formulations do not affect the integrity of red blood cells (PBS as negative control, Triton (0-2%) as positive control).
- BLI results showed that all tested formulations have showed strong signal in the liverspleen region after 6 h ( Figure 32A and 32B).
- BNT-51_P(AEEA) showed the highest luciferase expression indicating that the replacement of PEG-lipid with the P( AEE A)-lipid had led to significant increase in the potency of the formulation.
- BNT-52 has showed higher total flux compared to BNT-51. It could be speculated that the replacement of PEG-lipid with P(AEEA)-lipid could lead to even higher expression that has been reached with BNT-51_P(AEEA). After 24 h, the expression has decreased for all formulations, without any significant change in the biodistribution ( Figures 32A and 32C)
- mice After 24 h, mice (three from each group) have been sacrificed and organs have been collected.
- All the formulations showed strong expression in the liver followed by spleen.
- the liver and spleen signal were found to be highest for BNT-51_P(AEEA).
- BNT-52 Similar to in vivo data, BNT-52 showed good expression.
- BNT-51 displayed slightly different biodistribution profile as the percent liver and spleen signal was found to be approximately same with each other (Figure 33C). Whereas for other formulations, 74%-80% of the total signal has originated from the liver region ( Figure 33C).
- the ex vivo results showed good harmony with in vivo data and proved the potency and distribution profile of the formulations.
- Example 7 Preparation and characterization of RNA/DNA-lipid nanoparticles (BNT51/Ac-AEEA14-DMA/DSPE-PEG2k-Alfa-Tag lipid)
- Alfa-tagged pre-formed lipid nanoparticles were prepared using a lipid mix consisting of BNT51 , DSPC, cholesterol, AC-AEEA14-DMA and DSPE-PEG2k-Alfa peptide (a DSPE- PEG2K polymer functionalized with an Alfa peptide, having a sequence of SEQ.ID.NO.
- the organic solvent in the obtained raw colloid nanoparticles was removed by dialysis against 5mM AcOH using Slide-A-Lyzer dialysis cassettes of 10K molecular weight cutoff (MCWO) (Thermo Fisher Scientific, Waltham, MA, USA).
- MCWO molecular weight cutoff
- the nanoparticles were concentrated to 2X times through centrifugation at 3000rpm x 10 min at 4°C, using Amico Ultra-15 of 30K molecular weight cut-off (MCWO) (Merck, Darmstadt, Germany). After concentration, the nanoparticles were diluted to a sucrose concentration of 10%.
- the frozen stability of the pre-formed lipid nanoparticles was assessed by cycling the formulations from -20 °C and -80 °C (overnight) to +25 °C (2 h) for at least three times.
- the particle size and polydispersity index of the formulations were measured for freezethaw samples.
- the formulations between thaw and freeze cycles were mixed by gentle
- RNA/DNA-lipid particles were prepared by an aqueous-aqueous protocol (LNP2), as described herein. Reporter Thy1.1 RNA and reporter Venus DNA were used for characterization experiments. Briefly, RNA (Thy1.1 ) in aqueous buffer (HEPES 10 mM, EDTA 0.1 mM, pH 7.0) and DNA (Venus) in water were mixed with pre-formed lipid nanoparticles composed of BNT51 , DSPC, cholesterol, Ac-AEEA14-DMA and DSPE- PEG2k-alfa peptide in a molar ratio of 47.5:10:40.5:1.8:0.2, respectively, in aqueous solution (5 mM acetic acid, 10% sucrose), in a volume ratio of 1 :1.
- RNA/DNA-lipid particles were then functionalized with an aCD3-VHH ligand at ligand/cargo ratio of 0.48 w/w, and further diluted with 60 mM HEPES pH 6.0, 20% (w/v) sucrose to a final nucleic acid concentration of 0.1 mg/ml_ (final buffer composition: 22 mM HEPES, 9% sucrose, pH ⁇ 5).
- the RNA/DNA-lipid particles were prepared at N/P ratio of 6:1 and filtered through a 0.22 pm polyethersulfone (PES) filter.
- PES polyethersulfone
- RNA/DNA-lipid particles were alternatively prepared by an aqueous-ethanol mixing protocol (LNP1 ), as described herein. Reporter Thy1.1 RNA and reporter Venus DNA were also used for characterization experiments. Briefly, RNA (Thy1 .1 ) in aqueous buffer condition (HEPES 10 mM, EDTA 0.1 mM, pH 7.0) and DNA (Venus) in water were mixed with ethanolic lipid mix comprising BNT51 , DSPC, cholesterol, Ac-AEEA14-DMA and DSPE-PEG2k-alfa peptide in a molar ratio of 47.5:10:40.5:1.8:0.2, respectively, at 14.4 mM total lipid concentration, in a volume ratio of 3 parts nucleic acids and 1 part lipid mix.
- ethanolic lipid mix comprising BNT51 , DSPC, cholesterol, Ac-AEEA14-DMA and DSPE-PEG2k-alfa peptide in a molar
- the mixing was achieved using a standard syringe pump based set-up equipped with in-line dilution, with a total flow of 90 ml/min (45 ml/min for nucleic acid phase, 15 ml/min for lipid phase, 30 ml/min for in-line dilution) using T mixing element (0.5 mm T mixer).
- T mixing element 0.5 mm T mixer.
- the organic solvent in the obtained raw colloid nanoparticles was removed by dialysis against 20 mM HEPES pH 5.5 using Slide-A-Lyzer dialysis cassettes G2 of 10K molecular weight cut-off (MCWO) (Thermo Fisher Scientific, Waltham, MA, USA).
- RNA/DNA-lipid particles were then functionalized with an aCD3-VHH ligand at ligand/cargo ratio of 0.48 w/w, and further diluted to a final nucleic acid concentration of 0.1 mg/ml_ and storage matrix of 20 mM HEPES pH 5.5, 10% (w/v) sucrose.
- the RNA/DNA-lipid particles were prepared at N/P ratio of 6:1 and filtered through a 0.22 pm polyethersulfone (PES) filter.
- PES polyethersulfone
- Particle size was determined by dynamic light scattering using a DynaPro Plate Reader II (Wyatt, Dernbach, Germany). From the measurements, size (Z-average) and polydispersity indices (Pdl) were calculated from the cumulant analysis using Dynamics 7.8.1 .3 software. For the measurement, samples were diluted 1 :10 in water and analysis was performed in triplicates. pH was measured on 150 pL sample after calibration of the device with pH 4, 7, and 10 standards. Successful cargos incorporation was verified via Agarose Gel Electrophoresis.
- RNA/DNA-LNP1 and RNA/DNA-LNP2 were stored at final nucleic concentration of 0.1 mg/ml_ via DLS measurement. It was observed that aCD3-VHH-functionalized RNA/DNA-LNP1 and RNA/DNA-LNP2 can be successfully manufactured with Ac- AEEA14-DMA stealth moiety, resulting in particles of size ⁇ 100 nm and a PDI ⁇ 0.3 ((A) in Figure 36).
- Successful cargo incorporation was verified via Agarose gel electrophoresis: no RNA or DNA bands are present in the samples, indicating that the formulation did not have any free cargo. Moreover, all the respective RNA and DNA bands were clearly visible when the samples were treated with a release solution (controls), confirming the successful encapsulation of all the cargos ((B) in Figure 36).
- RNA/DNA functionalized nanoparticles The stability of the RNA/DNA functionalized nanoparticles was assessed at 2-8°C and 25 °C. Freeze thaw studies were conducted by cycling the formulations from -20°C and -80 °C (overnight) to +25 °C (2 h) for at least three times. The particle size and polydispersity index of the formulations were measured for freeze-thaw samples. The formulations between thaw and freeze cycles were mixed by gentle inversions before the next freezing cycle. Frozen stability was showed by both LNP1 and LNP2 formulations for up to 3 freeze thaw cycles as depicted in (C) in Figure 36.
- Figure 37 shows the percentages of transfected cell (CD14+ Monocytes, CD19+ B cells, CD4+ T cells or CD8+ T cells) within all transfected PBMCs (Transfection, y-axes) per tested formulation condition (as indicated) for both RNA (Thy1.1) and DNA (Venus).
- LNP2 samples showed a higher transfection rate for both RNA and DNA, as compared to the transfection rate of RNA and DNA for LNP1 samples, with expected variations related to Donor and dose used.
- Example 8 Manufacturing of RNA/DNA lipid nanoparticles (BNT51/Ac-AEEA14- VitE/ DSPE-PEG2k-Alfa-Tag lipid)
- a lipid mix consisting of BNT51 , DSPC, cholesterol, Ac-AEEA14-VitE and DSPE-PEG2k-a peptide in a molar ratio of 47.5:10:40.5:1.8:0.2 was dissolved in organic solvent (ethanol) at 20 mM total lipid concentration and mixed with an aqueous phase (5mM AcOH) in a 3:1 volume ratio (aqueous : organic), using a standard syringe pump based equipped with in-line dilution and a T mixing element (0.5 mm T mixer), at a total flow rate of 90 mL/min (45 ml/min for nucleic acid phase, 15 ml/min for lipid phase, 30 ml/min for in-line dilution).
- the organic solvent in the obtained raw colloid nanoparticles was removed by dialysis against 5mM AcOH using Slide-A-Lyzer dialysis cassettes of 10K molecular weight cut-off (MCWO) (Thermo Fisher Scientific, Waltham, MA, USA).
- MCWO molecular weight cut-off
- the nanoparticles were concentrated to 2X times through centrifugation at 3000rpm x 10 min at 4°C, using Amico Ultra-15 of 30K molecular weight cut-off (MCWO) (Merck, Darmstadt, Germany). After up-concentration, the nanoparticles were diluted to a sucrose concentration of 10%.
- the frozen stability of the pre-formed lipid nanoparticles has been investigated by cycling the formulations from -20 °C and -80 °C (overnight) to +25 °C (2 h) for at least three times.
- the particle size and polydispersity index of the formulations were measured for freeze-thaw samples.
- the formulations between thaw and freeze cycles were mixed by gentle inversions before the next freezing cycle. It was observed that the colloidal stability of nanoparticles at -20°C and -80°C conditions were maintained for at least 3 freezethaw cycles, as depicted in Figure 38.
- RNA/DNA-lipid particles were prepared by an aqueous-aqueous protocol (LNP2), as described herein. Briefly, RNA (Thy1.1) in aqueous buffer conditions (HEPES 10 mM, EDTA 0.1 mM, pH 7.0) and DNA (Venus) in water were mixed with pre-formed lipid nanoparticles composed of BNT51 , DSPC, cholesterol, Ac-AEEA14-VitE and DSPE- PEG2k-alfa peptide in a molar ratio of 47.5:10:40.5:1.8:0.2, respectively, in aqueous solution (5 mM acetic acid, 10% sucrose), in a volume ratio of 1 :1.
- RNA/DNA-lipid particles were then functionalized with an aCD3-VHH ligand at ligand/cargo ratio of 0.48 w/w, and further diluted with 60 mM HEPES pH 6.0, 20% (w/v) sucrose to a final nucleic acid concentration of 0.1 mg/ml_ (final buffer composition: 22 mM HEPES, 9% sucrose, pH ⁇ 5).
- the RNA/DNA-lipid particles were prepared at N/P ratio of 6:1 and filtered through a 0.22 pm polyethersulfone (PES) filter.
- PES polyethersulfone
- RNA/DNA-lipid particles were prepared by an aqueous-ethanol mixing protocol (LNP1 ), as described herein. Briefly, RNA (Thy1 .1 ) in aqueous buffer conditions (HEPES 10 mM, EDTA 0.1 mM, pH 7.0) and DNA (Venus) in water were mixed with ethanolic lipid mix comprising BNT51 , DSPC, cholesterol, Ac-AEEA14-VitE and DSPE-PEG2k-alfa peptide in a molar ratio of 47.5:10:40.5:1 .8:0.2, respectively, at 14.4 mM total lipid concentration, in a volume ratio of 3 parts nucleic acids and 1 part lipid mix.
- LNP1 aqueous-ethanol mixing protocol
- the mixing was achieved using a standard syringe pump-based set-up equipped with in-line dilution, with a total flow of 90 ml/min (45 ml/min for nucleic acid phase, 15 ml/min for lipid phase, 30 ml/min for in-line dilution) using T mixing element (0.5 mm T mixer).
- T mixing element 0.5 mm T mixer.
- the organic solvent in the obtained raw colloid nanoparticles was removed by dialysis against 20 mM HEPES pH 5.5 using Slide-A-Lyzer dialysis cassettes G2 of 10K molecular weight cut-off (MCWO) (Thermo Fisher Scientific, Waltham, MA, USA).
- RNA/DNA-lipid particles were then functionalized with an aCD3-VHH ligand at ligand/cargo ratio of 0.48 w/w, and further diluted to a final nucleic acid concentration of 0.1 mg/ml_ and storage matrix of 20 mM HEPES pH 5.5, 10% (w/v) sucrose.
- the RNA/DNA-lipid particles were prepared at N/P ratio of 6:1 and filtered through a 0.22 pm polyethersulfone (PES) filter.
- PES polyethersulfone
- Particle size was determined by dynamic light scattering using a DynaPro Plate Reader II (Wyatt, Dernbach, Germany). From the measurements, size (Z-average) and polydispersity indices (PDI) were calculated from the cumulant analysis using Dynamics 7.8.1 .3 software. For the measurement, samples were diluted 1 :10 in water and analysis was performed in triplicates. pH was measured on 150 pL sample after calibration of the device with pH 4, 7, and 10 standards. Successful cargos incorporation was verified via Agarose Gel Electrophoresis.
- RNA/DNA-LNP1 and RNA/DNA-LNP2 Size and PDI was determined for functionalized sterile filtered RNA/DNA-LNP1 and RNA/DNA-LNP2 stored at final nucleic concentration of 0.1 mg/ml_ via DLS measurement. It was observed that aCD3-VHH-functionalized RNA/DNA-LNP1 and RNA/DNA-LNP2 can be successfully manufactured with Ac-AEEA14-VitE stealth moiety, resulting in particles of size ⁇ 100 nm and a PDI ⁇ 0.3 ((A) in Figure 39). Successful cargo incorporation was verified via Agarose gel electrophoresis: no RNA or DNA bands are present in the samples, indicating that the formulation did not have any free cargo. Moreover, all the respective RNA and DNA bands were clearly visible when the samples were treated with a release solution (controls), confirming the successful encapsulation of all the cargos ((B) in Figure 39).
- Figure 40 shows the percentages of transfected cell (CD14+ Monocytes, CD19+ B cells, CD4+ T cells or CD8+ T cells) within all transfected PBMCs (Transfection, y-axes) per tested formulation condition (as indicated) for both RNA (Thy1.1) and DNA (Venus).
- LNP2 samples showed a higher transfection for both RNA and DNA as compared to that observed for LNP1 samples, with expected variations related to Donor and dose used.
- Example 9 Manufacturing of RNA/DNA lipid nanoparticles (BNT51/Ac-AEEA14- DMA DSPE-pAEEA14-Alfa-Tag lipid)
- a lipid mix consisting of BNT51 , DSPC, cholesterol, Ac-AEEA14-DMA and DSPE-pAEEA14-alfa peptide in a molar ratio of 47.5:10:40.5:1.8:0.2 was dissolved in organic solvent (ethanol) at 20 mM total lipid concentration and mixed with an aqueous phase (5mM AcOH) in a 3:1 volume ratio (aqueous : organic), using a standard syringe pump based equipped with in-line dilution and a T mixing element (0.5 mm T mixer), at a total flow rate of 90 mL/min (45 ml/min for nucleic acid phase, 15 ml/min for lipid phase, 30 ml/min for in-line dilution).
- the organic solvent in the obtained raw colloid nanoparticles was removed by dialysis against 5mM AcOH using Slide-A-Lyzer dialysis cassettes of 10K molecular weight cut-off (MCWO) (Thermo Fisher Scientific, Waltham, MA, USA).
- MCWO molecular weight cut-off
- the nanoparticles were concentrated to 2X times through centrifugation at 3000rpm x 10 min at 4°C, using Amico Ultra-15 of 30K molecular weight cut-off (MCWO) (Merck, Darmstadt, Germany). After concentration, the nanoparticles were diluted to a sucrose concentration of 10%.
- the frozen stability of the pre-formed lipid nanoparticles has been investigated by cycling the formulations from -20°C and -80°C (overnight) to +25°C (2 h) for at least two times.
- the particle size and polydispersity index of the formulations were measured for freezethaw samples.
- the formulations between thaw and freeze cycles were mixed by gentle inversions before the next freezing cycle. It was observed that the colloidal stability of nanoparticles at -20°C and -80°C conditions were maintained for at least 2 freeze-thaw cycles, as depicted in Figure 41A.
- RNA/DNA-lipid particles were prepared by an aqueous-aqueous protocol (LNP2), as described herein. Briefly, RNA in aqueous buffer conditions of HEPES 10 mM, EDTA 0.1 mM, pH 7.0 and DNA in water were mixed with pre-formed lipid nanoparticles composed of BNT51 , DSPC, cholesterol, Ac-AEEA14-DMA and DSPE-pAEEA14-alfa peptide in a molar ratio of 47.5:10:40.5:1 .8:0.2, respectively, in aqueous solution of 5 mM acetic acid, 10% sucrose, in a volume ratio of 1 :1.
- LNP2 aqueous-aqueous protocol
- RNA/DNA-lipid particles were then functionalized with an aCD3-VHH ligand at ligand/cargo ratio of 0.48 w/w, and further diluted to a final nucleic acid concentration of 0.1 mg/ml_ and storage matrix 22 mM HEPES pH 5.5, 10% (w/v) sucrose.
- the RNA/DNA-lipid particles were prepared at N/P ratio of 12:1 and filtered through a 0.22 pm polyethersulfone (PES) filter.
- PES polyethersulfone
- Particle size was determined by dynamic light scattering using a DynaPro Plate Reader II (Wyatt, Dernbach, Germany). From the measurements, size (Z-average) and polydispersity indices (PDI) were calculated from the cumulant analysis using Dynamics 7.8.1 .3 software. For the measurement, samples were diluted 1 :10 in water and analysis was performed in triplicates. pH was measured on 150 pL sample after calibration of the device with pH 4, 7, and 10 standards. Successful cargos incorporation was verified via Agarose Gel Electrophoresis.
- Freeze thaw studies were conducted by cycling the formulations from -20°C and
- Size and PDI was determined for functionalized sterile filtered RNA/DNA-LNP2 stored at final nucleic acid concentration of 0.1 mg/ml_ via DLS measurement. It was observed that aCD3-VHH-functionalized LNP2 can be successfully manufactured with Ac- AEEA14-DMA stealth moiety and DSPE-pAEEA14-Alfa lipid, resulting in particles of size ⁇ 100 nm and a PDI ⁇ 0.3 ( Figure 41 B). Successful cargo incorporation was verified via Agarose gel electrophoresis. Frozen stability up to 2 freeze thaw cycles was observed, as depicted in Figure 41 B.
- Example 10 Manufacturing of RNA/DNA lipid nanoparticles (BNT52/Ac-AEEA14- DMA DSPE-pAEEA14-Alfa-Tag lipid)
- a lipid mix consisting of BNT52, DSPC, cholesterol, Ac-AEEA14-DMA and DSPE-pAEEA14-alfa peptide in a molar ratio of 47.5:10:40.5:1.8:0.2 was dissolved in organic solvent (ethanol) at 20 mM total lipid concentration and mixed with an aqueous phase (5mM AcOH) in a 3:1 volume ratio (aqueous : organic), using a standard syringe pump based equipped with in-line dilution and a T mixing element (0.5 mm T mixer), at a total flow rate of 90 mL/min (45 ml/min for nucleic acid phase, 15 ml/min for lipid phase, 30 ml/min for in-line dilution).
- the organic solvent in the obtained raw colloid nanoparticles was removed by dialysis against 5mM AcOH using Slide-A-Lyzer dialysis cassettes of 10K molecular weight cut-off (MCWO) (Thermo Fisher Scientific, Waltham, MA, USA).
- MCWO molecular weight cut-off
- the nanoparticles were concentrated to 2X times through centrifugation at 3000rpm x 10 min at 4°C, using Amico Ultra-15 of 30K molecular weight cut-off (MCWO) (Merck, Darmstadt, Germany). After concentration, the nanoparticles were diluted to a sucrose concentration of 10%. Frozen stability of pre-formed lipid nanoparticles (BNT52/Ac-AEEA14-DMA/DSPE- pAEEA 14-Alfa-Tag lipid)
- the frozen stability of the pre-formed lipid nanoparticles has been investigated by cycling the formulations from -20°C and -80°C (overnight) to +25°C (2 h) for at least two times.
- the particle size and polydispersity index of the formulations were measured for freezethaw samples.
- the formulations between thaw and freeze cycles were mixed by gentle inversions before the next freezing cycle. It was observed that the colloidal stability of nanoparticles at -20°C and -80°C conditions were maintained for at least 2 freeze-thaw cycles, as depicted in Figure 42A.
- RNA/DNA-lipid particles were prepared by an aqueous-aqueous protocol (LNP2), as described herein. Briefly, RNA in aqueous buffer condition (HEPES 10 mM, EDTA 0.1 mM, pH 7.0) and DNA in water were mixed with pre-formed lipid nanoparticles composed of BNT52, DSPC, cholesterol, Ac-AEEA14-DMA and DSPE-pAEEA14-alfa peptide in a molar ratio of 47.5:10:40.5:1 .8:0.2, respectively, in aqueous solution of 5 mM acetic acid, 10% sucrose, in a volume ratio of 1 :1 .
- HEPES 10 mM, EDTA 0.1 mM, pH 7.0 RNA in aqueous buffer condition
- DNA in water were mixed with pre-formed lipid nanoparticles composed of BNT52, DSPC, cholesterol, Ac-AEEA14-DMA and DSPE-pAEEA14
- RNA/DNA-lipid particles were then functionalized with an aCD3-VHH ligand at ligand/cargo ratio of 0.48 w/w, and further diluted to a final nucleic acid concentration of 0.1 mg/ml_ and storage matrix 22 mM HEPES pH 5.5, 10% (w/v) sucrose.
- the RNA/DNA-lipid particles were prepared at N/P ratio of 12:1 and filtered through a 0.22 pm polyethersulfone (PES) filter.
- PES polyethersulfone
- Particle size was determined by dynamic light scattering using a DynaPro Plate Reader II (Wyatt, Dernbach, Germany). From the measurements, size (Z-average) and polydispersity indices (Pdl) were calculated from the cumulant analysis using Dynamics 7.8.1 .3 software. For the measurement, samples were diluted 1 :10 in water and analysis was performed in triplicates. pH was measured on 150 pL sample after calibration of the device with pH 4, 7, and 10 standards. Successful cargos incorporation was verified via Agarose Gel Electrophoresis. Freeze thaw studies were conducted by cycling the formulations from -20°C and -80°C (overnight) to +25°C (2 h) for at least two times. The particle size and polydispersity index of the formulations were measured for freeze-thaw samples. The formulations between thaw and freeze cycles were mixed by gentle inversions before the next freezing cycle.
- Example 11 Use of thiolipids for target transfection of T-cells
- the present example assessed the suitability of LNPs containing thiolipids described herein for cell-specific targeting by introducing a targeting system specific for primary T- cells.
- the present example compared thiolipids BNT51 and BNT52 with the known ionizable lipid DODMA, formulated in functionalized LNPs.
- the composition of the LNPs, which were produced at an N/P ratio of 6, can be found in the following table.
- RNA and DNA delivery a cargo mixture containing both Thy1 .1 RNA and Venus nanoplasmid DNA was formulated into an LNP with the above lipid mixture, using methods known to those of skill in the art.
- Tag-lipid DSPE-PEG2k-ALFA containing LNPs were incubated with an anti-CD3 specific VHH_NbAlfa construct, which binds to the AlfaTag (having a sequence SEQ.ID.NO. 1) presented on the LNP surface.
- the resulting particles showed acceptable particle properties (by DLS: diameter ⁇ 200nm, PDI ⁇ 0.5) and negligible amounts of free RNA/DNA as evaluated by Agarose gel electrophoresis.
- the particles thus obtained were tested in a PBMC assay.
- the LNPs containing thiolipids described herein showed greater RNA and DNA transfection in T-cells in comparison to DODMA containing LNPs.
- Figure 42 is a set of bar graphs illustrating use of thiolipids described herein for targeted transfection of T-cells.
- Comparison ofthree different LNPs containing three different ionizable lipids show the superior RNA and DNA transfection efficiency of thiolipids described herein which were formulated in LNP2 and LNP3.
- Depicted in the upper graph are the percentages of Thy 1.1 -expressing cell subtypes (CD4+ T cells, CD8+ T cells, CD19+ B cells) out of all single and alive cells (y-axes).
- Depicted in the lower graph are the percentages of Venus-Nanoplasmid expressing cells for CD4+ T cells and CD8 + T cells.
- Example 12 Use of additional thiolipid compounds for targeted transfection of T- cells
- the present example assesses lipid BNT52 and lipid BNT76 formulated in functionalized LNPs.
- the composition of the LNPs, which were produced at an N/P ratio of 12, can be found in the following table.
- RNA and DNA delivery a cargo mixture containing both Thy1 .1 RNA and Venus nanoplasmid DNA was formulated into an LNP with the above lipid mixture, using methods of the art.
- Tag-lipid DSPE-PEG2k-ALFA containing LNPs were incubated with an anti-CD3 specific VHH_NbAlfa construct, which binds to the AlfaTag presented on the LNP surface.
- the resulting particles showed acceptable particle properties (by DLS: diameter ⁇ 200nm, PDI ⁇ 0.5) and negligible amounts of free RNA/DNA as evaluated by Agarose gel electrophoresis. The particles thus obtained were tested in a PBMC assay.
- RNA and DNA transfection observed in B-cells and Monocytes is low for both LNPs.
- the LNPs containing the novel lipids show high RNA and DNA transfection in T-cells. Both tested novel lipids are potent candidates for targeted transfection of T-cells.
- Figures 44A and 44B illustrate the use of reported thiolipids for targeted transfection of T-cells. In vitro evaluation in hPBMCs. Comparison of two different LNPs containing two different ionizable lipids show high RNA and DNA transfection efficiency of reported thiolipids which were formulated in LNP1 and LNP2. Depicted in Figure 44A are the percentages of Thy1 .1 -expressing cell subtypes (CD4+ T cells, CD8+ T cells, CD19+ B cells, CD14+ Monocytes) out of all single and alive cells (y-axes). Depicted in Figure 44B are the percentages of Venus-Nanoplasmid expressing cells for CD4+ T cells and CD8 + T cells.
- Example 13 Manufacturability and in vitro investigation of LNP formulations 5 consisting of novel ionizable lipid, BNT-72
- the present example assessed the manufacturability and in vitro biological effects of the LNP formulations consisting of provided lipids (with sulfone-branched tail and hydroxyl head), BNT-72.
- BNT-72 has been formulated against a benchmark (BM) formulation and LNPs have been characterized and tested in vitro.
- BM benchmark
- the particles have been prepared at three different N/P ratios.
- LNPs have been prepared by microfluidic mixing of the lipid mixture in ethanol and RNA solution in aqueous, acidic buffer. The details of the formulations have been given in the table below.
- the sizes of the LNPs was assessed by DLS (Figure 45A).
- the hydrodynamic diameter of the benchmark formulation was found to be 70 nm as expected.
- the size of BNT-72 formulation has changed with the N/P ratio.
- N/P 4 and 8 formulations with diameter of 148 nm and 191 nm has been obtained, respectively.
- the size of the BNT- 72 formulation has significantly decreased (114 nm) PDI values was found to be ⁇ 0.2 indicating a narrow size distribution.
- the zeta potential values of the formulations was assessed by electrophoretic light scattering (Figure 45B). Formulations have showed neutral zeta potential.
- the cytotoxicity and transfection efficiency of the formulations was assessed at three different mRNA concentrations (12.5, 25 and 50 ng) on three different cell lines (C2C12, HepG2, RAW 264) (Figure 47). In general, the formulations did not show significant cytotoxicity at the tested conditions. Formulations were effectively able to transfect the cell lines that have been tested ( Figure 48). The transfection ability of the BNT-72 formulation has increased significantly with the increase in N/P ratio. At all N/P ratios, BNT-72 formulation was able to outperform to BM formulation with the exception of HepG2 cells (comparable transfection efficiency at N/P of 4 and 8).
- the present example considers differences in transfection efficiency across different cell lines, size, and physical characteristics of complexes comprising a thiolipid (BNT -76) and a traditional lipid (BNT-90):
- Figure 49 is a bar graph illustrating the size (nm) and polydispersity index (PDI) of complexes comprising BNT-76, BNT-90 or a benchmark lipid CM12_BM.
- Figure 50 is a bar graph illustrating Z-potential (mV) of complexes comprising BNT-76, BNT-90 or a benchmark lipid CM12_BM.
- Figure 51 is a bar graph illustrating RNA integrity (%) of complexes comprising BNT-76, BNT-90 or a benchmark lipid CM12_BM.
- Figure 52 is a bar graph illustrating osmolarity and pH of complexes comprising BNT-76, BNT-90 or a benchmark lipid CM12_BM.
- Figures 53A-53D are a series of bar graphs illustrating transfection efficiency in C2C12 cells (Figure 53A), HepG2 cells (Figure 53B), RAW cells (Figure 53C) and Hek293 cells (Figure 53D).
- Figures 54A-54D are a series of bar graphs illustrating cell viability in C2C12 cells (Figure 54A), HepG2 cells (Figure 54B), RAW cells (Figure 54C) and Hek293 cells (Figure 54D).
Landscapes
- Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
- Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
- Organic Chemistry (AREA)
- Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
- Veterinary Medicine (AREA)
- Medicinal Chemistry (AREA)
- Pharmacology & Pharmacy (AREA)
- Animal Behavior & Ethology (AREA)
- General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
- Public Health (AREA)
- Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
- Bioinformatics & Cheminformatics (AREA)
- Epidemiology (AREA)
- Molecular Biology (AREA)
- Chemical Kinetics & Catalysis (AREA)
- Nuclear Medicine, Radiotherapy & Molecular Imaging (AREA)
- General Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
- Immunology (AREA)
- Biochemistry (AREA)
- Proteomics, Peptides & Aminoacids (AREA)
- Biophysics (AREA)
- Cell Biology (AREA)
- Nanotechnology (AREA)
- Communicable Diseases (AREA)
- Oncology (AREA)
- Pharmaceuticals Containing Other Organic And Inorganic Compounds (AREA)
- Medicines That Contain Protein Lipid Enzymes And Other Medicines (AREA)
- Organic Low-Molecular-Weight Compounds And Preparation Thereof (AREA)
Abstract
The present disclosure provides a compound of formula (I) or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, that is useful for forming particles (e.g., lipid nanoparticles) for delivery of nucleic acids. The present disclosure further provides particle compositions comprising the compound of formula (I), as well as uses thereof.
Description
IONIZABLE THIOPLIPIDS AND USES THEREOF
DESCRIPTION
BACKGROUND
Particles for delivery of nucleic acids have been the subject of much recent work. Certain particles, such as lipid nanoparticles (LNPs) are particularly useful for the transport of therapies such as nucleic acid therapies to cells. See Tenchov, et al., ACS Nano, 2021 , 15, 11 16982-17015. LNPs comprise, among other things, cationic or ionizable lipids that, through electrostatic interaction, form stable complexes that encapsulate nucleic acids and thereby facilitate delivery into the cell.
SUMMARY
There remains a need for cationic or ionizable lipids that are capable of forming complexes with nucleic acids, but have improved manufacturability and improved properties (e.g., improved transfection of nucleic acids and improved stability) relative to previous lipid formulations. The present disclosure provides cationic or ionizable lipid compounds comprising one or more sulfur-based moieties that avoid the problems associated with lipid compounds, while exhibiting improved properties (e.g., improved transfection) and ease of manufacture.
I or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein:
L1 and L2 are each independently an optionally substituted C1-C30 aliphatic group;
L3 is a bond, optionally substituted C1-C10 aliphatic group, or optionally substituted 2- to 10-membered heteroaliphatic group;
X1 and X2 are each independently selected from a bond, -OC(O)-, -C(O)O-, -S(O)2N(R1)- , -N(R1)S(O)2, -S(O)-, -S(O)2-, -S(O)2C(R1)2-, -OC(S)C(R1)2-, -C(R1)2C(S)O-, and -S-, wherein one or both of X1 or X2 is selected from -S(O)2N(R1)-, -N(R1)S(O)2, -S(O)-, - S(O)2-, -S(O)2C(R1)2-, -OC(S)C(R1)2-, -C(R1)2C(S)O-, and -S-; each R1 is, independently, at each instance, optionally substituted Ci-C2o aliphatic or H; T1 and T2 are each independently an optionally substituted C3-C30 aliphatic;
G is -N(R2)C(S)N(R2)2, -OH, -N(R2)2, -N+(R3)3, -N(R5)C(O)R3, -N(R5)S(O)2R3, - N(R5)C(O)N(R3)2, -CH(N-R2), or-R4; each R2 is, independently, at each instance, selected from the group consisting of H, optionally substituted Ci-C3 aliphatic or OR3; or two instances of R2 come together with the atoms to which they are attached to form an optionally substituted 4- to 12-membered heterocycle ring or an optionally substituted 4- to 12-membered heteroaryl ring; each R3 is, independently, at each instance, selected from the group consisting of H and optionally substituted C1-C10 aliphatic; and
R4 is optionally substituted 4- to 12-membered heterocycle, optionally substituted 4- to 12 membered heteroaryl, Ce-Ci2 aryl substituted with one or more of -(CH2)0-6-OH or - (CH2)O-6-N(R5)2, or C3-Ci2 cycloaliphatic substituted with one or more of oxo, -(CH2)0-6- OH, or -(CH2)O-6-N(R5)2; each R5 is independently selected from H and optionally substituted Ci-Ce aliphatic.
In some embodiments, the present disclosure provides a particle comprising a compound described herein and a nucleic acid. In some embodiments, the present disclosure provides a composition (e.g., a pharmaceutical composition) comprising particles described herein.
In some embodiments, the present disclosure provides a method of treating a disease, disorder, or condition in a subject comprising administering to the subject a composition comprising particles described herein.
In some embodiments, the present disclosure provides a method of preparing a compound represented Formula IV:
14-X3-T3
G1-L6-N
15-X4-T4
IV or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, the method comprising: contacting a compound represented by Formula V
G1-L6-NH2
Vila Vllb Vile in the presence of a reducing agent, wherein: each of L4 and L5 are each independently an optionally substituted C1-C30 aliphatic group; L6 is a bond, optionally substituted C1-C10 aliphatic group, or optionally substituted 2- to 10-membered heteroaliphatic group;
X3 and X4 are each independently selected from a bond, -OC(O)-, -C(O)O-, -S(O)2N(R40)- , -N(R40)S(O)2, -S(O)-, -S(O)2-, -S(O)2C(R40)2-, -OC(S)C(R40)2-, -C(R40)2C(S)O-, or -S-, wherein one or both of X3 or X4 is selected from -S(O)2N(R40)-, -N(R40)S(O)2, -S(O)-, - S(O)2-, -S(O)2C(R40)2-, -OC(S)C(R40)2-, -C(R40)2C(S)O-, or -S-; each R40 is, independently, at each instance, optionally substituted Ci-C2o aliphatic or H;
T3 and T4 are each independently an optionally substituted Cs-C2o aliphatic;
G1 is -N(R6)C(S)N(R6)2, -OH, -N(R6)2, -N(R9)C(O)R7, -N(R9)S(O)2R7, -N(R9)C(O)N(R7)2, -CH(N-R7), or-R8; each G2 is independently O or N2; each G3 is independently halogen (e.g., Cl, Br, or I), -OTs, or OTf; each R6 is, independently, at each instance, selected from the group consisting of H, optionally substituted Ci-Ce aliphatic or OR7; or two instances of R6 come together with the atoms to which they are attached to form an optionally substituted 4- to 12-membered heterocycle ring or an optionally substituted 4- to 12-membered heteroaryl ring; each R7 is, independently, at each instance, selected from the group consisting of H and optionally substituted Ci-Ce aliphatic;
R8 is optionally substituted 4- to 12-membered heterocycle, optionally substituted 4- to 12 membered heteroaryl, Ce-Ci2 aryl substituted with one or more of -(CH2)o-6-OH or - (CH2)O-6-N(R9)2, or Cs-Ci2 cycloaliphatic substituted with one or more of oxo, -(CH2)o-6- OH, or -(CH2)o-6-N(R9)2; and each R9 is independently selected from H and optionally substituted Ci-Ce aliphatic.
Brief Description of the Drawing
Figure 1 is a bar graph illustrating particle size and PDI of LNP formulations with BNT- 51 , BNT-52, BNT-54, BNT-56, BNT-57 or BNT-59.
Figure 2 is a bar graph illustrating zeta potential values of LNP formulations with BNT- 51 , BNT-52, BNT-54, BNT-56, BNT-57 or BNT-59.
Figures 3A and 3B are a bar graph illustrating mRNA encapsulation efficiency (Figure 3A) and agarose gel electropherogram (Figure 3B) of LNP formulations with BNT-51 , BNT-52, BNT-54, BNT-56, BNT-57 or BNT-59.
Figure 4 is a bar graph illustrating mRNA integrity (%) of the LNP formulations with BNT- 51 , BNT-52, BNT-54, BNT-56, BNT-57 or BNT-59.
Figure s is a series of bar graphs illustrating the effect of the LNP formulations with BNT- 51 , BNT-52, BNT-54, BNT-56, BNT-57 or BNT-59 on cell viability in C2C12 cells (top chart), HepG2 cells (middle chart) and RAW cells (bottom chart).
Figure 6 is a series of bar graphs illustrating the effect of the LNP formulations with BNT- 51 , BNT-52, BNT-54, BNT-56, BNT-57 or BNT-59 on transfection efficiency in C2C12 cells (top chart), HepG2 cells (middle chart) and RAW cells (bottom chart).
Figure 7 is a bar graph illustrating particle size and PDI of LNP formulations with BNT- sulfo-01 , BNT-sulfo-02, BNT-sulfo-03, or BNT-sulfo-04.
Figure 8 is a bar graph illustrating Zeta potential values of LNP formulations with BNT- sulfo-01 , BNT-sulfo-02, BNT-sulfo-03, or BNT-sulfo-04.
Figures 9A and 9B are a bar graph illustrating mRNA encapsulation efficiency (Figure 9A) and agarose gel electropherogram (Figure 9B) of LNP formulations with BNT-sulfo- 01 , BNT-sulfo-02, BNT-sulfo-03, or BNT-sulfo-04.
Figure 10 is a bar graph mRNA integrity (%) of the LNP formulations with BNT-sulfo-01 , BNT-sulfo-02, BNT-sulfo-03, or BNT-sulfo-04.
Figures 11A-D are a series of bar graphs illustrating the effect of the LNP formulations with BNT-sulfo-01 , BNT-sulfo-02, BNT-sulfo-03, or BNT-sulfo-04 on cell viability in C2C12 cells (Figure 11 A), HepG2 cells (Figure 11 B), RAW cells (Figure 110) and Hek293 cells (Figure 11 D).
Figures 12A-D are a series of bar graphs illustrating the effect of the LNP formulations with BNT-51 , BNT-52, BNT-54, BNT-56, BNT-57 or BNT-59 on transfection efficiency in C2C12 cells (Figure 12A), HepG2 cells (Figure 12B), RAW cells (Figure 12C) and Hek293 cells (Figure 12D).
Figures 13A and 13B are a bar graph illustrating the in vitro hemolytic effect of the LNP formulations with BNT-51 , BNT-52, BNT-54, BNT-56, BNT-57 or BNT-59 (Figure 13A)
and a bar graph illustrating the effect of LNP formulations on complement activation (Figure 13B).
Figure 14 is a bar graph illustrating particle size and PDI of LNP formulations with BNT- 51 and a helper lipid (DSPC or DOPE).
Figure 15 is a bar graph illustrating zeta potential values of LNP formulations with BNT- 51 and a helper lipid (DSPC or DOPE).
Figures 16A and 16B are a bar graph illustrating mRNA encapsulation efficiency (Figure 16A) and agarose gel electropherogram (Figure 16B) of LNP formulations with BNT-51 and a helper lipid.
Figure 17 is a bar graph illustrating mRNA integrity (%) of the LNP formulations with BNT-51 and a helper lipid (DSPC or DOPE).
Figures 18A-D are a bar graph illustrating the effect of the LNP formulations with BNT- 51 and a helper lipid on cell viability in C2C12 cells (Figure 18A), HepG2 cells (Figure 18B), RAW cells (Figure 18C) and Hek293 cells (Figure 18D).
Figures 19A-D are a bar graph illustrating the effect of the LNP formulations with BNT- 51 and a helper lipid. on transfection efficiency in C2C12 cells (Figure 19A), HepG2 cells (Figure 19B), RAW cells (Figure 19C) and Hek293 cells (Figure 19D).
Figure 20 is a bar graph illustrating particle size and PDI of LNP formulations with BNT- 51 and a stealth lipid.
Figure 21 is a bar graph illustrating zeta potential values of LNP formulations with BNT- 51 and a stealth lipid.
Figures 22A-B are a bar graph illustrating mRNA encapsulation efficiency (Figure 22A) and agarose gel electropherogram (Figure 22B) of LNP formulations with BNT-51 and a stealth lipid.
Figure 23 is a bar graph illustrating mRNA integrity (%) of the LNP formulations with BNT-51 and a stealth lipid.
Figures 24A-D are a series of bar graphs illustrating the effect of the LNP formulations with BNT-51 and a stealth lipid on cell viability C2C12 cells (Figure 24A), HepG2 cells (Figure 24B), RAW cells (Figure 24C) and Hek293 cells (Figure 24D).
Figures 25A-D are a series of bar graphs illustrating the effect of the LNP formulations with BNT-51 and a stealth lipid on transfection efficiency in C2C12 cells (Figure 25A), HepG2 cells (Figure 25B), RAW cells (Figure 25C) and Hek293 cells (Figure 25D).
Figure 26 is a bar graph illustrating particle size and PDI of LNP formulations with BNT- 51 , BNT-51 _P(AEEA) or BNT-52.
RECTIFIED SHEET (RULE 91) ISA/EP
Figure 27 is a bar graph illustrating zeta potential values of LNP formulations with BNT- 51 , BNT-51_P(AEEA) or BNT-52.
Figure 28 is a bar graph illustrating mRNA encapsulation efficiency of LNP formulations with BNT-51 , BNT-51_P(AEEA) or BNT-52.
Figure 29A-D are a series of bar graphs illustrating the effect of the LNP formulations with BNT-51 , BNT-51_P(AEEA) or BNT-52 on cell viability in C2C12 cells (Figure 29A), HepG2 cells (Figure 29B), RAW cells (Figure29C) and Hek293 cells (Figure 29D).
Figures 30A-D are a series of bar graphs illustrating the effect of the LNP formulations with BNT-51 , BNT-51_P(AEEA) or BNT-52 on transfection efficiency in C2C12 cells (Figure 30A), HepG2 cells (Figure 30B), RAW cells (Figure 30C) and Hek293 cells (Figure 30D).
Figures 31 A and 31 B are a set of bar graphs illustrating the effect of the LNP formulations with BNT-51 , BNT-51_P(AEEA) or BNT-52 on hemolysis (Figure 31 A) and complement activation (Figure 31 B).
Figures 32A-C are a series of bioluminescence images of animals injected with the LNP formulations comprising BNT-51 , BNT-51_P(AEEA) or BNT-51 , after 6 and 24 h (Figure 32A), and a bar graph illustrating total flux of anatomical location -liver- after 6 h (Figure 32B) and after 24 h (Figure 32C).
Figures 33A-C are an ex vivo bioluminescence images of organs of animals injected with the LNP formulations comprising BNT-51 , BNT-51_P(AEEA) or BNT-51 (Figure 33A), a bar graph illustrating total flux (Figure 33B) and a bar graph illustrating percent organ distribution of the total signal (Figure 33C) after 24 h.
Figure 34 is a bar graph illustrating antibody levels in the sera of animals injected with the LNP formulations comprising BNT-51 , BNT-51_P(AEEA) or BNT-51 after 24 h.
Figure 35 is a bar graph illustrating particle size and PDI of pre-formed LNPs with BNT51 and Ac-AEEA14-DMA subjected to at least three freeze thaw cycles from -20°C to room temperature and from -80°C to room temperature.
Figures 36A-C are a series of bar graphs illustrating characterization of BNT51 functionalized lipid nanoparticles prepared with Ac-AEEA14-DMA as stealth moiety and DSPE-PEG2k-Alfa lipid (Figure 36A); particle size and PDI of functionalized LNP1 and LNP2; (Figure 36B); Agarose Gel Electrophoresis of controls, untreated functionalized LNP1 and LNP2 (upper row) and functionalized LNP1 and LNP2 treated with release solution (lower row) (Figure 36C); and particle size and PDI of functionalized LNP1 and LNP2 subjected to at least two freeze thaw cycles from -20°C to room temperature and from -80°C to room temperature, and after 2 weeks at 2-8°C and 25°C.
Figures 37A-B are a series of bar graphs illustrating percentages of transfected cells (CD14+ Monocytes, CD19+ B cells, CD4+ T cells or CD8+ T cells) within all transfected PBMCs for both RNA (Thy1.1 ) (Figure 37A) and DNA (Venus) (Figure 37B), delivered using LNP1 or LNP2.
Figure 38 is a bar graph illustrating particle size and PDI of preformed LNPs with BNT51 and Ac-AEEA14-VitE subjected to at least three freeze thaw cycles from -20°C to room temperature and from -80°C to room temperature.
Figures 39A-C are a series of bar graphs illustrating characterization of BNT51 functionalized lipid nanoparticles prepared with Ac-AEEA14-VitE as stealth moiety and DSPE-PEG2k-Alfa lipid (Figure 39A); particle size and PDI of functionalized LNP1 and LNP2 (Figure 39B); Agarose Gel Electrophoresis of controls, untreated functionalized LNP1 and LNP2 (upper row) and functionalized LNP1 and LNP2 treated with release solution (lower row) (Figure 39C); and particle size and PDI of functionalized LNP1 and LNP2, subjected to at least two freeze thaw cycles from -20°C to room temperature and from -80°C to room temperature, and after 2 weeks at 2-8°C and 25°C.
Figures 40A-B are a series of bar graphs illustrating percentages of transfected cell (CD14+ Monocytes, CD19+ B cells, CD4+ T cells or CD8+ T cells) within all transfected PBMCs for both RNA (Thy1 .1 ) (Figure 40A) and DNA (Venus) (Figure 40B), delivered using LNP1 or LNP2.
Figures 41A-B are a set of bar graphs illustrating characterization of BNT51 functionalized lipid nanoparticles prepared with Ac-AEEA14-DMA as stealth moiety and DSPE-pAEEA14-Alfa lipid, including (Figure 41 A): particle size and PDI of preformed LNPs subjected to at least two freeze thaw cycles from -20°C to room temperature and from -80°C to room temperature; and (Figure 41 B): particle size and PDI of functionalized RNA/DNA-LNP2 at tO and subjected to at least two freeze thaw cycles from -20°C to room temperature and from -80°C to room temperature.
Figures 42A-B are a set of bar graphs illustrating characterization of BNT52 functionalized lipid nanoparticles prepared with Ac-AEEA14-DMA as stealth moiety and DSPE-pAEEA14-Alfa lipid including (Figure 42A): particle size and PDI of preformed LNPs subjected to at least two freeze thaw cycles from -20°C to room temperature and from -80°C to room temperature; and (Figure 42B): Particle size and PDI of functionalized RNA/DNA-LNP2 at tO and subjected to at least two freeze thaw cycles from -20°C to room temperature and from -80°C to room temperature.
Figure 43 is a set of bar graphs illustrating use of thiolipids described herein for targeted transfection of T-cells. In vitro evaluation in hPBMCs. Comparison of three different LNPs
containing three different ionizable lipids show the superior RNA and DNA transfection efficiency of thiolipids described herein which were formulated in LNP2 and LNP3. Depicted in the upper graph are the percentages of Thy1 .1 -expressing cell subtypes (CD4+ T cells, CD8+ T cells, CD19+ B cells) out of all single and alive cells (y-axes). Depicted in the lower graph are the percentages of Venus-Nanoplasmid expressing cells for CD4+ T cells and CD8 + T cells.
Figures 44A and 44B illustrate the use of reported thiolipids for targeted transfection of T-cells. In vitro evaluation in hPBMCs. Comparison of two different LNPs containing two different ionizable lipids show high RNA and DNA transfection efficiency of reported thiolipids which were formulated in LNP1 and LNP2. Depicted in Figure 44A are the percentages of Thy1 .1 -expressing cell subtypes (CD4+ T cells, CD8+ T cells, CD19+ B cells, CD14+ Monocytes) out of all single and alive cells (y-axes). Depicted in Figure 44B are the percentages of Venus-Nanoplasmid expressing cells for CD4+ T cells and CD8 + T cells.
Figures 45A and 45B are a set of bar charts illustrating characterization of the LNP formulations with BNT-72, including particle size and PDI (Figure 45A) and zeta potential (Figure 45B).
Figures 46A and 46B are a set of bar graphs illustrating mRNA encapsulation efficiency (Figure 46A) and mRNA integrity (Figure 46B) of the of LNP formulations with BNT-72. Figure 47 is a series of bar graphs illustrating the effect of the LNP formulations with BNT-72 on cell viability in C2C12 cells (top chart), HepG2 cells (middle chart) and RAW cells (bottom chart).
Figure 48 is a bar graph illustrating the effect of the LNP formulations with BNT-72 on transfection efficiency in C2C12 cells (top chart), HepG2 cells (middle chart) and RAW cells (bottom chart).
Figure 49 is a bar graph illustrating the size (nm) and polydispersity index (PDI) of complexes comprising BNT-76, BNT-90 or a benchmark lipid CM12_BM.
Figure 50 is a bar graph illustrating Z-potential (mV) of complexes comprising BNT-76, BNT-90 or a benchmark lipid CM12_BM.
Figure 51 is a bar graph illustrating RNA integrity (%) of complexes comprising BNT-76, BNT-90 or a benchmark lipid CM12_BM.
Figure 52 is a bar graph illustrating osmolarity and pH of complexes comprising BNT- 76, BNT-90 or a benchmark lipid CM12_BM.
Figures 53A-53D are a series of bar graphs illustrating transfection efficiency in C2C12 cells (Figure 53A), HepG2 cells (Figure 53B), RAW cells (Figure 53C) and Hek293 cells (Figure 53D).
Figures 54A-54D are a series of bar graphs illustrating cell viability in C2C12 cells (Figure 54A), HepG2 cells (Figure 54B), RAW cells (Figure 54C) and Hek293 cells (Figure 54D).
Detailed Description of Certain Embodiments
The present disclosure provides, among other things, the surprising discovery of particular cationic or ionizable lipids comprising at least one sulfur-containing moiety. Such cationic or ionizable lipids exhibit improved properties (e.g., improved transfection to cells) relative to previous lipids. For example, as illustrated in the Examples provided herein, thiolipids of the present disclosure exhibit improvements over previous lipids that lack a sulfur-containing moiety, including, for example, improved transfection of cells with RNA. Particles prepared using thiolipid compounds described herein exhibit narrow size distribution (i.e., are substantially uniform in size), high encapsulation efficiency, low cytotoxicity, and improved biodistribution and efficacy relative to particles comprising previous lipid compounds.
Compounds and Definitions
Compounds of this disclosure include those described generally above and are further illustrated by the classes, subclasses, and species disclosed herein. As used herein, the following definitions shall apply unless otherwise indicated. For purposes of this disclosure, the chemical elements are identified in accordance with the Periodic Table of Elements, CAS version, Handbook of Chemistry and Physics, 75th Ed. Additionally, general principles of organic chemistry are described in “Organic Chemistry”, Thomas Sorrell, University Science Books, Sausalito: 1999, and “March’s Advanced Organic Chemistry”, 5th Ed., Ed.: Smith, M.B. and March, J., John Wiley & Sons, New York: 2001 , the entire contents of which are hereby incorporated by reference.
Unless otherwise stated, structures depicted herein are meant to include all stereoisomeric (e.g., enantiomeric or diastereomeric) forms of the structure, as well as all geometric or conformational isomeric forms of the structure. For example, the R and S configurations of each stereocenter are contemplated as part of the disclosure. Therefore, single stereochemical isomers, as well as enantiomeric, diastereomeric, and geometric (or conformational) mixtures of provided compounds are within the scope of
the disclosure. For example, in some cases, Table 1 shows one or more stereoisomers of a compound, and unless otherwise indicated, represents each stereoisomer alone and/or as a mixture. Unless otherwise stated, all tautomeric forms of provided compounds are within the scope of the disclosure.
Unless otherwise indicated, structures depicted herein are meant to include compounds that differ only in the presence of one or more isotopically enriched atoms. For example, compounds having the present structures including replacement of hydrogen by deuterium or tritium, or replacement of a carbon by 13C- or 14C-enriched carbon are within the scope of this disclosure.
About or approximately: As used herein, the term "approximately" or "about," as applied to one or more values of interest, refers to a value that is similar to a stated reference value. In general, those skilled in the art, familiar within the context, will appreciate the relevant degree of variance encompassed by "about" or "approximately" in that context. For example, in some embodiments, the term "approximately" or "about" may encompass a range of values that are within (i.e., ±) 25%, 20%, 19%, 18%, 17%, 16%, 15%, 14%, 13%, 12%, 1 1 %, 10%, 9%, 8%, 7%, 6%, 5%, 4%, 3%, 2%, 1 %, or less of the referred value.
Administering: As used herein, the term "administering" or "administration" typically refers to the administration of a composition to a subject to achieve delivery of an agent that is, or is included in, a composition to a target site or a site to be treated. Those of ordinary skill in the art will be aware of a variety of routes that may, in appropriate circumstances, be utilized for administration to a subject, for example a human. For example, in some embodiments, administration may be ocular, oral, parenteral, topical, etc. In some particular embodiments, administration may be bronchial (e.g., by bronchial instillation), buccal, dermal (which may be or comprise, for example, one or more of topical to the dermis, intradermal, interdermal, transdermal, etc.), enteral, intra-arterial, intradermal, intragastric, intramedullary, intramuscular, intranasal, intraperitoneal, intrathecal, intravenous, intraventricular, within a specific organ (e.g., intrahepatic), mucosal, nasal, oral, rectal, subcutaneous, sublingual, topical, tracheal (e.g., by intratracheal instillation), vaginal, vitreal, etc. In some embodiments, administration may be parenteral. In some embodiments, administration may be oral. In some particular embodiments, administration may be intravenous. In some particular embodiments, administration may be subcutaneous. In some embodiments, administration may involve only a single dose. In some embodiments, administration may involve application of a fixed number of doses. In some embodiments, administration may involve dosing that
is intermittent (e.g., a plurality of doses separated in time) and/or periodic (e.g., individual doses separated by a common period of time) dosing. In some embodiments, administration may involve continuous dosing (e.g., perfusion) for at least a selected period of time. In some embodiments, administration may comprise a prime-and-boost protocol. A prime-and-boost protocol can include administration of a first dose of a pharmaceutical composition (e.g., an immunogenic composition, e.g., a vaccine) followed by, after an interval of time, administration of a second or subsequent dose of a pharmaceutical composition (e.g., an immunogenic composition, e.g., a vaccine). In the case of an immunogenic composition, a prime-and-boost protocol can result in an increased immune response in a patient.
Aliphatic: The term “aliphatic” refers to a straight-chain (i.e., unbranched) or branched, substituted or unsubstituted hydrocarbon chain that is completely saturated or that contains one or more units of unsaturation, or a monocyclic hydrocarbon or bicyclic hydrocarbon that is completely saturated or that contains one or more units of unsaturation, but which is not aromatic (also referred to herein as “cycloaliphatic”), that has a single point or more than one points of attachment to the rest of the molecule. Unless otherwise specified, aliphatic groups contain 1 -12 aliphatic carbon atoms. In some embodiments, aliphatic groups contain 1 -6 aliphatic carbon atoms (e.g., Ci-e). In some embodiments, aliphatic groups contain 1 -5 aliphatic carbon atoms (e.g., C1-5). In other embodiments, aliphatic groups contain 1-4 aliphatic carbon atoms (e.g., C1-4). In still other embodiments, aliphatic groups contain 1 -3 aliphatic carbon atoms (e.g., C1-3), and in yet other embodiments, aliphatic groups contain 1 -2 aliphatic carbon atoms (e.g., C1-2). Suitable aliphatic groups include, but are not limited to, linear or branched, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, alkenyl, or alkynyl groups and hybrids thereof. A preferred aliphatic group is C1-6 alkyl.
Alkyl: The term “alkyl”, used alone or as part of a larger moiety, refers to a saturated, optionally substituted straight or branched chain hydrocarbon group having (unless otherwise specified) 1 -12, 1 -10, 1-8, 1 -6, 1 -4, 1 -3, or 1 -2 carbon atoms (e.g., C1-12, C1-10, C1-8, C1-6, C1-4, C1-3, or C1-2). Exemplary alkyl groups include methyl, ethyl, propyl, butyl, pentyl, hexyl, and heptyl.
Alkylene: The term “alkylene” is refers to a bivalent alkyl group. In some embodiments, “alkylene” is a bivalent straight or branched alkyl group. In some embodiments, an "alkylene chain" is a polymethylene group, i.e., -(CH2)n-, wherein n is a positive integer, e.g., from 1 to 6, from 1 to 4, from 1 to 3, from 1 to 2, or from 2 to 3. An optionally substituted alkylene chain is a polymethylene group in which one or more methylene
hydrogen atoms is optionally replaced with a substituent. Suitable substituents include those described below for a substituted aliphatic group and also include those described in the specification herein. It will be appreciated that two substituents of the alkylene group may be taken together to form a ring system. In certain embodiments, two substituents can be taken together to form a 3- to 7-membered ring. The substituents can be on the same or different atoms. The suffix “-ene” or “-enyl” when appended to certain groups herein are intended to refer to a bifunctional moiety of said group. For example, “-ene” or “-enyl”, when appended to “cyclopropyl” becomes “cyclopropylene” intended to refer to a bifunctional cyclopropyl group, e.g.,
Alkenyl: The term “alkenyl”, used alone or as part of a larger moiety, refers to an optionally substituted straight or branched chain or cyclic hydrocarbon group having at least one double bond and having (unless otherwise specified) 2-12, 2-10, 2-8, 2-6, 2-4, or 2-3 carbon atoms(e.g., C2-12, C2-10, C2-8, C2-6, C2-4, or C2-3). Exemplary alkenyl groups include ethenyl, propenyl, butenyl, pentenyl, hexenyl, and heptenyl. The term “cycloalkenyl” refers to an optionally substituted non-aromatic monocyclic or multicyclic ring system containing at least one carbon-carbon double bond and having about 3 to about 10 carbon atoms. Exemplary monocyclic cycloalkenyl rings include cyclopentenyl, cyclohexenyl, and cycloheptenyl.
Alkynyl: The term “alkynyl”, used alone or as part of a larger moiety, refers to an optionally substituted straight or branched chain hydrocarbon group having at least one triple bond and having (unless otherwise specified) 2-12, 2-10, 2-8, 2-6, 2-4, or 2-3 carbon atoms (e.g., C2-12, C2-10, C2-8, C2-6, C2-4, or C2-3). Exemplary alkynyl groups include ethynyl, propynyl, butynyl, pentynyl, hexynyl, and heptynyl.
Aryl: The term “aryl” refers to monocyclic and bicyclic ring systems having a total of six to fourteen ring members (e.g., Ce-Cu), wherein at least one ring in the system is aromatic and wherein each ring in the system contains three to seven ring members. In some embodiments, an “aryl” group contains between six and twelve total ring members (e.g., C6-C12). The term “aryl” may be used interchangeably with the term “aryl ring”. In certain embodiments, “aryl” refers to an aromatic ring system which includes, but not limited to, phenyl, biphenyl, naphthyl, anthracyl and the like, which may bear one or more substituents. Unless otherwise specified, “aryl” groups are hydrocarbons. In some embodiments, an “aryl” ring system is an aromatic ring (e.g., phenyl) that is fused to a
non-aromatic ring (e.g., cycloalkyl). Examples of aryl rings include that are fused include
Associated: Two events or entities are “associated” with one another, as that term is used herein, if the presence, level and/or form of one is correlated with that of the other. For example, a particular entity (e.g., polypeptide, genetic signature, metabolite, microbe, etc) is considered to be associated with a particular disease, disorder, or condition, if its presence, level and/or form correlates with incidence of and/or susceptibility to the disease, disorder, or condition (e.g., across a relevant population). In some embodiments, two or more entities are physically “associated” with one another if they interact, directly or indirectly, so that they are and/or remain in physical proximity with one another. In some embodiments, two or more entities that are physically associated with one another are covalently linked to one another; in some embodiments, two or more entities that are physically associated with one another are not covalently linked to one another but are non-covalently associated, for example by means of hydrogen bonds, van der Waals interaction, hydrophobic interactions, magnetism, and combinations thereof.
Biological sample: As used herein, the term “biological sample” typically refers to a sample obtained or derived from a biological source (e.g., a tissue or organism or cell culture) of interest, as described herein. In some embodiments, a source of interest comprises an organism, such as an animal or human. In some embodiments, a biological sample is or comprises biological tissue or fluid. In some embodiments, a biological sample may be or comprise bone marrow; blood; blood cells; ascites; tissue or fine needle biopsy samples; cell-containing body fluids; free floating nucleic acids; sputum; saliva; urine; cerebrospinal fluid, peritoneal fluid; pleural fluid; feces; lymph; gynecological fluids; skin swabs; vaginal swabs; oral swabs; nasal swabs; washings or lavages such as a ductal lavages or broncheoalveolar lavages; aspirates; scrapings; bone marrow specimens; tissue biopsy specimens; surgical specimens; feces, other body fluids, secretions, and/or excretions; and/or cells therefrom, etc. In some embodiments, a biological sample is or comprises cells obtained from an individual. In some embodiments, obtained cells are or include cells from an individual from whom the sample is obtained. In some embodiments, a sample is a “primary sample” obtained directly from a source of interest by any appropriate means. For example, in some embodiments, a primary biological sample is obtained by methods selected from the group consisting of biopsy (e.g., fine needle aspiration or tissue biopsy), surgery,
collection of body fluid (e.g., blood, lymph, feces etc.), etc. In some embodiments, as will be clear from context, the term “sample” refers to a preparation that is obtained by processing (e.g., by removing one or more components of and/or by adding one or more agents to) a primary sample. For example, filtering using a semi-permeable membrane. Such a “processed sample” may comprise, for example, nucleic acids or proteins extracted from a sample or obtained by subjecting a primary sample to techniques such as amplification or reverse transcription of mRNA, isolation and/or purification of certain components, etc.
Carrier: As used herein, the term “carrier” refers to a diluent, adjuvant, excipient, or vehicle with which a composition is administered. In some exemplary embodiments, carriers can include sterile liquids, such as, for example, water and oils, including oils of petroleum, animal, vegetable or synthetic origin, such as, for example, peanut oil, soybean oil, mineral oil, sesame oil and the like. In some embodiments, carriers are or include one or more solid components.
Combination therapy: As used herein, the term “combination therapy” refers to those situations in which a subject is simultaneously exposed to two or more therapeutic regimens (e.g., two or more therapeutic agents or modality(ies)). In some embodiments, the two or more regimens may be administered simultaneously; in some embodiments, such regimens may be administered sequentially (e.g., all “doses” of a first regimen are administered prior to administration of any doses of a second regimen); in some embodiments, such agents are administered in overlapping dosing regimens. In some embodiments, “administration” of combination therapy may involve administration of one or more agent(s) or modality(ies) to a subject receiving the other agent(s) or modality(ies) in the combination. For clarity, combination therapy does not require that individual agents be administered together in a single composition (or even necessarily at the same time), although in some embodiments, two or more agents, or active moieties thereof, may be administered together in a combination composition, or even in a combination compound (e.g., as part of a single chemical complex or covalent entity).
Comparable’. As used herein, the term “comparable” refers to two or more agents, entities, situations, sets of conditions, etc., that may not be identical to one another but that are sufficiently similar to permit comparison therebetween so that one skilled in the art will appreciate that conclusions may reasonably be drawn based on differences or similarities observed. In some embodiments, comparable sets of conditions, circumstances, individuals, or populations are characterized by a plurality of substantially identical features and one or a small number of varied features. Those of ordinary skill
in the art will understand, in context, what degree of identity is required in any given circumstance for two or more such agents, entities, situations, sets of conditions, etc. to be considered comparable. For example, those of ordinary skill in the art will appreciate that sets of circumstances, individuals, or populations are comparable to one another when characterized by a sufficient number and type of substantially identical features to warrant a reasonable conclusion that differences in results obtained or phenomena observed under or with different sets of circumstances, individuals, or populations are caused by or indicative of the variation in those features that are varied.
Composition: Those skilled in the art will appreciate that the term “composition” may be used to refer to a discrete physical entity that comprises one or more specified components. In general, unless otherwise specified, a composition may be of any form - e.g., gas, gel, liquid, solid, etc.
Cycloaliphatic. As used herein, the term “cycloaliphatic” refers to a monocyclic C3-8 hydrocarbon or a bicyclic Ce -10 hydrocarbon that is completely saturated or that contains one or more units of unsaturation, but which is not aromatic, that has a single point or more than one points of attachment to the rest of the molecule.
Cycloalkyl-. As used herein, the term “cycloalkyl” refers to an optionally substituted saturated ring monocyclic or polycyclic system of about 3 to about 10 ring carbon atoms. Exemplary monocyclic cycloalkyl rings include cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, and cycloheptyl.
Deoxyribonucleic Acid (DNA)-. As used herein, the term “DNA” refers to a polymeric molecule of nucleotides that are typically double-stranded and comprise adenine, cytosine, guanine and thymine, and a deoxyribose sugar backbone structure as specified in the definition “Nucleic Acid/Polynucleotide.” In some embodiments, DNA is linear DNA, plasmid DNA, minicircle DNA, nanoplasmid DNA, doggybone DNA, or a transposon.
Deoxyribonucleotide: As used herein, the term “deoxyribonucleotide” refers to unmodified and modified deoxyribonucleotides. For example, unmodified deoxyribonucleotides include the purine bases adenine (A) and guanine (G), and the pyrimidine bases cytosine (C) and thymine (T). Modified deoxyribonucleotides may include one or more modifications including, but not limited to, for example, (a) end modifications, e.g., 5' end modifications (e.g., phosphorylation, dephosphorylation, conjugation, inverted linkages, etc.), 3' end modifications (e.g., conjugation, inverted linkages, etc.), (b) base modifications, e.g. , replacement with modified bases, stabilizing bases, destabilizing bases, or bases that base pair with an expanded repertoire of
partners, or conjugated bases, (c) sugar modifications (e.g., at the 2' position or 4' position) or replacement of the sugar, and (d) internucleoside linkage modifications, including modification or replacement of the phosphodiester linkages.
Dosage form or unit dosage form: Those skilled in the art will appreciate that the term “dosage form” may be used to refer to a physically discrete unit of an active agent (e.g., a therapeutic or diagnostic agent) for administration to a subject. Typically, each such unit contains a predetermined quantity of active agent. In some embodiments, such quantity is a unit dosage amount (or a whole fraction thereof) appropriate for administration in accordance with a dosing regimen that has been determined to correlate with a desired or beneficial outcome when administered to a relevant population (i.e., with a therapeutic dosing regimen).
Dosing regimen or therapeutic regimen: Those skilled in the art will appreciate that the terms “dosing regimen” and “therapeutic regimen” may be used to refer to a set of unit doses (typically more than one) that are administered individually to a subject, typically separated by periods of time. In some embodiments, a given therapeutic agent has a recommended dosing regimen, which may involve one or more doses. In some embodiments, a dosing regimen comprises a plurality of doses each of which is separated in time from other doses. In some embodiments, individual doses are separated from one another by a time period of the same length; in some embodiments, a dosing regimen comprises a plurality of doses and at least two different time periods separating individual doses. In some embodiments, all doses within a dosing regimen are of the same unit dose amount. In some embodiments, different doses within a dosing regimen are of different amounts. In some embodiments, a dosing regimen comprises a first dose in a first dose amount, followed by one or more additional doses in a second dose amount different from the first dose amount. In some embodiments, a dosing regimen comprises a first dose in a first dose amount, followed by one or more additional doses in a second dose amount same as the first dose amount. In some embodiments, a dosing regimen is correlated with a desired or beneficial outcome when administered across a relevant population (i.e., is a therapeutic dosing regimen).
Excipient: As used herein, the term “excipient” refers to a non-therapeutic agent that may be included in a pharmaceutical composition, for example, to provide or contribute to a desired consistency or stabilizing effect. Suitable pharmaceutical excipients include, for example, starch, glucose, lactose, sucrose, gelatin, malt, rice, flour, chalk, silica gel, sodium stearate, glycerol monostearate, talc, sodium chloride, dried skim milk, glycerol, propylene, glycol, water, ethanol and the like.
Heteroaliphatic. The term “heteroaliphatic” or “heteroaliphatic group”, as used herein, denotes an optionally substituted hydrocarbon moiety having, in addition to carbon atoms, from one to five heteroatoms, that may be straight-chain (i.e., unbranched), branched, or cyclic (“heterocyclic”) and may be completely saturated or may contain one or more units of unsaturation, but which is not aromatic. The term “heteroatom” refers to nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, and includes any oxidized form of nitrogen or sulfur, and any quaternized form of a basic nitrogen. The term “nitrogen” also includes a substituted nitrogen. Unless otherwise specified, heteroaliphatic groups contain 1-10 carbon atoms wherein 1-3 carbon atoms are optionally and independently replaced with heteroatoms selected from oxygen, nitrogen, and sulfur. In some embodiments, heteroaliphatic groups contain 1-4 carbon atoms, wherein 1-2 carbon atoms are optionally and independently replaced with heteroatoms selected from oxygen, nitrogen, and sulfur. In yet other embodiments, heteroaliphatic groups contain 1-3 carbon atoms, wherein 1 carbon atom is optionally and independently replaced with a heteroatom selected from oxygen, nitrogen, and sulfur. Suitable heteroaliphatic groups include, but are not limited to, linear or branched, heteroalkyl, heteroalkenyl, and heteroalkynyl groups. For example, a 1 - to 10 atom heteroaliphatic group includes the following exemplary groups: -O-CH3, -CH2-O-CH3, -O-CH2-CH2-O-CH2-CH2-O-CH3, and the like.
Heteroaryl: The terms “heteroaryl” and “heteroar-”, used alone or as part of a larger moiety, e.g., “heteroaralkyl”, or “heteroaralkoxy”, refer to monocyclic or bicyclic ring groups having 5 to 10 ring atoms (e.g., 5- to 6-membered monocyclic heteroaryl or 9- to 10-membered bicyclic heteroaryl); having 6, 10, or 14 ir-electrons shared in a cyclic array; and having, in addition to carbon atoms, from one to five heteroatoms. Heteroaryl groups include, without limitation, thienyl, furanyl, pyrrolyl, imidazolyl, pyrazolyl, triazolyl, tetrazolyl, oxazolyl, isoxazolyl, oxadiazolyl, thiazolyl, isothiazolyl, thiadiazolyl, pyridyl, pyridazinyl, pyrimidinyl, pyrazinyl, indolizinyl, purinyl, naphthyridinyl, pteridinyl, imidazo[1 ,2-a]pyrimidinyl, imidazo[1 ,2-a]pyridyl, imidazo[4,5-b]pyridyl, imidazo[4,5- c]pyridyl, pyrrolopyridyl, pyrrolopyrazinyl, thienopyrimidinyl, triazolopyridyl, and benzoisoxazolyl. The terms “heteroaryl” and “heteroar-”, as used herein, also include groups in which a heteroaromatic ring is fused to one or more aryl, cycloaliphatic, or heterocyclyl rings, where the radical or point of attachment is on the heteroaromatic ring (i.e., a bicyclic heteroaryl ring having 1 to 3 heteroatoms). Nonlimiting examples include indolyl, isoindolyl, benzothienyl, benzofuranyl, dibenzofuranyl, indazolyl, benzimidazolyl, benzotriazolyl, benzothiazolyl, benzothiadiazolyl, benzoxazolyl, quinolyl, isoquinolyl, cinnolinyl, phthalazinyl, quinazolinyl, quinoxalinyl, 4/7-quinolizinyl, carbazolyl, acridinyl,
phenazinyl, phenothiazinyl, phenoxazinyl, tetrahydroquinolinyl, tetrahydroisoquinolinyl, pyrido[2,3-b]-1 ,4-oxazin-3(4H)-one, 4H-thieno[3,2-b]pyrrole, and benzoisoxazolyl. The term “heteroaryl” may be used interchangeably with the terms “heteroaryl ring”, “heteroaryl group”, or “heteroaromatic”, any of which terms include rings that are optionally substituted.
Heteroatom: The term “heteroatom” as used herein refers to nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, and includes any oxidized form of nitrogen or sulfur, and any quaternized form of a basic nitrogen.
Heterocycle: As used herein, the terms “heterocycle”, “heterocyclyl”, “heterocyclic radical”, and “heterocyclic ring” are used interchangeably and refer to a stable 3- to 8- membered monocyclic, a 6- to 10-membered bicyclic, or a 10- to 16-membered polycyclic heterocyclic moiety that is either saturated or partially unsaturated, and having, in addition to carbon atoms, one or more, such as one to four, heteroatoms, as defined above. When used in reference to a ring atom of a heterocycle, the term "nitrogen" includes a substituted nitrogen. As an example, in a saturated or partially unsaturated ring having 0-3 heteroatoms selected from oxygen, sulfur or nitrogen, the nitrogen may be N (as in 3,4-dihydro-2H-pyrrolyl), NH (as in pyrrolidinyl), or NR+ (as in N-substituted pyrrolidinyl). A heterocyclic ring can be attached to its pendant group at any heteroatom or carbon atom that results in a stable structure and any of the ring atoms can be optionally substituted. Examples of such saturated or partially unsaturated heterocyclic radicals include, without limitation, azetidinyl, oxetanyl, tetrahydrofuranyl, tetrahydrothienyl, pyrrolidinyl, piperidinyl, decahydroquinolinyl, oxazolidinyl, piperazinyl, dioxanyl, dioxolanyl, diazepinyl, oxazepinyl, thiazepinyl, morpholinyl, and thiamorpholinyl. A heterocyclyl group may be mono-, bi-, tri-, or polycyclic, preferably mono-, bi-, or tricyclic, more preferably mono- or bicyclic. A bicyclic heterocyclic ring also includes groups in which the heterocyclic ring is fused to one or more aryl rings. Exemplary bicyclic heterocyclic groups include indolinyl, isoindolinyl, benzodioxolyl, 1 ,3- dihydroisobenzofuranyl, 2,3-dihydrobenzofuranyl, and tetrahydroquinolinyl. A bicyclic heterocyclic ring can also be a spirocyclic ring system (e.g., 7- to 11 -membered spirocyclic fused heterocyclic ring having, in addition to carbon atoms, one or more heteroatoms as defined above (e.g., one, two, three or four heteroatoms)). A bicyclic heterocyclic ring can also be a bridged ring system (e.g., 7- to 11 -membered bridged heterocyclic ring having one, two, or three bridging atoms.
Nanoparticle: As used herein, the term “nanoparticle” refers to a discrete entity of small size, e.g., typically having a longest dimension that is shorter than about 1000
nanometers (nm) and often is shorter than 500 nm, or even 100 nm or less. In many embodiments, a nanoparticle may be characterized by a longest dimension between about 1 nm and about 100 nm, or between about 1 pm and about 500 nm, or between about 1 nm and 1000 nm. In many embodiments, a population of microparticles is characterized by an average size (e.g., longest dimension) that is below about 1000 nm, about 500 nm, about 100 nm, about 50 nm, about 40 nm, about 30 nm, about 20 nm, or about 10 nm and often above about 1 nm. In many embodiments, a microparticle may be substantially spherical (e.g., so that its longest dimension may be its diameter). In some embodiments, a nanoparticle has a diameter of less than 100 nm as defined by the National Institutes of Health. In some embodiments, nanoparticles are micelles in that they comprise an enclosed compartment, separated from the bulk solution by a micellar membrane, typically comprised of amphiphilic entities which surround and enclose a space or compartment (e.g., to define a lumen). In some embodiments, a micellar membrane is comprised of at least one polymer, such as for example a biocompatible and/or biodegradable polymer.
Nucleic acid/ Polynucleotide: As used herein, the term “nucleic acid” refers to a polymer of at least 10 nucleotides or more. In some embodiments, a nucleic acid is or comprises DNA. In some embodiments, a nucleic acid is or comprises RNA. In some embodiments, a nucleic acid is or comprises a mixture of DNA and RNA. In some embodiments, a nucleic acid is or comprises peptide nucleic acid (PNA). In some embodiments, a nucleic acid is or comprises a single stranded nucleic acid. In some embodiments, a nucleic acid is or comprises a double-stranded nucleic acid. In some embodiments, a nucleic acid comprises both single and double-stranded portions. In some embodiments, a nucleic acid comprises a backbone that comprises one or more phosphodiester linkages. In some embodiments, a nucleic acid comprises a backbone that comprises both phosphodiester and non-phosphodiester linkages. For example, in some embodiments, a nucleic acid may comprise a backbone that comprises one or more phosphorothioate, phosphorodithioate, phosphoramide, phosphite-borane complexes, or 5'-N-phosphoramidite linkages and/or one or more peptide bonds, e.g., as in a “peptide nucleic acid”. In some embodiments, a nucleic acid comprises one or more, or all, natural residues (e.g., adenine, cytosine, deoxyadenosine, deoxycytidine, deoxyguanosine, deoxythymidine, guanine, thymine, uracil). In some embodiments, a nucleic acid comprises on or more, or all, non-natural residues. In some embodiments, a non-natural residue comprises a nucleoside analog (e.g., 2-aminoadenosine, 2- thiothymidine, inosine, pyrrolo-pyrimidine, 3 -methyl adenosine, 5-methylcytidine, C-5
propynyl-cytidine, C-5 propynyl-uridine, 2-aminoadenosine, C5-bromouridine, C5- fluorouridine, C5-iodouridine, C5-propynyl-uridine, C5 -propynyl-cytidine, C5- methylcytidine, 2-aminoadenosine, 7-deazaadenosine, 7-deazaguanosine, 8- oxoadenosine, 8-oxoguanosine, 6-O-methylguanine, 2-thiocytidine, methylated bases, intercalated bases, and combinations thereof). In some embodiments, a non-natural residue comprises one or more modified sugars (e.g., 2'-fluororibose, ribose, 2'- deoxyribose, arabinose, and hexose) as compared to those in natural residues. In some embodiments, a nucleic acid has a nucleotide sequence that encodes a functional gene product such as an RNA or polypeptide. In some embodiments, a nucleic acid has a nucleotide sequence that comprises one or more introns. In some embodiments, a nucleic acid may be prepared by isolation from a natural source, enzymatic synthesis (e.g., by polymerization based on a complementary template, e.g., in vivo or in vitro, reproduction in a recombinant cell or system, or chemical synthesis. In some embodiments, a nucleic acid is at least 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60, 65, 70, 75, 80, 85, 90, 95, 100, 110, 120, 130, 140, 150, 160, 170, 180, 190, 20, 225, 250, 275, 300, 325, 350, 375, 400, 425, 450, 475, 500, 600, 700, 800, 900, 1000, 1500, 2000, 2500, 3000, 3500, 4000, 4500, 5000, 5500, 6000, 6500, 7000, 7500, 8000, 8500, 9000, 9500, 10,000, 10,500, 11 ,000, 11 ,500, 12,000, 12,500, 13,000,
13.500, 14,000, 14,500, 15,000, 15,500, 16,000, 16,500, 17,000, 17,500, 18,000,
18.500, 19,000, 19,500, or 20,000 or more residues or nucleotides long.
Nucleic acid particle: A “nucleic acid particle” can be used to deliver nucleic acid to a target site of interest (e.g., cell, tissue, organ, and the like). A nucleic acid particle may be formed from at least one cationic or cationically ionizable lipid or lipid-like material, at least one cationic polymer such as protamine, or a mixture thereof and nucleic acid. Nucleic acid particles include lipid nanoparticle (LNP)-based and lipoplex (LPX)-based formulations.
Nucleotide: As used herein, the term “nucleotide” refers to its art-recognized meaning. When a number of nucleotides is used as an indication of size, e.g., of a polynucleotide, a certain number of nucleotides refers to the number of nucleotides on a single strand, e.g., of a polynucleotide.
Parenteral: The phrases “parenteral administration” and “administered parenterally” as used herein have their art-understood meaning referring to modes of administration other than enteral and topical administration, usually by injection, and include, without limitation, intravenous, intramuscular, intra-arterial, intrathecal, intracapsular, intraorbital, intracardiac, intradermal, intraperitoneal, transtracheal, subcutaneous,
subcuticular, intraarticulare, subcapsular, subarachnoid, intraspinal, and intrasternal injection and infusion.
Partially unsaturated: As used herein, the term “partially unsaturated” refers to a ring moiety that includes at least one double or triple bond between ring atoms. The term “partially unsaturated” is intended to encompass rings having multiple sites of unsaturation, but is not intended to include aromatic (e.g., aryl or heteroaryl) moieties, as herein defined.
Patient or subject: As used herein, the term “patient” or “subject” refers to any organism to which a provided composition is or may be administered, e.g., for experimental, diagnostic, prophylactic, cosmetic, and/or therapeutic purposes. Typical patients or subjects include animals (e.g., mammals such as mice, rats, rabbits, non-human primates, and/or humans). In some embodiments, a patient is a human. In some embodiments, a patient or a subject is suffering from or susceptible to one or more disorders or conditions. In some embodiments, a patient or subject displays one or more symptoms of a disorder or condition. In some embodiments, a patient or subject has been diagnosed with one or more disorders or conditions. In some embodiments, a patient or a subject is receiving or has received certain therapy to diagnose and/or to treat a disease, disorder, or condition.
Pharmaceutical composition: As used herein, the term “pharmaceutical composition” refers to an active agent, formulated together with one or more pharmaceutically acceptable carriers. In some embodiments, the active agent is present in unit dose amount appropriate for administration in a therapeutic or dosing regimen that shows a statistically significant probability of achieving a predetermined therapeutic effect when administered to a relevant population. In some embodiments, pharmaceutical compositions may be specially formulated for administration in solid or liquid form, including those adapted for the following: oral administration, for example, drenches (aqueous or non-aqueous solutions or suspensions), tablets, e.g., those targeted for buccal, sublingual, and systemic absorption, boluses, powders, granules, pastes for application to the tongue; parenteral administration, for example, by subcutaneous, intramuscular, intravenous or epidural injection as, for example, a sterile solution or suspension, or sustained-release formulation; topical application, for example, as a cream, ointment, or a controlled-release patch or spray applied to the skin, lungs, or oral cavity; intravaginally or intrarectally, for example, as a pessary, cream, or foam; sublingually; ocularly; transdermally; or nasally, pulmonary, and to other mucosal surfaces.
Pharmaceutically acceptable: As used herein, the phrase “pharmaceutically acceptable” refers to those compounds, materials, compositions, and/or dosage forms which are, within the scope of sound medical judgment, suitable for use in contact with the tissues of human beings and animals without excessive toxicity, irritation, allergic response, or other problem or complication, commensurate with a reasonable benefit/risk ratio.
Pharmaceutically acceptable salt: The term “pharmaceutically acceptable salt”, as used herein, refers to salts of such compounds that are appropriate for use in pharmaceutical contexts, i.e., salts which are, within the scope of sound medical judgment, suitable for use in contact with the tissues of humans and lower animals without undue toxicity, irritation, allergic response and the like, and are commensurate with a reasonable benefit/risk ratio. Pharmaceutically acceptable salts are well known in the art. For example, S. M. Berge, et al. describes pharmaceutically acceptable salts in detail in J. Pharmaceutical Sciences, 66: 1-19 (1977).
Physiological conditions: as used herein, has its art-understood meaning referencing conditions under which cells or organisms live and/or reproduce. In some embodiments, the term refers to conditions of the external or internal mileu that may occur in nature for an organism or cell system. In some embodiments, physiological conditions are those conditions present within the body of a human or non-human animal, especially those conditions present at and/or within a surgical site. Physiological conditions typically include, e.g., a temperature range of 20 - 40°C, atmospheric pressure of 1 , pH of 6-8, glucose concentration of 1 -20 mM, oxygen concentration at atmospheric levels, and gravity as it is encountered on earth. In some embodiments, conditions in a laboratory are manipulated and/or maintained at physiologic conditions. In some embodiments, physiological conditions are encountered in an organism.
Polycyclic: As used herein, the term “polycyclic” refers to a saturated or unsaturated ring system having two or more rings (for example, heterocyclyl rings, heteroaryl rings, cycloalkyl rings, or aryl rings), having between 7 and 20 atoms, in which one or more carbon atoms are common to two adjacent rings. For example, in some embodiments, a polycyclic ring system refers to a saturated or unsaturated ring system having three or more rings (for example, heterocyclyl rings, heteroaryl rings, cycloalkyl rings, or aryl rings), having between 14 and 20 atoms, in which one or more carbon atoms are common to two adjacent rings. The rings in a polycyclic ring system may be fused (i.e., bicyclic or tricyclic), spirocyclic, or a combination thereof. An example polycyclic ring is a steroid.
Polypeptide The term “polypeptide” or “peptide”, as used herein, typically has its art- recognized meaning of a polymer of at least three amino acids or more. Those of ordinary skill in the art will appreciate that the term “polypeptide” is intended to be sufficiently general as to encompass not only polypeptides having a complete sequence recited herein, but also to encompass polypeptides that represent functional, biologically active, or characteristic fragments, portions or domains (e.g., fragments, portions, or domains retaining at least one activity) of such complete polypeptides. In some embodiments, polypeptides may contain L-amino acids, D-amino acids, or both and/or may contain any of a variety of amino acid modifications or analogs known in the art. Useful modifications include, e.g., terminal acetylation, amidation, methylation, etc. In some embodiments, polypeptides may comprise natural amino acids, non-natural amino acids, synthetic amino acids, and combinations thereof (e.g., may be or comprise peptidomimetics).
Reference: As used herein describes a standard or control relative to which a comparison is performed. For example, in some embodiments, an agent, animal, individual, population, sample, sequence or value of interest is compared with a reference or control agent, animal, individual, population, sample, sequence or value. In some embodiments, a reference or control is tested and/or determined substantially simultaneously with the testing or determination of interest. In some embodiments, a reference or control is a historical reference or control, optionally embodied in a tangible medium. Typically, as would be understood by those skilled in the art, a reference or control is determined or characterized under comparable conditions or circumstances to those under assessment. Those skilled in the art will appreciate when sufficient similarities are present to justify reliance on and/or comparison to a particular possible reference or control.
Ribonucleotide: As used herein, the term “ribonucleotide” encompasses unmodified ribonucleotides and modified ribonucleotides. For example, unmodified ribonucleotides include the purine bases adenine (A) and guanine (G), and the pyrimidine bases cytosine (C) and uracil (U). Modified ribonucleotides may include one or more modifications including, but not limited to, for example, (a) end modifications, e.g., 5' end modifications (e.g., phosphorylation, dephosphorylation, conjugation, inverted linkages, etc.), 3' end modifications (e.g., conjugation, inverted linkages, etc.), (b) base modifications, e.g. , replacement with modified bases, stabilizing bases, destabilizing bases, or bases that base pair with an expanded repertoire of partners, or conjugated bases, (c) sugar modifications (e.g., at the 2' position or 4' position) or replacement of the sugar, and (d) internucleoside linkage modifications, including modification or replacement of the
phosphodiester linkages. The term “ribonucleotide” also encompasses ribonucleotide triphosphates including modified and non-modified ribonucleotide triphosphates.
Ribonucleic acid (RNA): As used herein, the term “RNA” refers to a polymer of ribonucleotides. In some embodiments, an RNA is single stranded. In some embodiments, an RNA is double stranded. In some embodiments, an RNA comprises both single and double stranded portions. In some embodiments, an RNA can comprise a backbone structure as described in the definition of “Nucleic acid / Polynucleotide" above. An RNA can be a regulatory RNA (e.g., siRNA, microRNA, etc.), or a messenger RNA (mRNA). In some embodiments where an RNA is a mRNA. In some embodiments where an RNA is a mRNA, a RNA typically comprises at its 3’ end a poly(A) region. In some embodiments where an RNA is a mRNA, an RNA typically comprises at its 5’ end an art-recognized cap structure, e.g., for recognizing and attachment of a mRNA to a ribosome to initiate translation. In some embodiments, a RNA is a synthetic RNA. Synthetic RNAs include RNAs that are synthesized in vitro (e.g., by enzymatic synthesis methods and/or by chemical synthesis methods).
Substituted or optionally substituted: As described herein, compounds of the invention may contain “optionally substituted” moieties. In general, the term
“substituted,” whether preceded by the term “optionally” or not, means that one or more hydrogens of the designated moiety are replaced with a suitable substituent.
“optionally substituted” group may have a suitable substituent at each substitutable position of the group, and when more than one position in any given structure may be substituted with more than one substituent selected from a specified group, the substituent may be either the same or different at every position. Combinations of substituents envisioned by this invention are preferably those that result in the formation of stable or chemically feasible compounds. The term “stable,” as used herein, refers to compounds that are not substantially altered when subjected to conditions to allow for their production, detection, and, in certain embodiments, their recovery, purification, and
use for one or more of the purposes provided herein. Groups described as being “substituted” preferably have between 1 and 4 substituents, more preferably 1 or 2 substituents. Groups described as being “optionally substituted” may be unsubstituted or be “substituted” as described above.
Suitable monovalent substituents on a substitutable carbon atom of an “optionally substituted” group are independently halogen; -(CH2)o-4R°; -(CH2)o-40R°; -O(CH2)04R°, -0-(CH2)O 4C(O)OR°; -(CH2)O-4CH(OR°)2; -(CH2)O_4SR0; -(CH2)O 4Ph, which may be substituted with R°; -(CH2)o-40(CH2)o-iPh which may be substituted with R°; - CH=CHPh, which may be substituted with R°; -(CH2)O-40(CH2)O-I -pyridyl which may be substituted with R°; -NO2; -ON; -N3; -(CH2)0 4N(R°)2; -(CH2)0 4N(R°)C(O)R0; - N(R°)C(S)R°; -(CH2)O 4N(R0)C(0)NR0 2; -N(RO)C(S)NR°2; -(CH2)0-4N(RO)C(O)ORO; - N(R°)N(R°)C(O)R0; -N(R°)N(R°)C(O)NRO 2; -N(R°)N(R°)C(O)OR0; -(CH2)0-4C(O)R°; C(S)R°; -(CH2)O-4C(0)OR°; -(CH2)O_4C(0)SR0; -(CH2)O 4C(O)OSiR°3; -(CH2)^ 4OC(O)R°; -OC(0)(CH2)O 4SRO; -(CH2)O 4SC(O)RO; -(CH2)O_4C(0)NR0 2; -C(S)NRO 2; - C(S)SR°; -SC(S)SR°, -(CH2)o_4OC(0)NR0 2; -C(O)N(OR°)R°; -C(O)C(O)R°; - C(O)CH2C(O)R°; -C(NOR°)R°; -(CH2)O_4SSR0; -(CH2)O-4S(0)2R°; -(CH2)O 4S(O)2ORO; - (CH2)O-40S(0)2R°; -S(O)2NRO 2; -(CH2)O_4S(0)R0; -N(RO)S(O)2NR°2; -N(RO)S(O)2R°; - N(OR°)R°; -C(NH)NR°2; -P(O)2RO; -P(O)RO 2; -OP(O)RO 2; -OP(O)(ORO)2; SiR°3; -(Ci-4 straight or branched alkylene)O-N(R°)2; or -(C1-4 straight or branched alkylene)C(O)O- N(R°)2, wherein each R° may be substituted as defined below and is independently hydrogen, C1-6 aliphatic, -CH2Ph, -O(CH2)0-iPh, -CH2-(5- to 6-membered heteroaryl ring), or a 3- to 6-membered saturated, partially unsaturated, or aryl ring having 0-4 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, or, notwithstanding the definition above, two independent occurrences of R°, taken together with their intervening atom(s), form a 3- to 12-membered saturated, partially unsaturated, or aryl mono- or bicyclic ring having 0-4 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, which may be substituted as defined below.
Suitable monovalent substituents on R° (or the ring formed by taking two independent occurrences of R° together with their intervening atoms), are independently halogen, -
OSiR*3, -C(O)SR* -(C1-4 straight or branched alkylene)C(O)OR*, or -SSR* wherein each R* is unsubstituted or where preceded by “halo” is substituted only with one or
more halogens, and is independently selected from C1-4 aliphatic, -CH2Ph, -0(CH2)o- iPh, or a 3- to 6-membered saturated, partially unsaturated, or aryl ring having 0-4 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur. Suitable divalent substituents on a saturated carbon atom of R° include =0 and =S.
Suitable divalent substituents on a saturated carbon atom of an “optionally substituted” group include the following: =0 (“oxo”), =S, =NNR*2, =NNHC(O)R*, =NNHC(O)OR*, =NNHS(O)2R*, =NR*, =NOR*, -O(C(R*2))2-3O-, or -S(C(R*2))2-3S-, wherein each independent occurrence of R* is selected from hydrogen, C1-6 aliphatic which may be substituted as defined below, or an unsubstituted 5- to 6-membered saturated, partially unsaturated, or aryl ring having 0-4 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur. Suitable divalent substituents that are bound to vicinal substitutable carbons of an “optionally substituted” group include: -O(CR*2)2-3O-, wherein each independent occurrence of R* is selected from hydrogen, C1-6 aliphatic which may be substituted as defined below, or an unsubstituted 5-6-membered saturated, partially unsaturated, or aryl ring having 0-4 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur.
Suitable substituents on the aliphatic group of R* include halogen, -R*, -(haloR*), -OH, -OR*, -O(haloR’), -CN, -C(O)OH, -C(O)OR*, -NH2, -NHR*, -NR*2, or -NO2, wherein each R* is unsubstituted or where preceded by “halo” is substituted only with one or more halogens, and is independently C1-4 aliphatic, -CH2Ph, -O(CH2)0-I Ph, or a 3- to 6- membered saturated, partially unsaturated, or aryl ring having 0-4 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur.
Suitable substituents on a substitutable nitrogen of an “optionally substituted” group
wherein each Rf is independently hydrogen, C1-6 aliphatic which may be substituted as defined below, unsubstituted -OPh, or an unsubstituted 3- to 6-membered saturated, partially unsaturated, or aryl ring having 0-4 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, or, notwithstanding the definition above, two independent occurrences of Rf, taken together with their intervening atom(s) form an unsubstituted 3- to 12-membered saturated, partially unsaturated, or aryl mono- or bicyclic ring having 0- 4 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur.
Suitable substituents on the aliphatic group of Rf are independently halogen, - R*, -(haloR*), -OH, -OR*, -O(haloR*), -CN, -C(O)OH, -C(O)OR*, -NH2, -NHR*, - NR*2, or -NO2, wherein each R* is unsubstituted or where preceded by “halo” is
substituted only with one or more halogens, and is independently C1-4 aliphatic, -CH2Ph, -0(CH2)O-I Ph, or a 3- to 6-membered saturated, partially unsaturated, or aryl ring having 0-4 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur.
Small molecule: As used herein, the term “small molecule” means a low molecular weight organic and/or inorganic compound. In general, a “small molecule” is a molecule that is less than about 5 kilodaltons (kD) in size. In some embodiments, a small molecule is less than about 4 kD, 3 kD, about 2 kD, or about 1 kD. In some embodiments, the small molecule is less than about 800 daltons (D), about 600 D, about 500 D, about 400 D, about 300 D, about 200 D, or about 100 D. In some embodiments, a small molecule is less than about 2000 g/mol, less than about 1500 g/mol, less than about 1000 g/mol, less than about 800 g/mol, or less than about 500 g/mol. In some embodiments, a small molecule is not a polymer.
In some embodiments, a small molecule does not include a polymeric moiety. In some embodiments, a small molecule is not and/or does not comprise a protein or polypeptide (e.g., is not an oligopeptide or peptide). In some embodiments, a small molecule is not and/or does not comprise a polynucleotide (e.g., is not an oligonucleotide). In some embodiments, a small molecule is not and/or does not comprise a polysaccharide; for example, in some embodiments, a small molecule is not a glycoprotein, proteoglycan, glycolipid, etc.). In some embodiments, a small molecule is not a lipid.
In some embodiments, a small molecule is a modulating agent (e.g., is an inhibiting agent or an activating agent). In some embodiments, a small molecule is biologically active. In some embodiments, a small molecule is detectable (e.g., comprises at least one detectable moiety). In some embodiments, a small molecule is a therapeutic agent.
Those of ordinary skill in the art, reading the present disclosure, will appreciate that certain small molecule compounds described herein may be provided and/or utilized in any of a variety of forms such as, for example, crystal forms (e.g., polymorphs, solvates, etc), salt forms, protected forms, pro-drug forms, ester forms, isomeric forms (e.g., optical and/or structural isomers), isotopic forms, etc.
Those of ordinary skill in the art will appreciate that certain small molecule compounds have structures that can exist in one or more steroisomeric forms. In some embodiments, such a small molecule may be utilized in accordance with the present disclosure in the form of an individual enantiomer, diastereomer or geometric isomer, or may be in the form of a mixture of stereoisomers; in some embodiments, such a small molecule may be utilized in accordance with the present disclosure in a racemic mixture form.
Those of skill in the art will appreciate that certain small molecule compounds have structures that can exist in one or more tautomeric forms. In some embodiments, such a small molecule may be utilized in accordance with the present disclosure in the form of an individual tautomer, or in a form that interconverts between tautomeric forms.
Those of skill in the art will appreciate that certain small molecule compounds have structures that permit isotopic substitution (e.g., 2H or 3H for H; 11C, 13C or 14C for 12C; 13N or 15N for 14N; 17O or 18O for 16O; 36CI for 35CI or 37CI; 18F for 19F; 131 l for 127l; etc.). In some embodiments, such a small molecule may be utilized in accordance with the present disclosure in one or more isotopically modified forms, or mixtures thereof.
In some embodiments, reference to a particular small molecule compound may relate to a specific form of that compound. In some embodiments, a particular small molecule compound may be provided and/or utilized in a salt form (e.g., in an acid-addition or base-addition salt form, depending on the compound); in some such embodiments, the salt form may be a pharmaceutically acceptable salt form.
In some embodiments, where a small molecule compound is one that exists or is found in nature, that compound may be provided and/or utilized in accordance in the present disclosure in a form different from that in which it exists or is found in nature. Those of ordinary skill in the art will appreciate that, in some embodiments, a preparation of a particular small molecule compound that contains an absolute or relative amount of the compound, or of a particular form thereof, that is different from the absolute or relative (with respect to another component of the preparation including, for example, another form of the compound) amount of the compound or form that is present in a reference preparation of interest (e.g., in a primary sample from a source of interest such as a biological or environmental source) is distinct from the compound as it exists in the reference preparation or source. Thus, in some embodiments, for example, a preparation of a single stereoisomer of a small molecule compound may be considered to be a different form of the compound than a racemic mixture of the compound; a particular salt of a small molecule compound may be considered to be a different form from another salt form of the compound; a preparation that contains only a form of the compound that contains one conformational isomer ((Z) or (E)) of a double bond may be considered to be a different form of the compound from one that contains the other conformational isomer ((E) or (Z)) of the double bond; a preparation in which one or more atoms is a different isotope than is present in a reference preparation may be considered to be a different form; etc.
Those skilled in the art will further appreciate that, in small molecule structures, the symbol , as used herein, refers to a point of attachment between two atoms. Additionally or alternatively, the symbol refers to a point of attachment ring in a spirocyclic manner.
Treat: As used herein, the terms “treat,” “treatment,” or “treating” refer to any method used to partially or completely alleviate, ameliorate, relieve, inhibit, prevent, delay onset of, reduce severity of, and/or reduce incidence of one or more symptoms or features of a disease, disorder, and/or condition. Treatment may be administered to a subject who does not exhibit signs of a disease, disorder, and/or condition. In some embodiments, treatment may be administered to a subject who exhibits only early signs of the disease, disorder, and/or condition, for example, for the purpose of decreasing the risk of developing pathology associated with the disease, disorder, and/or condition.
Ionizable Thiolipid Compounds
The present disclosure provides, among other things, cationic or ionizable thiolipid compounds useful for forming particles comprising nucleic acids. As described herein, in some embodiments, the present disclosure provides a compound represented by formula I:
I or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein:
L1 and L2 are each independently an optionally substituted C1-C30 aliphatic group;
L3 is a bond, optionally substituted C1-C10 aliphatic group, or optionally substituted 2- to 10-membered heteroaliphatic group;
X1 and X2 are each independently selected from a bond, -OC(O)-, -C(O)O-, -S(O)2N(R1)- , -N(R1)S(O)2, -S(O)-, -S(O)2-, -S(O)2C(R1)2-, -OC(S)C(R1)2-, -C(R1)2C(S)O-, and -S-, wherein one or both of X1 or X2 is selected from -S(O)2N(R1)-, -N(R1)S(O)2, -S(O)-, - S(O)2-, -S(O)2C(R1)2-, -OC(S)C(R1)2-, -C(R1)2C(S)O-, and -S-; each R1 is, independently, at each instance, optionally substituted Ci-C2o aliphatic or H; T1 and T2 are each independently an optionally substituted C3-C30 aliphatic;
G is -N(R2)C(S)N(R2)2, -OH, -N(R2)2, , -N+(R3)3, -N(R5)C(O)R3, -N(R5)S(O)2R3, - N(R5)C(O)N(R3)2, -CH(N-R2), or -R4;
each R2 is, independently, at each instance, selected from the group consisting of H, optionally substituted Ci-Ce aliphatic and OR3; or two instances of R2 come together with the atoms to which they are attached to form an optionally substituted 4- to 12-membered heterocycle ring or an optionally substituted 4- to 12-membered heteroaryl ring; each R3 is, independently, at each instance, selected from the group consisting of H and optionally substituted C1-C10 aliphatic; and
R4 is optionally substituted 4- to 12-membered heterocycle, optionally substituted 4- to 12 membered heteroaryl, C6-C12 aryl substituted with one or more of -(CH2)o e-OH or - (CH2)O-6-N(R5)2, or C3-C12 cycloaliphatic substituted with one or more of oxo, -(CH2)0-6- OH, or -(CH2)o-6-N(R5)2; each R5 is independently selected from H and optionally substituted Ci-Ce aliphatic.
As described herein, L1 and L2 are each independently an optionally substituted C1-C30 aliphatic group. In some embodiments, L1 is optionally substituted C1-C30 aliphatic. In some embodiments, L1 is C1-C10 aliphatic. In some embodiments, L1 is optionally substituted C1-C30 alkylene. In some embodiments, L1 is optionally substituted C1-C30 alkenylene. In some embodiments, L1 is C1-C10 alkylene. In some embodiments, L1 is — (CH2)I io-- In some embodiments, L2 is optionally substituted C1-C30 aliphatic. In some embodiments, L2 is C1-C10 aliphatic. In some embodiments, L2 is optionally substituted C1-C30 alkylene. In some embodiments, L2 is optionally substituted C1-C30 alkenylene. In some embodiments, L2 is C1-C10 alkylene. In some embodiments, L2 is -(CH2)I-IO-. In some embodiments, L1 is -(CH2)e-, and L2 is -(CH2)s-. In some embodiments, L1 and L2 are each C1-C30 alkylene. In some embodiments, L1 and L2 are each -(CH2)6 -w- In some embodiments, L1 and L2 are each -(CH2)e-. In some embodiments, L1 and L2 are each -(CH2)7-. In some embodiments, L1 and L2 are each -(CH2)s-. In some embodiments, L1 and L2 are each -(CH2)9-.
In some embodiments, L1 and L2 are the same. In some embodiments, L1 and L2 are different.
As described herein, X1 and X2 are each independently selected from a bond, -OC(O)-, -C(O)O-, -S(O)2N(R1)-, -N(R1)S(O)2, -S(O)-, -S(O)2-, -S(O)2C(R1)2-, -OC(S)C(R1)2-, - C(R1)2C(S)O-, and -S-, wherein one or both of X1 or X2 is selected from -S(O)2N(R1)-, - N(R1)S(O)2, -S(O)-, -S(O)2-, -S(O)2C(R1)2-, -OC(S)C(R1)2-, -C(R1)2C(S)O-, and -S-. In some embodiments, one of X1 and X2 is a bond, -OC(O)-, -C(O)O-, -S(O)2N(R1)-, - N(R1)S(O)2, -S(O)-, -S(O)2-, -S(O)2C(R1)2-, -OC(S)C(R1)2-, -C(R1)2C(S)O-, or -S-, and the other of X1 and X2 is -S(O)2N(R1)-, -N(R1)S(O)2, -S(O)-, -S(O)2-, -S(O)2C(R1)2-, - OC(S)C(R1)2-, -C(R1)2C(S)O-, or -S-. In some embodiments, X1 and X2 are each
As described herein, T1 and T2 are each independently an optionally substituted C3-C30 aliphatic. In some embodiments, T1 is C3-C30 aliphatic. In some embodiments, T1 is optionally substituted C3-C30 alkyl. In some embodiments, T1 is optionally substituted C3- C20 alkyl. In some embodiments, T1 is optionally substituted C5-C20 alkyl. In some embodiments, T1 is optionally substituted straight-chained C3-C20 alkyl. In some embodiments, T1 is optionally substituted branched C3-C20 alkyl. In some embodiments, T1 is optionally substituted C3-C20 alkenyl. In some embodiments, T1 is optionally substituted C10-C20 alkenyl. In some embodiments, T2 is C3-C30 aliphatic. In some embodiments, T2 is optionally substituted C3-C30 alkyl. In some embodiments, T2 is optionally substituted C3-C20 alkyl. In some embodiments, T2 is optionally substituted C5- C20 alkyl. In some embodiments, T2 is optionally substituted straight chained C3-C20 alkyl. In some embodiments, T2 is optionally substituted branched C3-C20 alkyl. In some embodiments, T2 is optionally substituted C3-C20 alkenyl. In some embodiments, T1 is optionally substituted C10-C20 alkenyl. In some embodiments, T1 and T2 are the same. In some embodiments, T1 and T2 are different.
As described herein, L3 is a bond, optionally substituted C1-C10 aliphatic group, or optionally substituted 2- to 10-membered heteroaliphatic group. In some embodiments, L3 is a bond. In some embodiments L3 is optionally substituted C1-C10 aliphatic group,
or optionally substituted 2- to 10-membered heteroaliphatic group. In some embodiments, L3 is optionally substituted C1-C10 aliphatic. In some embodiments, L3 is optionally substituted C1-C10 alkylene. In some embodiments, L3 is optionally substituted C1-C10 alkenylene. In some embodiments, L3 is optionally substituted alkynylene. In some embodiments, L3 is Ci-Ce alkylene. In some embodiments, L3 is -(CH2)I 6-- In some embodiments, L3 is -(CH2)2-4-. In some embodiments, L3 is -(CH2)2-. In some embodiments, L3 is -(CH2)3-. In some embodiments, L3 is -(CH2)4-. In some embodiments, L3 is -(CH2)5-. In some embodiments, L3 is
In some embodiments, L3 is optionally substituted 2- to 2-membered heteroaliphatic. In some embodiments L3 is:
As de
N(R5)S(O)2R3, -N(R5)C(O)N(R3)2, -CH(N-R2), or -R4. In some embodiments, G is G is - N(R2)C(S)N(R2)2, -OH, -N(R2)2, -N(R5)C(O)R3, -N(R5)S(O)2R3, -N(R5)C(O)N(R3)2, -CH(N- R2), or -R4.
In some embodiments, G is -N(R2)C(S)N(R2)2. In some embodiments, G is - N(H)C(S)N(R2)2. In some embodiments, G is -N(H)C(S)N(H)(R2). In some embodiments, G is -N(CH3)C(S)N(R2)2. In some embodiments, G is -N(OH)C(S)N(R2)2.
In some embodiments, G is -N(H)C(S)N(R2)2, where each R2 is selected from optionally substituted Ci-Ce aliphatic and OH. In some embodiments, G is -N(H)C(S)N(OH)(R2), where R2 is optionally substituted Ci-Ce aliphatic. In some embodiments, G is - N(H)C(S)N(R2)2, where each R2 is selected from optionally substituted Ci-Ce aliphatic. In some embodiments, G is -N(H)C(S)N(R2)2, where each R2 is methyl, ethyl, propyl, or butyl. In some embodiments, G is -N(H)C(S)N(CH3)2. In some embodiments, G is - N(H)C(S)N(CH3)(OCH3). In some embodiments, G is -N(H)C(S)N(CH3)(OH). In some embodiments, G is -N(OH)C(S)N(CH3)2.
In some embodiments, G is -N(H)C(S)N(R2)2, where two instances of R2 come together with the atoms to which they are attached to form an optionally substituted 4- to 12- membered heterocycle ring or an optionally substituted 4- to 12-membered heteroaryl ring. In some embodiments, G is -N(H)C(S)N(R2)2, where two instances of R2 come together with the atoms to which they are attached to form an optionally substituted 4- to
12-membered heterocycle ring. In some embodiments, G is -N(H)C(S)N(R2)2, where two instances of R2 come together with the atoms to which they are attached to form an optionally substituted azetidine, pyrrolidine, piperdine, piperazine, or azepane ring. In some embodiments, G is - N(R2)C(S)N(H)(R2), where two instances of R2 come together with the atoms to which they are attached to form an optionally substituted 4- to 12- membered heterocycle ring. In some embodiments G is:
In some embodiments, G is -OH.
In some embodiments, G is -N(R2)2. In some embodiments, G is -N(R2)2, wherein each R2 is independently H or optionally substituted Ci-Ce aliphatic. In some embodiments, G is -N(R2)2, wherein each R2 is optionally substituted Ci-Ce aliphatic. In some embodiments, G is-N(R2)2, wherein each R2 is independently methyl, ethyl, propyl, butyl, pentyl, or hexyl. In some embodiments, G is -N(CH3)2.
In some embodiments, G is -N+(R3)2. It is understood that when G is -N+(R3)2, G is paired with a suitable counterion, such as halogen (e.g., Cl , F , Br , or I j to provide a chemically stable compound at neutral or physiological pH. In some embodiments, G is -N+(CH3)3.
In some embodiments, G is -N(R5)C(O)R3. In some embodiments G is -N(H)C(O)R3. In some embodiments, G is -N(H)C(O)-Ci-Ce aliphatic. In some embodiments, G is - N(H)C(O)-CH3.
In some embodiments, G is -N(R5)S(O)2R3. In some embodiments, G is -N(H)S(O)2R3. In some embodiments, G is -N(H)S(O)2-Ci-Ce aliphatic. In some embodiments, G is - N(H)S(O)2-CH3.
In some embodiments, G is -N(R5)C(O)N(R3)2. In some embodiments, G is - N(H)C(O)N(R3)2. In some embodiments, G is -N(H)C(O)N(H)(R3). G is - N(H)C(O)N(H)(CH3). G is -N(H)C(O)N(CH3)2.
In some embodiments, G is -CH(N-R2). In some embodiments, G is -CH(N-Ci-Ce aliphatic). In some embodiments, G is -CH(N-CH3).
In some embodiments, G is R4, and R4 is optionally substituted 4- to 12-membered heterocycle. In some embodiments, G is optionally substituted 4- to 6-membered monocyclic heterocycle. In some embodiments, G is optionally substituted azetidine, pyrrolidine, piperidine, piperazine, or azepane. In some embodiments, G is 6- to 12- membered bicyclic heterocycle. In some embodiments, G is 4- to 12-membered
31 heterocycle optionally substituted with -(CH2)o-4N(R°)2 or -(CH2)o-40R°, and where R° is hydrogen or Ci-Ce aliphatic.
In some embodiments, G is R4 and R4 is optionally substituted 5- to 12-membered heteroaryl. In some embodiments, G is optionally substituted 5- to 6-membered monocyclic heteroaryl. In some embodiments, G is optionally substituted pyrrole, imidazole, pyrazole, thiazole, oxazole, or furan. In some embodiments, G is 6- to 12- membered bicyclic heteroaryl. In some embodiments, G is 5- to 12-membered heteroaryl optionally substituted with -(CH2)0-4SR°, and where R° is hydrogen or Ci- Ce aliphatic. In some embodiments, G is
In some embodiments, G is R4, where R4 is Ce-Ci2 aryl substituted with one or more of -(CH2)O-6-OH or -(CH2)O 6-N(R5)2. In some embodiments, G is phenyl substituted one or more of -(CH2)0-6-OH or -(CH2)0-6-N(R5)2.
In some embodiments, G is R4, where R4 Cs-Ci2 cycloaliphatic substituted one or more of oxo, -(CH2)O-6-OH or-(CH2)o 6-N(R5)2. In some embodiments, G is C3-C6 cycloaliphatic substituted with one or more of oxo, -(CH2)oe-OH, or -(CH2)oe-N(R5)2. In some embodiments, G is cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, or cyclohexyl optionally substituted with one or more of oxo, -OH, or -N(R5)2.
It is to be understood that a moiety -L3-G can be a cationic or ionizable group, such that particular atoms, e.g., nitrogen atoms, in the moiety -L3-G can have a positive charge at either neutral pH or at physiological pH. In some embodiments, such a head group further comprises a suitable counterion (e.g., a halogen atom, such as Cl , Br , I , F , and the like).
As described herein, each R2 is, independently, at each instance, selected from the group consisting of H, optionally substituted Ci-Ce aliphatic and OR3; or two instances of R2 come together with the atoms to which they are attached to form an optionally substituted 4- to 12-membered heterocycle ring or an optionally substituted 4- to 12- membered heteroaryl ring. In some embodiments, each R2 is, independently, at each instance, selected from the group consisting of H, optionally substituted Ci-Ce aliphatic, and OR3. In some embodiments, two instances of R2 come together with the atoms to which they are attached to form an optionally substituted 4- to 12-membered heterocycle ring or an optionally substituted 4- to 12-membered heteroaryl ring.
As described herein, each R3 is, independently, at each instance, selected from the group consisting of H and optionally substituted C1-C10 aliphatic.
As described herein, R4 is optionally substituted 4- to 12-membered heterocycle, optionally substituted 4- to 12 membered heteroaryl, C6-C12 aryl substituted with one or more of -(CH2)o-6-OH or -(CH2)o6-N(R5)2, or Cs-Ci2 cycloaliphatic substituted with one or more of oxo, -(CH2)o6-OH, or -(CH2)o6-N(R5)2.
As described herein, each R5 is independently selected from H and optionally substituted Ci-Ce aliphatic.
Ila or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein G, L1, L2, and L3 are as described in classes and subclasses herein.
In some embodiments, a compound described herein is a compound represented by
Formula lib:
lib or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein G, L1, L2, and L3 are as described in classes and subclasses herein.
He or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein G, L1, L2, and L3 are as described in classes and subclasses herein.
Illa or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein L1, L2, X1, X2, T1, and T2 are as described in classes and subclasses herein.
In some embodiments, a compound described herein is represented by Formula 11 lb:
lllb or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein L1, L2, X1, X2, R1, T1, and T2 are as described in classes and subclasses herein.
In some embodiments, a compound described herein is represented by Formula 11 Ic:
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein L1, L2, X1, X2, T1, and T2 are as described in classes and subclasses herein.
In some embodiments, a compound described herein is represented by Formula 11 Id :
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein L1, L2, X1, X2, T1, and T2 are as described in classes and subclasses herein.
In some embodiments, a compound described herein is represented by Formula 11 le:
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein L1, L2, R1, T1, and T2 are as described in classes and subclasses herein.
In some embodiments, a compound described herein is represented by Formula lllf:
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein L1, L2, T1, and T2 are as described in classes and subclasses herein.
In some embodiments, a compound described herein is represented by Formula Illg:
mg or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein L1, L2, X1, X2, T1, and T2 are as described in classes and subclasses herein. In some embodiments, a compound described herein is represented by Formula lllg-1 :
nig-1 or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein L1, L2, R1, T1, and T2 are as described in classes and subclasses herein. In some embodiments, a compound described herein is represented by Formula lllh-1 :
lllh-1 or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein X50 is -S-, -S(O)-, or -S(O)a-, n’ is 1-6, and R100 is optionally substituted C1-C16 aliphatic. In some embodiments, a compound described herein is represented by Formula lllh-2:
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein X50 is -S-, -S(O)-, or -S(O)a-, and n’ is 1 -6. In some embodiments, a compound described herein is represented by Formula lllh-3:
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein X50 is -S-, -S(O)-, or -S(O)a-, and n’ is 1 -6. In some embodiments, a compound described herein is represented by Formula lllh-4:
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein n’ is 1 -6 and R100 is optionally substituted C1-C16 aliphatic. In some embodiments, a compound described herein is represented by Formula lllh-5:
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein n’ is 1-6 .
In some embodiments, a compound described herein is selected from Table 1 :
In some embodiments, provided compounds are provided and/or utilized in a salt form (e.g., a pharmaceutically acceptable salt form). Reference to a compound provided herein is understood to include reference to salts thereof, unless otherwise indicated.
Methods of Preparing Thiolipids
Compounds described herein are particularly useful over previous lipid compounds due, at least in part, to the ease of preparation. In particular, diverse fragments can be coupled through sulfur linkages in order to provide a wide array of thiolipid compounds that are useful for the preparation of nucleic acid particles. For example, thiolipid compounds of the present disclosure can be prepared according to the following General
General Scheme 3 where a tail-linker moiety is any bivalent linker, such as an aliphatic or heteroaliphatic group; a tail-end is a hydrophobic group, e.g., an aliphatic group, a head group is a polar or cationic or ionizable head group, a tail junction is a biodegradeable group, such as an ester, or a sulfur-containing moiety (e.g., thioether, sulfonyl, or sulfonamide), and a headtail junction is a central atom or functional group connecting a tail or tails to the head group (e.g., a tertiary amine group).
As described herein, in some embodiments, the present disclosure provides a method of preparing a compound represented by Formula IV:
L4-X3-T3
G1-L6-N
'L5— X4— T4
IV or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, the method comprising: contacting a compound represented by Formula V G1-L6-NH2
V with a compound represented by one of Formulae Via- Vic
and a compound represented by one of Formula Vlla-Vllc
Vila Vllb Vile in the presence of a reducing agent, wherein: each of L4 and L5 are each independently an optionally substituted C1-C30 aliphatic group; L6 is a bond, optionally substituted C1-C10 aliphatic group, or optionally substituted 2- to 10-membered heteroaliphatic group;
X3 and X4 are each independently selected from a bond, -OC(O)-, -C(O)O-, -S(O)2N(R40)- , -N(R40)S(O)2, -S(O)-, -S(O)2-, -S(O)2C(R40)2-, -OC(S)C(R40)2-, -C(R40)2C(S)O-, or -S-, wherein one or both of X3 or X4 is selected from -S(O)2N(R40)-, -N(R40)S(O)2, -S(O)-, - S(O)2-, -S(O)2C(R40)2-, -OC(S)C(R40)2-, -C(R40)2C(S)O-, or -S-; each R40 is, independently, at each instance, optionally substituted Ci-C2o aliphatic or H;
T3 and T4 are each independently an optionally substituted Cs-C2o aliphatic;
G1 is -N(R6)C(S)N(R6)2, -OH, -N(R6)2, -N(R9)C(O)R7, -N(R9)S(O)2R7, -N(R9)C(O)N(R7)2, -CH(N-R7), or-R8; each G2 is independently O or N2; each G3 is independently halogen (e.g., Cl, Br, or I), -OTs, or OTf; each R6 is, independently, at each instance, selected from the group consisting of H, optionally substituted Ci-Ce aliphatic or OR7; or two instances of R6 come together with the atoms to which they are attached to form an optionally substituted 4- to 12-membered heterocycle ring or an optionally substituted 4- to 12-membered heteroaryl ring; each R7 is, independently, at each instance, selected from the group consisting of H and optionally substituted Ci-Ce aliphatic;
R8 is optionally substituted 4- to 12-membered heterocycle, optionally substituted 4- to 12 membered heteroaryl, Ce-Ci2 aryl substituted with one or more of -(CH2)o-6-OH or - (CH2)O 6-N(R9)2, or Cs-Ci2 cycloaliphatic substituted with one or more of oxo, -(CH2)o 6- OH, or -(CH2)o-6-N(R9)2; and each R9 is independently selected from H and optionally substituted Ci-Ce aliphatic.
In some embodiments, a reducing agent is NaBH3CN or NaBH(OCOCH3)3. In some embodiments, a reducing agent is NaBH3CN. In some embodiments, a reducing agent is NaBH(OCOCH3)3.
In some embodiments, a method of preparing a compound described herein further comprises preparing a compound represented by Formula Via or the compound represented by Formula Vila, wherein G1 is O,
G1 G1 — L4-X3-T3 L5-X4-T4
H H
Via Vila by contacting a compound represented by Formula VIII or a compound represented by Formula IX
VIII IX with an oxidizing agent.
In some embodiments, an oxidizing agent is DMSO, PCC, or DMP. In some embodiments, an oxidizing agent is DMSO, and the method further comprises contacting the compound represented by Formula VIII or IX and DMSO with a sulfur trioxide pyridine complex (SOs'pyridine).
In some embodiments, a method of preparing a compound described herein further comprises preparing the compound represented by Formula VIII or IX:
VIII IX by contacting a compound represented by Formula X or a compound represented by
XII XIII in the presence of H2O2 and SOCI2; and wherein each Y1 is halogen.
Particles for Nucleic Acid Delivery
In some embodiments, particles of the present disclosure comprise a compound described herein (e.g., a compound of one or more of formulae l-lllh-5), a nucleic acid (such as RNA (e.g., mRNA), DNA or mixtures thereof), and one or more of a polymer- conjugated lipid, a helper lipid, and a steroid. In some embodiments, particles of the present disclosure comprise a compound described herein (e.g., a compound of one or more of formulae l-lllh-5), a nucleic acid (such as RNA (e.g., mRNA), DNA or mixtures thereof), a helper lipid, and a steroid. In some embodiments, particles of the present disclosure comprise a compound described herein (e.g., a compound of one or more of formulae l-lllh-5), a nucleic acid (such as RNA (e.g., mRNA), DNA or mixtures thereof), a polymer-conjugated lipid, a helper lipid, and a steroid.
Thiolipid compounds described herein comprise a cationic or cationically ionizable moiety that is capable of forming electrostatic interactions between the positively charged moiety and negatively charged nucleic acids, resulting in particle formation.
In some embodiments, particles described herein (e.g., nucleic acid particles, e.g., ribonucleic acid particles or deoxyribonucleic acid particles) comprise more than one type of nucleic acid molecules, where the molecular parameters of the nucleic acid molecules may be similar or different from each other, like with respect to molar mass or fundamental structural elements such as molecular architecture, capping, coding regions or other features.
In some embodiments, a nucleic acid particle described herein is a nanoparticle. As used in the present disclosure, “nanoparticle” refers to a particle having an average diameter suitable for parenteral administration and is less than 1000 nm in diameter. In some embodiments, a composition comprising nanoparticles can have an average nanoparticle size (e.g., mean diameter) of about 30 nm to about 150 nm, about 40 nm to about 150 nm, about 50 nm to about 150 nm, about 60 nm to about 130 nm, about 70 nm to about 110 nm, about 70 nm to about 100 nm, about 70 to about 90 nm, or about 70 nm to about 80 nm. In some embodiments, a composition comprising nanoparticles can have an average nanoparticle size (e.g., mean diameter) of about 50 nm to about 100 nm. In some embodiments, a composition comprising nanoparticles can have an average nanoparticle size (e.g., mean diameter) of about 50 nm to about 150 nm. In some embodiments, a composition comprising nanoparticles can have an average nanoparticle size (e.g., mean diameter) of about 60 nm to about 120 nm. In some embodiments, a composition comprising nanoparticles can have an average
nanoparticle size (e.g., mean diameter) of about 30 nm, 35 nm, 40 nm, 45 nm, 50 nm, 55 nm, 60 nm, 65 nm, 70 nm, 75 nm, 80 nm, 85 nm, 90 nm, 95 nm, 100 nm, 105 nm, 110 nm, 115 nm, 120 nm, 125 nm, 130 nm, 135 nm, 140 nm, 145 nm, or 150 nm.
A composition comprising nucleic acid particles (e.g., ribonucleic acid particles or deoxyribonucleic acid particles) described herein may exhibit a polydispersity index less than about 0.5, less than about 0.4, less than about 0.3, or about 0.2 or less of said nanoparticles. By way of example, a composition comprising nucleic acid particles (e.g., ribonucleic acid particles or deoxyribonucleic acid particles) described herein can exhibit a polydispersity index in a range of about 0.1 to about 0.3 or about 0.2 to about 0.3.
Nucleic acid particles (e.g., ribonucleic acid particles or deoxyribonucleic acid particles) described herein can be characterized by an “N/P ratio,” which is the molar ratio of cationic (nitrogen) groups (the “N” in N/P) in the cationic polymer to the anionic (phosphate) groups (the “P” in N/P) in RNA. It is understood that a cationic group is one that is either in cationic form (e.g., N+), or one that is ionizable to become cationic. Use of a single number in an N/P ratio (e.g., an N/P ratio of about 5) is intended to refer to that number over 1 , e.g., an N/P ratio of about 4 is intended to mean about 4:1 . In some embodiments, a nucleic acid particle (e.g., a ribonucleic acid particle) described herein has an N/P ratio greater than or equal to 4. In some embodiments, a nucleic acid particle (e.g., a ribonucleic acid particle) described herein has an N/P ratio that is about 4 to about 16. In some embodiments, a nucleic acid particle (e.g., a ribonucleic acid particle) described herein has an N/P ratio that is about 6 to about 12. In some embodiments, a nucleic acid particle described herein has an N/P ratio that is about 4 to about 12. In some embodiments, a nucleic acid particle (e.g., a ribonucleic acid particle) described herein has an N/P ratio that is about 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11 , 12, 13, 14, 15, or 16. In some embodiments, an N/P ratio for a nucleic acid particle (e.g., a ribonucleic acid particle) described herein is about 6. In some embodiments, an N/P ratio for a nucleic acid particle (e.g., a ribonucleic acid particle) described herein is about 12.
Compounds described herein are also referred to as “ionizable” or “cationic” lipids. Such lipids are intended to mean compounds that, in some embodiments, are capable of becoming cationic (i.e., becoming positively charged) at physiological pH.
The term “average diameter” or “mean diameter” refers to the mean hydrodynamic diameter of particles as measured by dynamic laser light scattering (DLS) with data analysis using the so-called cumulant algorithm, which provides as results the so-called Z-average with the dimension of a length, and the polydispersity index (PDI), which is dimensionless (Koppel, D., J. Chem. Phys. 57, 1972, pp 4814-4820, ISO 13321 ). Here
“average diameter,” “mean diameter,” “diameter,” or “size” for particles is used synonymously with this value of the Z-average.
The “polydispersity index” is preferably calculated based on dynamic light scattering measurements by the so-called cumulant analysis as mentioned in the definition of the “average diameter.” Under certain prerequisites, it can be taken as a measure of the size distribution of an ensemble of ribonucleic acid nanoparticles (e.g., ribonucleic acid nanoparticles).
Different types of nucleic acid particles have been described previously to be suitable for delivery of nucleic acid in particulate form (e.g. Kaczmarek, J. C. et al., 2017, Genome Medicine 9, 60). For non-viral nucleic acid delivery vehicles, nanoparticle encapsulation of nucleic acid physically protects nucleic acid from degradation and, depending on the specific chemistry, can aid in cellular uptake and endosomal escape.
Some embodiments described herein relate to compositions, methods and uses involving more than one, e.g., 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 or even more nucleic acid species. The nucleic acid species may be RNA and/or DNA. For example, the particles described herein may contain one species of RNA (e.g., one species of mRNA) and one species of DNA.
In a nucleic acid particle composition, it is possible that each nucleic acid species is separately formulated as an individual nucleic acid particle formulation. In that case, each individual nucleic acid particle formulation will comprise one nucleic acid species. The individual nucleic acid particle formulations may be present as separate entities, e.g., in separate containers. Such formulations are obtainable by providing each nucleic acid species separately (typically each in the form of a nucleic acid-containing solution) together with a particle-forming agent, thereby allowing the formation of particles. Respective particles will contain exclusively the specific nucleic acid species that is being provided when the particles are formed (individual particulate formulations).
In some embodiments, a composition such as a pharmaceutical composition comprises more than one individual nucleic acid particle formulation. Respective pharmaceutical compositions are referred to as “mixed particulate formulations.” Mixed particulate formulations according to the present disclosure are obtainable by forming, separately, individual nucleic acid particle formulations, as described above, followed by a step of mixing of the individual nucleic acid particle formulations. By the step of mixing, a formulation comprising a mixed population of nucleic acid-containing particles is obtainable. Individual nucleic acid particle populations may be together in one container, comprising a mixed population of individual nucleic acid particle formulations.
Alternatively, it is possible that different nucleic acid species are formulated together as a “combined particulate formulation.” Such formulations are obtainable by providing a combined formulation (typically combined solution) of different nucleic acid species together with a particle-forming agent, thereby allowing the formation of particles. As opposed to a “mixed particulate formulation,” a “combined particulate formulation” will typically comprise particles that comprise more than one nucleic acid species. In a combined particulate composition different nucleic acid species are typically present together in a single particle.
In certain embodiments, nucleic acids, when present in provided nucleic acid particles are resistant in aqueous solution to degradation with a nuclease.
Lipid Nanoparticles
In some embodiments, nucleic acid particles are lipid nanoparticles. In some embodiments, lipid nanoparticles are cationic lipid nanoparticles comprising one or more cationic lipids (e.g., ones described herein), a nucleic acid (e.g., RNA and/or DNA), a polymer-conjugated lipid, a helper lipid, and a sterol. Lipid nanoparticles (LNPs) have proven useful for the delivery of nucleic acid cargo to tissue of interest. LNPs are used, for example, in certain commercial vaccines for treatment of COVID-19.
In some embodiments, LNPs of the present disclosure comprise i) a cationic lipid (e.g., a thiolipid compound described herein, such as a compound of any one of formulae I- lllh-5); ii) a helper lipid; iii) a polymer-conjugated lipid (e.g., a polyethylene glycol bound lipid “a PEG lipid”); and iv) a steroid. In some embodiments, LNPs of the present disclosure may comprise i) a cationic lipid (e.g., a thiolipid compound described herein, such as a compound of any one of formulae l-lllh-5); ii) a helper lipid; and iii) a steroid. In some embodiments, LNPs described herein can further comprise additional additives, as described herein. LNPs of the present disclosure can be useful in a variety of contexts. For example, LNPs comprising a nucleic acid described herein are useful for delivery of said nucleic acid into the cell of a subject. In some embodiments, LNPs comprising a nucleic acid described herein are useful for causing increased expression of a protein in a subject. In some embodiments, LNPs comprising a nucleic acid described herein are useful for causing a pharmacological effect induced by expression of a protein in a subject. Lipid nanoparticles described herein are characterized by molar percentage (mol%) of components in the lipid nanoparticle. A mol% used in reference to a lipid component of a lipid nanoparticle is relative to the total other lipid components in the lipid nanoparticle.
(i) Helper lipids
As described herein, LNPs of the present disclosure comprise a helper lipid. In some embodiments, a helper lipid is a phospholipid. In some embodiments, a helper lipid is or comprises 1 ,2-distearoyl-sn-glycero-3-phosphocholine (DSPC), 1 ,2-dipalmitoyl-sn- glycero-3-phosphocholine (DPPC), 1 ,2-dimyristoyl-sn-glycero-3- phosphocholine (DMPC), 1-palmitoyl-2-oleoyl-sn-glycero-3-phosphocholine (POPC), 1 ,2-dioleoyl-sn- glycero-3-phosphocholine (DOPC), phophatidyl ethanol amines such as 1 ,2-dioleoyl-sn- glycero-3-phosphoethanolamine (DOPE), sphingomyelins (SM), 1 ,2-diacylglyceryl-3-O- 4'-(N,N,N-trimethyl)-homoserine (DGTS), ceramides, cholesterol, steroids, such as sterols and their derivatives.
In some embodiments, a helper lipid is or comprises phosphatidylcholines, phosphatidylethanolamines, phosphatidylglycerols, phosphatidic acids, phosphatidylserines or sphingomyelin. In some embodiments, a helper lipid is or comprises diacylphosphatidylcholines, such as distearoylphosphatidylcholine (DSPC), dioleoylphosphatidylcholine (DOPC), dimyristoylphosphatidylcholine (DMPC), dipentadecanoylphosphatidylcholine, dilauroylphosphatidylcholine, dipalmitoylphosphatidylcholine (DPPC), diarachidoylphosphatidylcholine (DAPC), dibehenoylphosphatidylcholine (DBPC), ditricosanoylphosphatidylcholine (DTPC), dilignoceroylphatidylcholine (DLPC), palmitoyloleoyl-phosphatidylcholine (POPC), 1 ,2- di-O-octadecenyl-sn-glycero-3-phosphocholine (18:0 Diether PC), 1 -oleoyl-2- cholesterylhemisuccinoyl-sn-glycero-3-phosphocholine (OChemsPC), 1 -hexadecyl-sn- glycero-3-phosphocholine (C16 Lyso PC) and phosphatidylethanolamines, including, for example diacylphosphatidylethanolamines, such as dioleoylphosphatidylethanolamine (DOPE), distearoyl-phosphatidylethanolamine (DSPE), dipalmitoylphosphatidylethanolamine (DPPE), dimyristoyl-phosphatidylethanolamine (DMPE), dilauroyl-phosphatidylethanolamine (DLPE), diphytanoyl-phosphatidylethanolamine (DPyPE), 1 ,2-di-(9Z-octadecenoyl)-sn-glycero-3-phosphocholine (DOPG), 1 ,2- dipalmitoyl-sn-glycero-3-phospho-(1 '-rac-glycerol) (DPPG), 1 -palmitoyl-2-oleoyl-sn- glycero-3-phosphoethanolamine (POPE), N-palmitoyl-D-erythro- sphingosylphosphorylcholine (SM). In some embodiments, a helper lipid is selected from the group consisting of DSPC, DOPC, DMPC, DPPC, POPC, DOPE, DOPG, DPPG, POPE, DPPE, DMPE, DSPE, and SM. In some embodiments, the neutral lipid is selected from the group consisting of DSPC, DPPC, DMPC, DOPC, POPC, DOPE and SM. In some embodiments, the neutral lipid is DSPC.
Helper lipids may be synthetic or naturally derived. Other helper lipids suitable for use in a lipid nanoparticle are described in WO2021/026358, WO 2017/075531 , and WO 2018/081480, the entire contents of each of which are incorporated herein by reference in their entirety.
In some embodiments, a lipid nanoparticle comprises about 5 to about 15 mol% of a phospholipid. In some embodiments, a lipid nanoparticle comprises about 8 to about 12 mol% of a phospholipid. In some embodiments, a lipid nanoparticle comprises about 10 mol% of a phospholipid. In some embodiments, a lipid nanoparticle comprises about 5 to about 15 mol% of DSPC. In some embodiments, a lipid nanoparticle comprises about 8 to about 12 mol% of DSPC. In some embodiments, a lipid nanoparticle comprises about 10 mol% of DSPC.
(ii) Polymer-conjugated lipids
As described herein, LNPs of the present disclosure comprise a polymer-conjugated lipid. In some embodiments, a polymer conjugated lipid is a lipid conjugated to polyethylene glycol (PEG-lipid). In some embodiments, a PEG lipid is selected from pegylated di acyl glycerol (PEG-DAG) such as l-(monomethoxy-polyethyleneglycol)- 2,3- dimyristoylglycerol (PEG-DMG) (e.g., 1 ,2-dimyristoyl-rac-glycero-3- methoxypolyethylene glycol-2000 (PEG2000-DMG)), a pegylated phosphatidylethanoloamine (PEG-PE), a PEG succinate di acyl glycerol (PEG-S-DAG) such as 4-O-(2',3'-di(tetradecanoyloxy)propyl-1 -O-(w- methoxy(polyethoxy)ethyl)butanedioate (PEG-S-DMG), 1 ,2-distearoyl-sn-glycero-3- phosphoethanolamine-N-[amino(polyethylene glycol)-2000] (DSPE-PEG2000 amine), a pegylated ceramide (PEG-cer), or a PEG dialkoxypropylcarbamate such as w-m ethoxy (polyethoxy)ethyl-N-(2,3-di(tetradecanoxy)propyl)carbamate, 2,3- di(tetradecanoxy)propy 1 -N-(w methoxy(polyethoxy)ethyl)carbamate, and N-palmitoyl- sphingosine-1 -{succinyl[methoxy(polyethylene glycol)2000]} (C16-PEG2000 ceramide or C16Cer-PEG2K).
In some embodiments, a PEG-lipid is DMG-PEG.
In some embodiments, a PEG-lipid is provided in WO2021/026358, WO 2017/075531 , or WO 2018/081480, each of which is incorporated by reference in its entirety.
In some embodiments, a polymer-conjugated lipid is 2-[(polyethylene glycol)-2000]-N,N- ditetradecylacetamide (ALC-0159). In some embodiments, a polymer-conjugated lipid is:
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, where n’ is an integer from about 45 to about 50.
In some embodiments, a polymer conjugated lipid is C16 PEG2000:
wherein n in the formula above is from 30 to 60, such as about 50. In one embodiment, the PEG-conjugated lipid (pegylated lipid) is PEG2000-C-DMA which preferably refers to 3-N-[(w-methoxy polyethylene glycol)2000)carbamoyl]-1 ,2-dimyristyloxy-propylamine (MPEG-(2 kDa)-C-DMA) or methoxy-polyethylene glycol-2,3- bis(tetradecyloxy)propylcarbamate (2000).
In some embodiments, a PEG-lipid is selected from PEG-DAG, PEG-PE, PEG-S-DAG, PEG2000-DMG, PEG-S-DMG, PEG-cer, a PEG dialkyoxypropylcarbamate (e.g., co- methoxy(polyethoxy)ethyl-N-(2,3-di(tetradecanoxy)propyl)carbamate or 2,3- di(tetradecanoxy)propyl-N-(® methoxy(polyethoxy)ethyl)carbamate), ALC-0159, and combinations thereof. In some embodiments, a PEG-lipid is ALC-0159 or PEG2000- DMG. In some embodiments, a PEG-lipid is ALC-0159. In some embodiments, a PEG- lipid is PEG2000-DMG. In some embodiments, a PEG-lipid is PEG-DAG. In some embodiments, a PEG-lipid is PEG-PE. In some embodiments, a PEG-lipid is PEG-S- DAG. In some embodiments, a PEG-lipid is PEG-cer. In some embodiments, a PEG- lipid is a PEG dialkyoxypropylcarbamate.
In some embodiments, a PEG group that is part of a PEG-lipid has, on average in a composition comprising one or more PEG-lipid molecules, a weight average molecular weight (Mw) of about 2000 g/mol.
In some embodiments, a polymer-conjugated lipid is a polysarcosine-conjugated lipid, also referred to herein as sarcosinylated lipid or pSar-lipid. The term "sarcosinylated lipid" refers to a molecule comprising both a lipid portion and a polysarcosine (poly(N- methylglycine) portion.
In some embodiments, a polymer-conjugated lipid is a polyoxazoline (POX)-conjugated and/or polyoxazine (POZ)-conjugated lipid, also referred to herein as a conjugate of a POX and/or POZ polymer and one or more hydrophobic chains or as oxazolinylated and/or oxazinylated lipid or POX- and/or POZ-lipid. The term "oxazolinylated lipid" or "POX-lipid" refers to a molecule comprising both a lipid portion and a polyoxazoline portion. The term "oxazinylated lipid" or "POZ-lipid" refers to a molecule comprising both a lipid portion and a polyoxazine portion. The term "oxazolinylated/oxazinylated lipid" or "POX/POZ-lipid" or "POXZ-lipid" refers to a molecule comprising both a lipid portion and a portion of a copolymer of polyoxazoline and polyoxazine.
In some embodiments, an LNP described herein may comprise a sarcosinylated lipid. In some embodiments, the nucleic acid compositions (such as DNA or RNA compositions, especially mRNA compositions) described herein comprise a sarcosinylated lipid and are substantially free of a pegylated lipid (or do not contain a pegylated lipid).
In some embodiments, the nucleic acid compositions (such as DNA or RNA compositions) described herein comprise a cationic/cationically ionizable lipid as described herein and a sarcosinylated lipid (pSAR-conjugated lipid). In some embodiments, the nucleic acid compositions (such as DNA or RNA compositions, especially mRNA compositions) described herein may further comprise a neutral lipid (e.g., a phospholipid, cholesterol or a derivative thereof) or a combination of neutral lipids (e.g., a phospholipid, and cholesterol or a derivative thereof). In some embodiments, the nucleic acid compositions (such as DNA or RNA compositions, especially mRNA compositions) described herein comprise a cationic/cationically ionizable lipid as described herein, a sarcosinylated lipid, a neutral lipid (e.g., a phospholipid), and cholesterol or a derivative thereof. In some embodiments, the phospholipid is DSPC.
In some embodiments of the nucleic acid compositions (such as DNA or RNA compositions, especially mRNA compositions) described herein which comprise a sarcosinylated lipid, said compositions are substantially free of a pegylated lipid (or do not contain a pegylated lipid).
In some embodiments, the sarcosinylated lipid comprises between 2 and 200 sarcosine units, such as between 5 and 100 sarcosine units, between 10 and 50 sarcosine units, between 15 and 40 sarcosine units, e.g., about 23 sarcosine units.
In some embodiments, the sarcosinylated lipid comprises the structure of the following general formula (XVII):
ber of sarcosine units.
In some embodiments, the sarcosinylated lipid comprises the structure of the following general formula (XVIII):
d R22 comprises a hydrophobic group and the other is H, a hydrophilic group or a functional group optionally comprising a targeting moiety; and x is the number of sarcosine units.
In some embodiments, an LNP herein may comprise an oxazolinylated and/or/oxazinylated lipid. In some embodiments, the nucleic acid compositions (such as DNA or RNA compositions, especially mRNA compositions) described herein comprise an oxazolinylated and/or/oxazinylated lipid and are substantially free of a pegylated lipid (or do not contain a pegylated lipid).
In some embodiments, a polymer-conjugated lipid comprises monomers of 2-(2-(2- aminoethoxy)ethoxy)acetic acid. In some embodiments, a polymer-conjugated lipid comprises monomers of 2-(2-(2-aminoethoxy)ethoxy)acetic acid. In some embodiments, the polymer of the polymer-conjugated lipid is or comprises poly-2-(2-(2- aminoethoxy)ethoxy)acetic acid (pAEEA) or poly-2-(2-(2- methylaminoethoxy)ethoxy)acetic acid (pMAEEA), or a derivative thereof, as defined herein.
In some embodiments, the polymer comprises the following general formula:
wherein X11 and X12 taken together are optionally substituted amide, optionally
substituted thioamide or ester; Y is -CH2-, -(CH2)2-, or -(CH2)3-; z is 2 to 24; and n is 1 to 100.
In some embodiments, (i) when X11 is -C(O)- then X12 is -NR10-; (ii) when X11 is -NR10- then X12 is -C(O)-; (iii) when X11 is -C(S)- then X12 is -NR1-; (iv) when X11 is -NR1- then X12 is -C(S)-; (v) when X11 is -C(O)- then X12 is -O-; or (vi) when X11 is -O- then X12 is - C(O)-; wherein R10 is hydrogen or Ci s alkyl. In some embodiments, X11 is -C(O)- and X12 is -NR10-, wherein R10 is hydrogen or Ci s alkyl. In some embodiments, X11 is -C(O)- and X12 is -NR10-, wherein R10 is hydrogen or methyl. In some embodiments, X11 is -C(O)- and X12 is -NR10-, wherein R10 is hydrogen. In some embodiments, Y is -CH2- or -(CH2)2- . In some embodiments, Y is -CH2-.
In some embodiments, the polymer comprises the following general formula:
wherein R10 is hydrogen or C1 -8 alkyl; z is 2 to 24; and n is 1 to 100. In some embodiments of the above formulas, z is 2 to 10. In some embodiments, z is 2 to 5. In some embodiments, z is 2. In some embodiments of the above formulas, R10 is hydrogen or methyl. In some embodiments, R10 is hydrogen.
In some embodiments of the above formulas, n is 5 to 50. In some embodiments, n is 5 to 25. In some embodiments, n is 7 to 14. In some embodiments, n is 10 to 25. In some embodiments, n is 14 to 17. In some embodiments, n is 8 or 14.
In some embodiments, a polymer-conjugated lipid is about 0.5 to about 5 mol% relative to total lipids in the LNP. In some embodiments, an LNP comprises about 1 .0 to about 2.5 mol% of a polymer-conjugated lipid. In some embodiments, an LNP comprises about 1.5 to about 2.0 mol% of a polymer-conjugated lipid. In some embodiments, an LNP comprises about 1 .5 to about 1 .8 mol% of a polymer-conjugated lipid.
In some embodiments, a molar ratio of total cationic lipid to total polymer-conjugated lipid is from about 100:1 to about 20:1 . In some embodiments, a molar ratio of total cationic lipid to total polymer-conjugated lipid is from about 50:1 to about 20:1. In some
embodiments, a molar ratio of total cationic lipid to total polymer-conjugated lipid is from about 40:1 to about 20:1. In some embodiments, a molar ratio of total cationic lipid to total polymer-conjugated lipid (e.g., PEG-conjugated lipid) is from about 35:1 to about 25:1.
In some embodiments, LNPs of the present disclosure may further comprise a compound of Formula (A1):
L-X10-P-X20-B (A1) wherein P comprises a polymer; L comprises a hydrophobic moiety (e.g., lipid) attached to a first end of the polymer; B comprises a binding moiety attached to a second end of the polymer; X10 is absent or a first linking moiety; and X20 is absent or a second linking moiety.
In some embodiments of formula (A1), X10 comprises a carbonyl group. In some embodiments of formula (A1), X20 comprises the reaction product of a thiol or cysteine reactive group, e.g., a maleimide group, with a thiol or cysteine group of a compound comprising the binding moiety.
In some embodiments of formula (A1), L comprises a lipid as described above. In some embodiments of formula (A1), L comprises DSPE (distearoylphosphatidylethanolamine), DPPE (dipalmitoylphosphatidylethanolamine), DOPE (dioleoylphosphatidylethanolamine), and POPE (palmitoyloleylphosphatidylethanolamine) which may be linked to P by an amide group.
In some embodiments of formula (A1), P comprises a polymer as described above. In some embodiments of formula (A1), P comprises a polymer selected from the group consisting of polyethylene glycol) (PEG), polysarcosine (pSar) (poly(N-methylglycine), polyoxazoline (POX), polyoxazine (POZ), poly-2-(2-(2-aminoethoxy)-ethoxy)acetic acid (pAEEA), and poly-2-(2-(2-methylamino-ethoxy)ethoxy)acetic acid (pMAEEA) (including derivatives thereof). In some embodiments of formula (A1), P comprises poly(ethylene glycol) (PEG); e.g., PEG as described above.
In some embodiments of formula (A1), the binding moiety B comprises a moiety (e.g., an antibody or antigen-binding fragment thereof) binding to a cell surface antigen (e.g., a receptor, antigen or marker displayed on the surface of a target cell, such as a T cell, a B cell or a cancer cell). In some embodiments of formula (A1), the binding moiety B comprises or is a polypeptide (e.g., such as an epitope tag), e.g., an ALFA-tag, as described herein. In some embodiments of formula (A1), the binding moiety B comprises or is an ALFA-tag comprises or consisting of a sequence selected from the group
RECTIFIED SHEET (RULE 91) ISA/EP
consisting of sequences SEQ.ID.NO. 1 , SEQ.ID.NO. 2, SEQ.ID.NO. 3, and SEQ.ID.NO. 4.
In some embodiments, the compound of formula (A1) may be a peptide-conjugated lipid. In some embodiments, the compound of formula (A1) may be DSPE-PEG2K-alfa. Thus, in some embodiments, the LNPs of the present disclosure may further comprise a peptide-conjugated lipid, which is optionally DSPE-PEG2K-alfa. In some embodiments, a lipid nanoparticle comprises about 0.05 to about 5 mol%, optionally about 0.1 to about 2 mol% of a compound of formula (A1) (where the mol% may be provided by replacement of steroid).
As described in the Examples, LNPs comprising a compound of formula (A1), wherein the binding moiety B comprises or is a peptide, can be further functionalized by binding to the peptide a “docking compound”, which is typically a bispecific polypeptide (such as a bispecific antibody, or antigen binding fragment thereof), wherein the docking compound comprises (i) a moiety binding the peptide of binding moiety B, and (ii) a moiety binding a cell surface antigen on target cells. In some embodiments, LNPs comprising a compound of formula (A1), wherein the binding moiety B comprises or is an ALFA-tag (as described herein) can be further functionalized by binding to the ALFA- tag a “docking compound” comprising (i) an NbAlfa VHH domain comprising the CDR1 sequence SEQ.ID.NO. 5, the CDR2 sequence SEQ.ID.NO. 6, and the CDR3 sequence SEQ.ID.NO. 7; and (ii) an anti-CD3 binding VHH comprising the CDR1 sequence SEQ.ID.NO. 8, the CDR2 sequence SEQ.ID.NO. 9, and the CDR3 sequence SEQ.ID.NO. 10.
(iii) Steroid
As described herein, in some embodiments, a nucleic acid particle further comprises a steroid. In some embodiments, a steroid is a sterol. In some embodiments, a sterol is p-sitosterol, stigmasterol, cholesterol, cholecalciferol, ergocalciferol, calcipotriol, botulin, lupeol, ursolic acid, oleanolic acid, cycloartenol, lanosterol, or a-tocopherol. In some embodiments, a sterol is p-sitosterol. In some embodiments, a sterol is stigmasterol. In some embodiments, a sterol is cholesterol. In some embodiments, a sterol is cholecalciferol. In some embodiments, a sterol is ergocalciferol. In some embodiments, a sterol is calcipotriol. In some embodiments, a sterol is botulin. In some embodiments, a sterol is lupeol. In some embodiments, a sterol is ursolic acid. In some embodiments, a sterol is oleanolic acid. In some embodiments, a sterol is cycloartenol. In some embodiments, a sterol is lanosterol. In some embodiments, a sterol is a-tocopherol.
RECTIFIED SHEET (RULE 91) ISA/EP
In some embodiments, a lipid nanoparticle comprises about 30 to about 50 mol% of a steroid. In some embodiments, a lipid nanoparticle comprises about 35 to about 45 mol% of a steroid. In some embodiments, a lipid nanoparticle comprises about 38 to about 40 mol% of a steroid. In some embodiments, a lipid nanoparticle comprises about 38.5 mol% of a steroid. In some embodiments, a lipid nanoparticle comprises about 40 mol% of a steroid.
In some embodiments, a lipid nanoparticle comprises about 30 to about 50 mol% of cholesterol. In some embodiments, a lipid nanoparticle comprises about 35 to about 45 mol% of cholesterol. In some embodiments, a lipid nanoparticle comprises about 38 to about 41 mol% of cholesterol. In some embodiments, a lipid nanoparticle comprises about 38.5 mol% of cholesterol. In some embodiments, a lipid nanoparticle comprises about 40.7 mol% of cholesterol.
In some embodiments, a lipid nanoparticle comprises: about 40 to about 50 mol% of a thiolipid compound; about 30 to about 50 mol% of a steroid; about 5 to about 15 mol% of a helper lipid; and about 1 to about 5 mol% of a polymer conjugated lipid.
In some embodiments, a lipid nanoparticle comprises: about 45 to about 50 mol% of a thiolipid compound; about 35 to about 45 mol% of a steroid; about 5 to about 15 mol% of a helper lipid; and about 1 to about 5 mol% of a polymer conjugated lipid.
In some embodiments, a lipid nanoparticle comprises: about 47.5 mol% of a thiolipid compound; about 40.5 mol% of a steroid; about 10 mol% of a helper lipid; and about 2 mol% of a polymer conjugated lipid.
(iv) Methods of Making Lipid Nanoparticles
Lipids and lipid nanoparticles comprising nucleic acids and their method of preparation are known in the art, including, e.g., as described in U.S. Patent Nos. 8,569,256, 5,965,542 and U.S. Patent Publication Nos. 2016/0199485, 2016/0009637, 2015/0273068, 2015/0265708, 2015/0203446, 2015/0005363, 2014/0308304,
2014/0200257, 2013/086373, 2013/0338210, 2013/0323269, 2013/0245107,
2013/0195920, 2013/0123338, 2013/0022649, 2013/0017223, 2012/0295832,
2012/0183581 , 2012/0172411 , 2012/0027803, 2012/0058188, 2011/0311583,
2011/0311582, 2011/0262527, 2011/0216622, 2011/0117125, 2011/0091525,
2011/0076335, 2011/0060032, 2010/0130588, 2007/0042031 , 2006/0240093,
2006/0083780, 2006/0008910, 2005/0175682, 2005/017054, 2005/0118253,
2005/0064595, 2004/0142025, 2007/0042031 , 1999/009076 and PCT Pub. Nos. WO
99/39741 , WO 2018/081480, WO 2017/004143, WO 2017/075531 , WO 2015/199952, WO 2014/008334, WO 2013/086373, WO 2013/086322, WO 2013/016058, WO
2013/086373, W02011/141705, and WO 2001/07548, the full disclosures of which are herein incorporated by reference in their entirety for the purposes described herein.
For example, in some embodiments, cationic lipids, helper lipids, and steroids are solubilized in ethanol at a pre- determined weight or molar ratios/percentages (e.g., ones described herein). In some embodiments, lipid nanoparticles (LNP) are prepared at a total lipid to RNA or DNA molar ratio of approximately 10:1 to 30:1. In some embodiments, such RNA or DNA can be diluted to 0.2 mg/ml_ in acetate buffer.
In some embodiments, using an ethanol injection technique, a colloidal lipid dispersion comprising nucleic acids (e.g., RNA or DNA) can be formed as follows: an ethanol solution comprising lipids, such as thiolipids described herein, helper lipids, steroids, and polymer-conjugated lipids, is injected into an aqueous solution comprising nucleic acids (e.g., RNA or DNA).
In some embodiments, lipid and nucleic acid solutions can be mixed at room temperature by pumping each solution (e.g., a lipid solution comprising a thiolipid compound described herein, a helper lipid, steroids, and any other additives) at controlled flow rates into a mixing unit, for example, using piston pumps. In some embodiments, the flow rates of a lipid solution and a nucleic acid solution into a mixing unit are maintained at a ratio of 1 :3. Upon mixing, nucleic acid-lipid particles are formed as the ethanolic lipid solution is diluted with aqueous RNAs. The lipid solubility is decreased, while cationic lipids bearing a positive charge interact with the negatively charged nucleic acid.
In some embodiments, a solution comprising nucleic acid (e.g., RNA)-encapsulated lipid nanoparticles can be processed by one or more of concentration adjustment, buffer exchange, formulation, and/or filtration.
In some embodiments, a composition or complex described herein further comprises a pharmaceutically acceptable surfactant. In some embodiments, a pharmaceutically acceptable surfactant is selected from a polysorbate (e.g., polysorbate 20 (Tween20), polysorbate 40 (Tween40), polysorbate 60 (Tween60), and polysorbate 80 (Tween80)), poloxamers, and an amphiphilic group comprising a moiety selected from polyalkylene
glycols (e.g., polyethylene glycol), poly(2-oxazoline), poly(2-methyl-2-oxazoline), polysarcosine, polyvinylpyrrolidone, and poly[N-(2-hydroxypropyl)methacrylamide, wherein the moiety is bound to one or more C12-C20 aliphatic groups.
RNA
In some embodiments, a particle described herein comprises one or more oligosaccharide compositions and a nucleic acid. In some embodiments, a nucleic acid is RNA.
In some embodiments, an RNA amenable to technologies described herein is a singlestranded RNA. In some embodiments, an RNA as disclosed herein is a linear RNA. In some embodiments, a single-stranded RNA is a non-coding RNA in that its nucleotide sequence does not include an open reading frame (or complement thereof). In some embodiments, a single-stranded RNA has a nucleotide sequence that encodes (or is the complement of a sequence that encodes) a polypeptide or a plurality of polypeptides (e.g., epitopes) of the present disclosure.
In some embodiments, an RNA is or comprises an siRNA, an miRNA, or other noncoding RNA.
In many embodiments, a relevant RNA includes at least one open reading frame (ORF) (e.g., is an mRNA); in some embodiments, a relevant RNA includes a single ORF; in some embodiments, a relevant RNA includes more than one ORF.
In some embodiments, an RNA comprises an ORF, e.g., encoding a polypeptide of interest or encoding a plurality of polypeptides of interest. In some embodiments, an RNA produced in accordance with technologies provided herein comprises a plurality of ORFs (e.g., encoding a plurality of polypeptides). In some embodiments, an RNA produced in accordance with technologies herein comprises a single ORF that encodes a plurality of polypeptides. In some such embodiments, polypeptides are or comprise antigens or epitopes thereof (e.g., relevant antigens).
In some embodiments, an ORF for use in accordance with the present disclosure encodes a polypeptide that includes a signal sequence, e.g., that is functional in mammalian cells, such as an intrinsic signal sequence or a heterologous signal sequence. In some embodiments, a signal sequence directs secretion of an encoded polypeptide, in some embodiments, a signal sequence directs transport of an encoded polypeptide into a defined cellular compartment, preferably the cell surface, the endoplasmic reticulum (ER) or the endosomal-lysosomal compartment.
In some embodiments, an ORF encodes a polypeptide that includes a multimerization element (e.g., an intrinsic or heterologous multimerization element). In some embodiments, an ORF that encodes a surface polypeptide (e.g., that includes a signal sequence directing surface localization) includes a multimerization element.
In some embodiments, an ORF encodes a polypeptide that includes a transmembrane element or domain.
In some embodiments, an ORF is codon-optimized for expression in a cells of a particular host, e.g., a mammalian host, e.g., a human.
In some embodiments, an RNA includes unmodified uridine residues; an RNA that includes only unmodified uridine residues may be referred to as a “uRNA”. In some embodiments, an RNA includes one or more modified uridine residues; in some embodiments, such an RNA (e.g., an RNA including entirely modified uridine residues) is referred to as a “modRNA”. In some embodiments, an RNA may be a self-amplifying RNA (saRNA). In some embodiments, an RNA may be a trans-amplifying RNA (taRNA) (see, for example, WO2017/162461 ).
In some embodiments, a relevant RNA includes a polypeptide-encoding portion or a plurality of polypeptide-encoding portions. In some particular embodiments, such a portion or portions may encode a polypeptide or polypeptides that is or comprises a biologically active polypeptide or portion thereof (e.g., an enzyme or cytokine or therapeutic protein such as a replacement protein or antibody or portion thereof). In some particular embodiments, such a portion or portions may encode a polypeptide or polypeptides that is or comprises an antigen (or an epitope thereof), a cytokine, an enzyme, etc. In some embodiments, an encoded polypeptide or polypeptides may be or include one or more neoantigens or neoepitopes associated with a tumor. In some embodiments, an encoded polypeptide or polypeptides may be or include one or more antigens (or epitopes thereof) of an infectious agent (e.g., a bacterium, fungus, virus, etc.). In certain embodiments, an encoded polypeptide may be a variant of a wild type polypeptide.
In some embodiments, a single-stranded RNA (e.g., mRNA) may comprise a secretion signal-encoding region (e.g., a secretion signal-encoding region that allows an encoded target entity or entities to be secreted upon translation by cells). In some embodiments, such a secretion signal-encoding region may be or comprise a non-human secretion signal. In some embodiments, such a secretion signal-encoding region may be or comprise a human secretion signal.
In some embodiments, a single-stranded RNA (e.g., mRNA) may comprise at least one non-coding element (e.g., to enhance RNA stability and/or translation efficiency). Examples of non-coding elements include but are not limited to a 3’ untranslated region (UTR), a 5’ UTR, a cap structure (e.g., in some embodiments, an enzymatically-added cap; in some embodiments, a co-transcriptional cap), a poly adenine (polyA) tail (e.g., that, in some embodiments, may be or comprise 100 A residues or more, and/or in some embodiments may include one or more “interrupting” [i.e., non-A] sequence elements), and any combinations thereof. Exemplary embodiments of such non-coding elements may be found, for example, in WO2011015347, WO2017053297, US 10519189, US 10494399, W02007024708, W02007036366, WO2017060314, WO2016005324, W02005038030, WO2017036889, WO2017162266, and WO2017162461 , each of which is incorporated herein by referenced in its entirety.
Formats
At least four formats useful for RNA pharmaceutical compositions (e.g., immunogenic compositions or vaccines) have been developed, namely non-modified uridine containing mRNA (uRNA), nucleosidemodified mRNA (modRNA), self-amplifying mRNA (saRNA), and trans-amplifying RNAs.
Features of a non-modified uridine platform may include, for example, one or more of intrinsic adjuvant effect, good tolerability and safety, and strong antibody and T cell responses.
Features of modified uridine (e.g., pseudouridine) platform may include reduced adjuvant effect, blunted immune innate immune sensor activating capacity and thus augmented antigen expression, good tolerability and safety, and strong antibody and CD4-T cell responses. As noted herein, the present disclosure provides an insight that such strong antibody and CD4 T cell responses may be particularly useful for vaccination.
Features of self-amplifying platform may include, for example, long duration of polypeptide (e.g., protein) expression, good tolerability and safety, higher likelihood for efficacy with very low vaccine dose.
In some embodiments, a self-amplifying platform (e.g., saRNA) comprises a nucleic acid molecule, encoding both a replicase (e.g., a viral replicase) and a gene of interest, wherein the nucleic acid molecule is capable of being replicated by said replicase in cis (c/s-replication system). In some embodiments, a trans-amplifying platform (e.g., taRNA) comprises two nucleic acid molecules, wherein one nucleic acid molecule encodes a replicase (e.g., a viral replicase) and the other nucleic acid molecule is capable of being
replicated (e.g., a replicon) by said replicase in trans (trans-replication system). In some embodiments, a self/trans-amplifying platform (e.g., RNA) comprises a plurality of nucleic acid molecules, wherein said nucleic acids encode a plurality of replicases and/or replicons.
In some embodiments, a trans-replication system comprises the presence of both nucleic acid molecules in a single host cell.
In some such embodiments, a nucleic acid encoding a replicase (e.g., a viral replicase) is not capable of self-replication in a target cell and/or target organism. In some such embodiments, a nucleic acid encoding a replicase (e.g., a viral replicase) lacks at least one conserved sequence element important for (-) strand synthesis based on a (+) strand template and/or for (+) strand synthesis based on a (-) strand template.
In some embodiments, a self-amplifying RNA comprises a 5’-cap; in some trans- replication systems, at least an RNA encoding a replicase is capped. Without wishing to be bound by any one theory, it has been found that a 5’-cap can be important for high level expression of a gene of interest in trans.
In some embodiments, a self/trans-amplifying platform does not require propagation of virus particles (e.g., is not associated with undesired virus-particle formation). In some embodiments, a self/trans-amplifying platform is not capable of forming virus particles.
In some embodiments, an RNA may comprise an Internal Ribosomal Entry Site (IRES) element. In some embodiments, an RNA does not comprise an IRES site; in particular, in some embodiments, an saRNA does not comprise an IRES site. In some such embodiments, translation of a gene of interest and/or replicase is not driven by an IRES element. In some embodiments, an IRES element is substituted by a 5’-cap. In some such embodiments, substitution by a 5’-cap does not affect the sequence of a polypeptide encoded by an RNA.
In some embodiments, a complex described herein comprises modRNA, saRNA, taRNA, or uRNA. In some embodiments, a complex comprises modRNA. In some embodiments, a complex comprises saRNA. In some embodiments, a complex comprises taRNA. In some embodiments, a complex comprises uRNA.
Methods of Use
Particles described herein are useful in the treatment and prophylaxis in a subject of diseases, disorders, and conditions described herein. In some embodiments, the present disclosure provides a method of treating a disease, disorder or condition comprising administering to a patient a composition comprising particles described
herein. In some embodiments, the present disclosure provides use of a composition comprising particles described herein for the treatment of a disease, disorder, or condition. In some embodiments, a disease, disorder, or condition is an infectious disease, cancer, an autoimmune disease, or a rare disease.
In some embodiments, an infectious disease is caused by or associated with a viral pathogen. In some embodiments, a viral pathogen is of a family selected from poxviridae, rhabdoviridae, filoviridae, paramyxoviridae, hepadnaviridae, coronaviridae, caliciviridae, picornaviridae, reoviridae, retroviridae, and orthomyxoviridae. In some embodiments, an infectious disease is caused by or associated with a virus selected from SARS-CoV-2, influenza, Crimean-Congo Hemorhhagic Fever (CCHF), Ebola virus, Lassa virus, Marburg virus, HIV, Nipah virus, and MERS-CoV.
In some embodiments, an infectious disease is caused by or associated with a bacterial pathogen. In some embodiments, a bacterial pathogen is of a species selected from Actinomyces israelii, bacillus antracis, Bacteroides fragilis, Bordetella pertussis, Borrelia burgdorferi, Borrelia garinii, Borrelia afzelii, Borrelia recurrentis, Brucella abortus, Brucella canis, Brucella melitensis, Brucella suis, Campolobacter jejuni, Chlamydia pneumoniae, Chlamydia trachomatis, Chlamydophila psittaci, Clostridium botulinum, Clostridium difficile, Clostridium perfringens, Clostridium tetani, Corynebacterium idphteriae, Ehrlichia canis, Ehrlichia chaffeensis, Enterococcus faecalis, Enterococcus faecium, Escherichia coli, Francisella tularensis, Haemophilus influenzae, Helicobacter pylori, Klebsiella pneumoniae, Legionella pneumophila, Leptospira, Listeria monocytogenes, Mycobacterium leprae, Mycobacterium tuberculosis, Mycoplasma pneumoniae, Neisseria gonorrhoeae, Neisseria meningitidis, Pseudomonas aeruginosa, Nocardia asteroids, Rickettsia ricektssii, Salmonella typhi, Salmonella typhimurium, Shigella sonnei, Shigella dysenteriae, Staphylococcus aureus, Staphylococcus epidermidis, Staphylococcus saprophyticus, Streptococcus agalactiae, Streptococcus pneumoniae, Streptococcus pyogenes, Streptococcus viridans, Treponema pallidum, Vibrio cholerae, and Yersinia pestis.
In some embodiments, an infectious disease is caused by or associated with a parasite. In some embodiments, a parasite is of a family selected from Plasmodium, Leishmania, Cryptosporidium, Entamoeba, Trypanosomas, Schistosomes, Ascaris, Echinococcus and Taeniidae.
In some embodiments, a disease, disorder, or condition is a cancer. In some embodiments, a cancer is selected from bladder cancer, breast cancer, colorectal
cancer, kidney cancer, lung cancer, lymphoma, melanoma, oral/oropharyngeal cancer, pancreatic cancer, prostate cancer, thyroid cancer, and uterine cancer.
In some embodiments, a disease, disorder, or condition is a genetic disorder. In some embodiments, a genetic disorder is associated with a gain-of-function mutation or a loss- of-function mutation.
In some embodiments, a disease, disorder, or condition is an autoimmune disease. In some embodiments, an autoimmune disease is selected from addison disease, celiac disease, rheumatoid arthritis, lupus, inflammatory bowel disease, dermatomyositis, multiple sclerosis, diabetes, guillain-barre syndrome, chronic inflammatory demyelinating polyneuropathy, psoriasis, pernicious anemia, graves’ disease, hashimoto’s thyroiditis, myasthenia gravis, and vasculitis sjorgen syndrome.
In some embodiments, a disease, disorder, or condition is a rare disease. As described herein, a rare disease refers to a life-threatening or chronically debilitating diseases which are of such low prevalence (e.g., fewer than 1/2000 people) that special combined efforts are needed to address them.
In some embodiments, the present disclosure provides complexes that can selectively target particular systems within a body. As used herein, reference to “targeting” a particular system refers to causing increased expression of RNA derived from cargo in the complex in the desired system. For example, in some embodiments, complexes described herein can selectively target the lungs, liver, spleen, heart, brain, lymph nodes, bladder, kidneys, and pancreas. As described herein, a complex “selectively targets” an organ when a single target expresses mRNA in an amount that is 65% or greater than expression in other organs post administration (e.g., 65% or more of mRNA throughout the body is expressed from a single organ, with the remaining 35% distributed between one or more different organs). In some embodiments, a complex described herein selectively targets the lungs. In some embodiments, a complex described herein selectively targets the liver. In some embodiments, a complex described herein selectively targets the spleen. In some embodiments, a complex described herein selectively targets the heart.
Methods of Delivery
The present disclosure provides, among other things, a particle that is incorporated into a composition (e.g., a pharmaceutical composition or a pharmaceutical formulation, as referred to herein) to be administered to a subject. For example, in some embodiments, a composition comprising particles described herein is administered as a monotherapy.
In some embodiments, a a composition comprising particles described herein is administered as part of a combination therapy. In some embodiments, a concentration of total RNA (e.g., a total concentration of all of the one or more RNA molecules) in a composition described herein is of about 0.01 mg/ml_ to about 0.5 mg/ml_, or about 0.05 mg/ml_ to about 0.1 mg/mL.
Compositions (also referred to as pharmaceutical compositions) may additionally comprise a pharmaceutically acceptable excipient, which, as used herein, includes any and all solvents, dispersion media, diluents, or other liquid vehicles, dispersion or suspension aids, surface active agents, isotonic agents, thickening or emulsifying agents, preservatives, solid binders, lubricants and the like, as suited to the particular dosage form desired. Remington's The Science and Practice of Pharmacy, 21st Edition, A. R. Gennaro (Lippincott, Williams & Wilkins, Baltimore, MD, 2006; incorporated herein by reference in its entirety) discloses various excipients used in formulating pharmaceutical compositions and known techniques for the preparation thereof. Except insofar as any conventional excipient medium is incompatible with a substance or its derivatives, such as by producing any undesirable biological effect or otherwise interacting in a deleterious manner with any other component(s) of the pharmaceutical composition, its use is contemplated to be within the scope of this disclosure.
In some embodiments, an excipient is approved for use in humans and for veterinary use. In some embodiments, an excipient is approved by the United States Food and Drug Administration. In some embodiments, an excipient is pharmaceutical grade. In some embodiments, an excipient meets the standards of the United States Pharmacopoeia (USP), the European Pharmacopoeia (EP), the British Pharmacopoeia, and/or the International Pharmacopoeia.
Pharmaceutically acceptable excipients used in the manufacture of pharmaceutical compositions include, but are not limited to, inert diluents, dispersing and/or granulating agents, surface active agents and/or emulsifiers, disintegrating agents, binding agents, preservatives, buffering agents, lubricating agents, and/or oils. Such excipients may optionally be included in pharmaceutical formulations. Excipients such as cocoa butter and suppository waxes, coloring agents, coating agents, sweetening, flavoring, and/or perfuming agents can be present in the composition, according to the judgment of the formulator.
General considerations in the formulation and/or manufacture of pharmaceutical agents may be found, for example, in Remington: The Science and Practice of Pharmacy 21st ed., Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2005 (incorporated herein by reference in its entirety).
In some embodiments, pharmaceutical compositions provided herein may be formulated with one or more pharmaceutically acceptable carriers or diluents as well as any other known adjuvants and excipients in accordance with conventional techniques such as those disclosed in Remington: The Science and Practice of Pharmacy 21st ed., Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2005 (incorporated herein by reference in its entirety).
Pharmaceutical complexes and compositions described herein can be administered by appropriate methods known in the art. As will be appreciated by a skilled artisan, the route and/or mode of administration may depend on a number of factors, including, e.g., but not limited to stability and/or pharmacokinetics and/or pharmacodynamics of pharmaceutical compositions described herein.
In some embodiments, pharmaceutical compositions described herein are formulated for parenteral administration, which includes modes of administration other than enteral and topical administration, usually by injection, and includes, without limitation, intravenous, intramuscular, intraarterial, intrathecal, intracapsular, intraorbital, intracardiac, intradermal, intraperitoneal, transtracheal, subcutaneous, subcuticular, intraarticular, subcapsular, subarachnoid, intraspinal, epidural and intrasternal injection and infusion. In some embodiments, pharmaceutical compositions described herein are formulated for intravenous administration. In some embodiments, pharmaceutically acceptable carriers that may be useful for intravenous administration include sterile aqueous solutions or dispersions and sterile powders for preparation of sterile injectable solutions or dispersions.
In some particular embodiments, pharmaceutical compositions described herein are formulated for subcutaneous (s.c) administration. In some particular embodiments, pharmaceutical compositions described herein are formulated for intramuscular (i.m) administration.
Therapeutic compositions typically must be sterile and stable under the conditions of manufacture and storage. The composition can be formulated as a solution, dispersion, powder (e.g., lyophilized powder), microemulsion, lipid nanoparticles, or other ordered structure suitable to high drug concentration. The carrier can be a solvent or dispersion medium containing, for example, water, ethanol, polyol (for example, glycerol, propylene glycol, and liquid polyethylene glycol, and the like), and suitable mixtures thereof. The proper fluidity can be maintained, for example, by the use of a coating such as lecithin, by the maintenance of the required particle size in the case of dispersion and by the use of surfactants. In many cases, it will be preferable to include isotonic agents, for example, sugars, polyalcohols such as mannitol, sorbitol, or sodium chloride in the composition.
In some embodiments, prolonged absorption of the injectable compositions can be brought about by including in the composition an agent that delays absorption, for example, monostearate salts and gelatin.
Sterile injectable solutions can be prepared by incorporating the active compound in the required amount in an appropriate solvent with one or a combination of ingredients enumerated above, as required, followed by sterilization microfiltration.
In some embodiments, dispersions are prepared by incorporating the active compound into a sterile vehicle that contains a basic dispersion medium and the required other ingredients from those enumerated above. In the case of sterile powders for the preparation of sterile injectable solutions, the preferred methods of preparation are vacuum drying and freeze-drying (lyophilization) that yield a powder of the active ingredient plus any additional desired ingredient from a previously steri le-f i Itered solution thereof.
Examples of suitable aqueous and nonaqueous carriers which may be employed in the pharmaceutical compositions described herein include water, ethanol, polyols (such as glycerol, propylene glycol, polyethylene glycol, and the like), and suitable mixtures thereof, vegetable oils, such as olive oil, and injectable organic esters, such as ethyl oleate. Proper fluidity can be maintained, for example, by the use of coating materials, such as lecithin, by the maintenance of the required particle size in the case of dispersions, and by the use of surfactants.
These compositions may also contain adjuvants such as preservatives, wetting agents, emulsifying agents and dispersing agents. Prevention of the presence of microorganisms may be ensured both by sterilization procedures, and by the inclusion of various antibacterial and antifungal agents, for example, paraben, chlorobutanol, phenol sorbic acid, and the like. It may also be desirable to include isotonic agents, such as sugars, sodium chloride, and the like into pharmaceutical compositions described herein. In addition, prolonged absorption of the injectable pharmaceutical form may be brought about by the inclusion of agents which delay absorption such as aluminum monostearate and gelatin.
Formulations of pharmaceutical compositions described herein may be prepared by any method known or hereafter developed in the art of pharmacology. In general, such preparatory methods include the step of bringing active ingredient(s) into association with a diluent or another excipient and/or one or more other accessory ingredients, and then, if necessary and/or desirable, shaping and/or packaging the product into a desired single- or multi-dose unit.
A pharmaceutical composition in accordance with the present disclosure may be prepared, packaged, and/or sold in bulk, as a single unit dose, and/or as a plurality of single unit doses. As used herein, a "unit dose" is discrete amount of the pharmaceutical composition comprising a predetermined amount of at least one RNA product produced using a system and/or method described herein.
In some embodiments, an active agent that may be included in a pharmaceutical composition described herein is or comprises a therapeutic agent administered in a combination therapy described herein. Pharmaceutical compositions described herein can be administered in combination therapy, i.e., combined with other agents. In some embodiments, such therapeutic agents may include agents leading to depletion or functional inactivation of regulatory T cells. For example, in some embodiments, a combination therapy can include a provided pharmaceutical composition with at least one immune checkpoint inhibitor.
In some embodiments, pharmaceutical composition described herein may be administered in conjunction with radiotherapy and/or autologous peripheral stem cell or bone marrow transplantation.
In some embodiments, a pharmaceutical composition described herein can be frozen to allow long-term storage.
Although the descriptions of pharmaceutical compositions provided herein are principally directed to pharmaceutical compositions that are suitable for administration to humans, it will be understood by the skilled artisan that such compositions are generally suitable for administration to animals of all sorts. Modification of pharmaceutical compositions suitable for administration to humans in order to render the compositions suitable for administration to various animals is well understood, and the ordinarily skilled veterinary pharmacologist can design and/or perform such modification with merely ordinary, if any, experimentation.
Exemplary Embodiments
The following numbered embodiments, while non-limiting, are exemplary of certain aspects of the present disclosure:
Embodiment 1 . A compound represented by formula I:
L1— X1— T1
G- L3— N
\2- X2- T2
I
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein:
L1 and L2 are each independently an optionally substituted C1-C30 aliphatic group;
L3 is a bond, optionally substituted C1-C10 aliphatic group, or optionally substituted 2- to 10-membered heteroaliphatic group;
X1 and X2 are each independently selected from a bond, -OC(O)-, -C(O)O-, -S(O)2N(R1)- , -N(R1)S(O)2, -S(O)-, -S(O)2-, -S(O)2C(R1)2-, -OC(S)C(R1)2-, -C(R1)2C(S)O-, and -S-, wherein one or both of X1 or X2 is selected from -S(O)2N(R1)-, -N(R1)S(O)2, -S(O)-, - S(O)2-, -S(O)2C(R1)2-, -OC(S)C(R1)2-, -C(R1)2C(S)O-, and -S-; each R1 is, independently, at each instance, optionally substituted Ci-C2o aliphatic or H;
T1 and T2 are each independently an optionally substituted C3-C30 aliphatic;
G is -N(R2)C(S)N(R2)2, -OH, -N(R2)2, -N+(R3)3, -N(R5)C(O)R3, -N(R5)S(O)2R3, - N(R5)C(O)N(R3)2, -CH(N-R2), or -R4; each R2 is, independently, at each instance, selected from the group consisting of H, optionally substituted Ci-Ce aliphatic or OR3; or two instances of R2 come together with the atoms to which they are attached to form an optionally substituted 4- to 12-membered heterocycle ring or an optionally substituted 4- to 12-membered heteroaryl ring; each R3 is, independently, at each instance, selected from the group consisting of H and optionally substituted C1-C10 aliphatic; and
R4 is optionally substituted 4- to 12-membered heterocycle, optionally substituted 4- to 12 membered heteroaryl, Ce-Ci2 aryl substituted with one or more of -(CH2)o-6-OH or - (CH2)O 6-N(R5)2, or Cs-Ci2 cycloaliphatic substituted with one or more of oxo, -(CH2)o 6- OH, or -(CH2)O-6-N(R5)2; each R5 is independently selected from H and optionally substituted Ci-Ce aliphatic.
Embodiment 2. The compound of Embodiment 1 , wherein L1 and L2 are each C1- C30 alkylene.
Embodiment 3. The compound of Embodiments 1 or 2, wherein L1 and L2 are each independently -(CH2)6 -10- ■
Embodiment 4. The compound of any one of Embodiments 1 -3, wherein L1 and L2 are the same.
Embodiment 5. The compound of any one of Embodiments 1 -3, wherein L1 and L2 are different.
Embodiment 6. The compound of any one of Embodiments 1 -5, wherein X1 and X2 are each independently selected from a -S(O)2N(R1)-, -N(R1)S(O)2, -S(O)-, -S(O)2-, - S(O)2C(R1)2-, -OC(S)C(R1)2-, -C(R1)2C(S)O-, and -S-.
Embodiment 7. The compound of any one of Embodiments 1 -5, wherein one of X1 and X2 is a bond, -OC(O)-, or -C(O)O-, and the other of X1 and X2 is -S(O)2N(R1)-, - N(R1)S(O)2, -S(O)-, -S(O)2-, -S(O)2C(R1)2-, -OC(S)C(R1)2-, -C(R1)2C(S)O-, or -S-.
Embodiment 8. The compound of any one of Embodiments 1-5, wherein X1 is - S(O)2N(R1)-, where R1 is C1-C10 aliphatic, and X2 is -C(O)O-.
Embodiment 9. The compound of any one of Embodiments 1 -5, wherein X1 and X2 are each -S(O)2N(R1)-, where each R1 is independently R1 is C1-C10 aliphatic.
Embodiment 10. The compound of any one of Embodiments 1 -5, wherein X1 and
X2 are the same.
Embodiment 11 . The compound of any one of Embodiments 1 -5, wherein X1 and
X2 are different.
Embodiment 12. The compound of any one of Embodiments 1 -11 , wherein T1 and T2 are each independently selected from optionally substituted Cs-C2o alkyl.
Embodiment 13. The compound of any one of Embodiments 1 -11 , wherein T1 and
Embodiment 14. The compound of Embodiment 1 , wherein a moiety -L1-X1-T1 is selected from the group consisting of:
Embodiment 15. The compound of Embodiment 1 or Embodiment 14, wherein a moiety -L2-X2-T2 is selected from the group consisting of:
Embodiment 16. The compound of Embodiment 1 , wherein a moiety -L1-X1-T1 and moiety -L2-X2-T2 are each independently selected from:
Embodiment 17. The compound of any one of Embodiments 1 -16, wherein L3 is optionally substituted C1-C10 aliphatic.
Embodiment 18. The compound of any one of Embodiments 1 -17, wherein G is - N(R2)C(S)N(R2)2 or -N(R5)S(O)2R3.
Embodiment 19. The compound of Embodiment 18, wherein G is - N(R2)C(S)N(R2)2.
Embodiment 20. The compound of Embodiment 19, wherein G is -N(H)C(S)N(R2)2, where each R2 is selected from optionally substituted Ci-Ce aliphatic and OH.
Embodiment 21 . The compound of any one of Embodiments 1 -17, wherein G is - OH.
Embodiment 22. The compound of any one of Embodiments 1 -17, wherein G is optionally substituted 4- to 12-membered heterocycle.
Embodiment 23. The compound of any one of Embodiments 1 -17, wherein G is selected from:
Ila or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof. Embodiment 27. The compound of Embodiment 1 , wherein the compound is represented by Formula lib:
lib or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
Embodiment 28. The compound of Embodiment 1 , wherein the compound is represented by Formula lie:
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
Embodiment 29. The compound of Embodiment 1 , wherein the compound is represented by Formula Illa:
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
Embodiment 30. The compound of Embodiment 1 , wherein the compound is represented by Formula lllb:
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
Embodiment 31 . The compound of Embodiment 1 , wherein the compound is represented by Formula I lie:
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
Embodiment 32. The compound of Embodiment 1 , wherein the compound is represented by Formula 11 Id:
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
Embodiment 33. The compound of Embodiment 1 , wherein the compound is represented by Formula llle:
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
Embodiment 34. The compound of Embodiment 1 , wherein the compound is represented by Formula lllf:
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
Illg or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
Embodiment 36. The compound of Embodiment 1 , wherein the compound is selected from Table 1 .
Embodiment 37. A particle comprising a compound of any one of Embodiments 1 - 36, and a nucleic acid.
Embodiment 38. The particle of Embodiment 37, wherein the nucleic acid is RNA, DNA, or mixtures thereof.
Embodiment 39. The particle of Embodiment 38, the RNA is mRNA.
Embodiment 40. The particle of Embodiment 39, wherein the RNA is modRNA, circRNA, saRNA, taRNA, or uRNA.
Embodiment 41 . The particle of Embodiment 37, wherein the DNA is linear DNA, plasmid DNA, minicircle DNA, nanoplasmid DNA, doggybone DNA, or a transposon.
Embodiment 42. The particle of any one of Embodiments 37-41 , wherein the particle further comprises one or more of a helper lipid, a polymer-conjugated lipid, or a sterol.
Embodiment 43. The particle of Embodiment 42, wherein the helper lipid is a phospholipid.
Embodiment 44. The particle of Embodiment 43, wherein the phospholipid is selected from: phosphatidylcholines, phosphatidylethanolamines, phosphatidylglycerols, phosphatidic acids, phosphatidylserines and sphingomyelins, more preferably selected from the group consisting of distearoylphosphatidylcholine (DSPC), dioleoylphosphatidylcholine (DOPC), dimyristoylphosphatidylcholine (DMPC), dipentadecanoylphosphatidylcholine, dilauroylphosphatidylcholine, dipalmitoylphosphatidylcholine (DPPC), diarachidoylphosphatidylcholine (DAPC), dibehenoylphosphatidylcholine (DBPC), ditricosanoylphosphatidylcholine (DTPC), dilignoceroylphatidylcholine (DLPC), palmitoyloleoyl-phosphatidylcholine (POPC), 1 ,2- di-O-octadecenyl-sn-glycero-3-phosphocholine (18:0 Diether PC), 1 -oleoyl-2- cholesterylhemisuccinoyl-sn-glycero-3-phosphocholine (OChemsPC), 1 -hexadecyl-sn- glycero-3-phosphocholine (C16 Lyso PC), dioleoylphosphatidylethanolamine (DOPE), distearoyl-phosphatidylethanolamine (DSPE), dipalmitoyl-phosphatidylethanolamine (DPPE), dimyristoyl-phosphatidylethanolamine (DMPE), dilauroylphosphatidylethanolamine (DLPE), diphytanoyl-phosphatidylethanolamine (DPyPE), and combinations thereof.
Embodiment 45. The particle of any one of Embodiments 42-44, wherein the polymer-conjugated lipid is selected from the group consisting of a polyethylene glycol) (PEG)-conjugated lipid, a poly(sarcosine) (pSar)-conjugated lipid, a poly(aminoethoxy ethoxy acetic acid) (pAEEA)-conjugated lipid; and a poly(2-methylaminoethoxy ethoxy acetic acid) (pmAEEA)-conjugated lipid.
Embodiment 46. The particle of any one of Embodiments 42-45, wherein the polymer-conjugated lipid is a PEG-lipid selected from PEG-DAG, PEG-PE, PEG-S-DAG, PEG2000-DMG, PEG-cer, a PEG dialkyoxypropylcarbamate, ALC-0159, and combinations thereof.
Embodiment 47. The particle of any one of Embodiments 42-46, wherein the sterol is selected from p-sitosterol, stigmasterol, cholesterol, cholecalciferol, ergocalciferol, calcipotriol, botulin, lupeol, ursolic acid, oleanolic acid, cycloartenol, lanosterol, or a- tocopherol.
Embodiment 48. The particle of any one of Embodiments 42-47, wherein the particle is characterized by an N/P ratio that is about 4 to about 16.
Embodiment 49. A method of increasing or causing increased expression of RNA in a target in a subject, the method comprising administering to the subject a composition comprising particles of any one of Embodiments 42-48.
Embodiment 50. The method of Embodiment 49, wherein the target is selected from the lungs, liver, spleen, heart, brain, lymph nodes, bladder, kidneys, and pancreas.
Embodiment 51 . A method of treating a disease, disorder, or condition in a subject comprising administering to the subject a composition comprising the particles of any one of Embodiments 42-48.
Embodiment 52. The method of Embodiment 51 , wherein the disease, disorder, or condition is an infectious disease, cancer, a genetic disorder, an autoimmune disease, or a rare disease.
Embodiment 53. The method of any one of Embodiments 48-52, wherein the particle is administered parenterally or intranasally.
Embodiment 54. The method of Embodiment 53, wherein the particle is administered intramuscularly, subcutaneously, intradermally, or intravenously.
Embodiment 55. A particle of any one of Embodiments 42-48 for use as a medicament.
Embodiment 56. A particle of any one of Embodiments 42-48 for use in the treatment and/or prevention of a disease or disorder, wherein the disease or disorder is an infectious disease, cancer, a genetic disorder, an autoimmune disease, or a rare disease.
EXAMPLES
The Examples provided herein document and support certain aspects of the present disclosure but are not intended to limit the scope of any claim. The following non-limiting examples are provided to further illustrate certain teachings provided by the present disclosure. Those of skill in the art, in light of the present application, will appreciate that various changes can be made in the specific embodiments that are illustrated in the present Examples without departing from the spirit and scope of the present teachings. The following abbreviations may be used in the Examples below: aq. (aqueous); ACN (acetonitrile); BLI (Bioluminescent Imaging); CHOL (cholesterol); d (day or days); Da/kDa (Daltons/kiloDaltons); DCM (dichloromethane); DLS (dynamic light scattering); DMF (N,N-dimethylformamide); DIPEA (N,N-diisopropylethylamine); DMAP (4- dimethylaminopyridine); DODMA (1 ,2-dioleyloxy-3-dimethylaminopropane), DOPE (1 ,2- dioleoyl-sn-glycero-3-phosphoethanolamine); DMSO (dimethyl sulfoxide); DSPC (distearoylphosphatidylcholine); EA (ethyl acetate); ee (enantiomeric excess); equiv. (equivalent); ELSD (evaporative light scattering detector) EtOH (Ethanol); h or hr (hour or hours); Hex (hexanes); HPLC (high-performance liquid chromatography); i.m (intramuscular); i.v (intravenous); KHMDS (potassium bis(trimethylsilyl)amide); LAH (lithium aluminum hydride); LCMS (liquid chromatography-mass spectrometry); LDA (lithium diisopropylamide); LiHMDS (lithium bis(trimethylsilyl)amide); LNP (lipid nanoparticle); MeOH (methanol); min (minute or minutes); NMR (nuclear magnetic resonance); PBS (phosphate buffered saline); Pd/C (palladium on carbon); PEG-DMG
(1 ,2-dimyristoyl-rac-glycero-3-methoxypolyethylene glycol-2000); PEI (polyethyleneimine); PPhaO (triphenylphosphine oxide); Pt/C (platinum on carbon); rb (round-bottomed); Rf (retention factor); rt or RT (room temperature); s.c (subcutaneous); SM (starting material); TEA (triethylamine); THF (tetrahydrofuran); THP (tetrahydropyran); TLC (thin layer chromatography); TsOH (p-toluenesulfonic acid or tosylic acid); and UV (ultraviolet).
Reference to an Alfa-Tag or Alfa peptide refers to a peptide of sequence SEQ.ID.NO. 1. Reference to NbAlfa refers to a VHH domain comprising the CDR1 sequence SEQ.ID.NO. 5, the CDR2 sequence SEQ.ID.NO. 6, and the CDR3 sequence SEQ.ID.NO. 7. Reference to aCD3-VHH refers to an anti-CD3 binding VHH comprising the CDR1 sequence SEQ.ID.NO. 8, the CDR2 sequence SEQ.ID.NO. 9, and the CDR3 sequence SEQ.ID.NO. 10.
Example 1 : Preparation and characterization of sulfonamide lipids Synthesis of Fragments:
The present example provides a method preparing tail-end-fragments with tail-linkers via unoxidized junction residue “-S-“ having an oxidation state of -2.
Example compounds BNT-21 , BNT-46, and BNT-20 were prepared according to the methods provided above.
Thiolipid with linker residue -S-
General procedure for the synthesis of thioethers from mercaptanes and ct-o- bromoalcohol
To a solution of 1 M NaOEt (40 ml_, 40 mmol, 1 ,33 equivalents) in anhydrous ethanol made upon addition of NaH (60% suspension in mineral oil) and EtOH, was added 1.1 equivalents of a thiol (33 mmol) and 30 mmol of the appropriate a-o-bromoalcohol successively. The reaction mixture was stirred under dry nitrogen for 48 hours at room temperature. The reaction mixture was evaporated to an oil/solid mixture, then taken up in an emulsion of either n-hexane or diethyl ether (150ml_) and 10% aqueous Nah PCh (150 mL) dependent on the solubility of the product. The organic phase was washed with brine (150 mL), then dried over anhydrous NaaSCh. After filtration of the salt, the crude product was purified by flash chromatography on silica gel using ethyl acetate/n-hexane. The product fractions were identified using ELSD and UV detectors of the effluent. Evaporation of the product fractions resulted in the thiolipid alcohol as colorless oil
, , , , , 0.88, 2t, 6H; 13C-NMR (CDCh) 6 [ppm]: 63.08; 39.34; 36.75; 32.87; 32.75; 29.76; 29.56; 29.49; 29.40; 29.24; 28.93; 28.88; 25.71 ; 25.54; 22.99; 14.11 (Me); 10.80(Me); Rf: 0.15 (n-hexane/EtOAc: 9/1 , v/v).
General procedure for the synthesis of thioethers from thioacteates and a-o- bromoalcohol
To a solution of 1 M NaOMe (26 mL, 6.1 mmol, 1 ,2 equivalents) in anhydrous methanol made upon addition of NaH (60% suspension in mineral oil) and MeOH, was added at 0 °C, 1 equivalent of a thioacetate (5.1 mmol) and 1.2 equivalents (6.1 mmol) of the appropriate a-o-bromoalcohol successively. The reaction mixture was allowed to come to room temperature and was then refluxed under dry nitrogen for 20 hours. The reaction mixture was evaporated to an oil/solid mixture, then taken up in an emulsion of CHCh and 10% citric acid (100 mL). The organic phase was washed with brine (100 mL), then dried over anhydrous NaaSCh. After filtration of the salt, the crude product was purified by flash chromatography on silica gel using ethyl acetate/n-hexane. The product fractions were identified using ELSD and UV detectors of the effluent. Evaporation of the product fractions resulted in the thiolipid alcohol as colorless oil representing the precursor for the tail group aldehydes.
The present example also provides synthesis of thiolipid alcohols from two alcohols in a one pot reaction sequence:
Mesylation of 2-butyl-octanol
To a racemic mixture of 2-butyl-octanol (5.05 mmol, 941 mg,1 OmL), DMAP (10 mg), and trimethylamine (15mmol, 2.09ml_) in dry THF (10 mL) was added methane sulfonic anhydride (7.74mmol, 1.348g). The reaction was stirred at rt and gradually becomes
slightly yellow. After 2 h at room temperature, the TLC (n-hexane/ethyl acetate 4/1 v/v) reveals conversion to a product that is stainable with molybdate. In turn 2-butyl-octanol running at almost the same Rf (0.54) as the product inhibits staining thus remains as a white spot on the TLC.
The mesylate product may then be converted further to the thioacetate without further purification.
To the mesylation reaction mixture was added potassium thioacetate (11.99 mmol, 1.37g) and 10 mg of teraethylammonium tetrafluoroborate. After the addition of the thioacetate, the reaction mixture was stirred three hours. Then TEA (15 mmol) and EtOH (15 mL) were added to the reaction mixture to improve the solubility of the thioacetate. The reaction mixture was stirred for 16 hours at rt then kept at 70°C for three hours. TLC revealed that the original mesylate band was converted to a high Rf-spot (Rf=0.86, n- hexane/ethyl acetate 4/1 (v/v) that is readily stained by molybdate and UV-absorbent at 254 nm.
The product, was evaporated to a solid in vacuo at maximally 40 °C. It was taken up by an emulsion of n-hexane (50 mL) and 1 M aqueous NaOH(50mL). The n-hexane was concentrated to a pale yellow oil being mainly to be converted further to the branched thiolipid alcohol according to the subsequent general procedures.
1H-NMR (CDCh) 5 [ppm]: 3.62 t, 2H; 2.46 m, 4H; 1 .44-1 .52 m, 4H; 1-1 .43 m, 28H; 1 .5 m, 6H; 13C-NMR (CDCh) 5 [ppm]: 63.03; 37.93; 37.23; 33.20; 32.89; 32.77; 31 .86; 29.75; 29.62; 29.46; 29.34; 29.17; 28.89; 28.85; 26.59; 26.69; 22.99; 22.66; 14.10 (Me); 14.09 (Me); IR (neat): [cm 1] 3300 (s); 2922 (I); 2853(1); 1458 (s); 1055 (s); 723 (s); MS (APCI) m/z 345.3291 (100%) (C21 H44OS + H)+.
General procedure for the formation of a tetramethyl thiouronium salt
To one equivalent of a primary aliphatic halide (44.3 mmol), 1.1 equivalent of tetramethylurea (48.7mmol) and 0.015 equivalents of Lil (0.7mmol) were added and heated to 60°C. The tetramethyl urea dissolved within one hour to yield a yellow liquid. Prolonged reaction led to the formation of a white precipitate which accumulated
throughout the subsequent heating period. After 23 hours, the entire reaction mixture had become a solid. The latter was suspended in n-hexane and passed through a Schlenk frit. The tetramethyl urea was washed out with hexane, which is indicated by absence of a UV-absorbing (I: 256 nm) filtrate. The product was obtained as a white bromide.
1 H-NMR (CDCI3) 5 [ppm]: 5.6 s, 12H; 3.12 m, 2H; 1.69 m, 2H; 1.53 m, 2H; 1.1 -1.35 m, 6H; 0.93 d, J(6.3Hz), 3H; 0.87 d, J(6.6Hz), 6H.
General method for the formation of a thiol from a tetramethyl thiouronium salt
To an aqueous 5N NaOH solution(80 ml_, 400 mmol) was added a thiauronium salt (30 mmol). The suspension became an emulsion in an exothermic reaction. After the heat evolution ceased, reaction mixture was stirred for one hour at room temperature. The organic phase was extracted with diethyl ether (150 ml_). The aqueous phase was neutralized with 10% NaHaPC and extracted with diethyl ether (100 ml_). The combined organic phases were washed with 10% NaH2PO4 and dried over anhydrous Na2SO4. After removal of the salt by filtration, the thiol was obtained as a colorless oil of bad odor.
General procedure for the synthesis of a tail group aldehydes
To a stirred emulsion/solution of thiolipid tail alcohol (1 equivalent; 25mmol), 10 equivalents of diisopropylethyl amine (250mmol) and 10 equivalents of anhydrous DMSO (250mml), was added either 15 mL DCM or the amount that renders a possible emulsion homogeneous. To this solution was added, under dry nitrogen portion-wise, 7 equivalents of SOs-complex with pyridine (176 mmol). The mixture was magnetically stirred under dry nitrogen. The addition of the SOs-complex leads to a slight exothermic reaction so that the reaction mixture may be temporarily cooled by an ice bath. After continuous stirring for more than 2 hours at room temperature the reaction is found to be complete by TLC (hexane, ethyl acetate).
The reaction mixture was transferred into 10% aqueous NaH2PO4 (200 mL) and diethyl ether (200mL). After the phase separation occurred, the turbid organic phase was
removed. The turbid aqueous phase was washed twice successively with 10OmL diethyl ether each. The organic phases are combined and passed through a silica 60-plug (height: 30 mm, diameter 55mm) to remove the turbidity resulting from remaining SO3- complex. The filtrate was concentrated to a clear oil that may be chromatographed on silica or used directly for the formation of thiolipids using the following multicomponent reaction.
1H-NMR (CDCI3) 5 [ppm]: 9.78 s, 1 H; 2.46 m, 4H; 2.4312H; 1 .6 m, 4H; 1 .2-1 .45 m ; 0.9 m, 6H; 13C-NMR (CDCh) 5 [ppm]: 202.79 (CHO); 43.86; 39.32; 36.72; 32.83; 32.38; 29.71 ; 29.30; 29.28; 29.17; 29.10; 28.86; 25.53; 22.95; 22.07; 14.07 (Me); 10.78 (Me); ); MS (APCI) m/z 315.2718 (100%) (M+H)+.
1H-NMR (CDCh) 5 [ppm]: 9.78s, 1 H; 2.48 m, 4H; 2.42 t, 2H; 1 .43-1 .66 m 4H; 1 .2-1 .4 m 25H; 0.92 m, 6H; 13C-NMR (CDCh) 5 [ppm]: 202.82 (CHO); 43.87; 37.94; 37.24; 33.20; 32.89; 32.87; 31 .86; 29.70; 29.62; 29.22; 29.08; 29.02; 28.86; 28.81 ; 26.59; 22.99; 22.66; 22.03; 14.10 (Me); 14.09 (Me); IR (neat): [cm 1] 2923 (I); 2853(1); 1726(1) 1456 (s); 756 (s); MS (APCI) m/z 343.3035 (100%) (M+H)+.
General Synthesis of a thiolipid from a head group-amine and two tail group aldehydes
This procedure may also provide pure thiolipids from impure aldehydes made in the previous procedure.
To a magnetically stirred solution of 2-2.8 equivalents (2-2.8 mmol) of tail group aldehyde, anhydrous sodium sulfate (500 mg, 3.51 mmol), in dry dichloromethane (2 mL) was added and 1 equivalent (1 mmol) of head group amine (added as 2 mL of a 0.5M solution of head group amine in DCM) in dry dichloromethane (2 mL). The initially clear
solution became turbid. After one hour at room temperature was added first dichloromethane (10 mL) then solid N[H(B(OAc)3] (2g, 9.44 mmol) in small portion under a stream of dry nitrogen. The turbid solution was stirred for 16 hours at room temperature. The reaction mixture was evaporated to a white paste. The latter was resuspended in an emulsion of diethyl ether/saturated aqueous sodium bicarbonate solution. The organic phase was removed; the aqueous phase was extracted twice with 20 mL diethyl ether each. The ether layers were combined and washed with brine (100 mL), then dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate. The salt is removed by filtration, the filtrate evaporated to a pale yellow or white oil which may be taken up in hexane prior to subjection to
14.09.
1H-NMR (CDCh) 5 [ppm]: 4.2 broad s, 1 H; 2.9 broad s, 2H; 2.76 broad s, 4H; 2.49 m 8H;
1 .59 m, 4H; 1 .2-1 .5 m, 51 H; 0.85 m, 12H; 13C-NMR (CDCh) 5 [ppm]: 65.7 q, JCF (31 Hz); 54.70; 39. 30; 36.70; 32.82; 32.37; 29.71 ; 29.40; 29.23; 28.88; 28.85; 26.92: 25.50; 22.96; 14.08 (Me); 10.77 (Me); 19F-NMR (CDCh) 5 [ppm]: -79; MS (APCI) m/z 726.5855 (100%) (M+H)+.
(2R)-3-(bis(11 -((2-ethylhexyl)thio)undecyl)amino)-2-f luoropropan-1 -ol
1H-NMR (CDCh) 0 [ppm]: 4.65 double-triplet, 1 H; 3,82 double multiplet, 2H; 2.79 double multiplet, 2H; 2.5 m, 8H; 1 .58 m, 4H; 1 .2-1 .5 m; 0.88 m, 12H; 13C-NMR (CDCh) 0 [ppm]:
(BNT-24) 1H-NMR (CDCI3) 5 [ppm] 3.68 m, 2H; 2.61 m, 2H; 2.48 m, 8H; 1 .48-1 .6 m, 6H; 1.2-1.47 m, 60H; 0.89 m, 12 H; 13C-NMR (CDCI3) 5 [ppm] 58.18; 55.55; 53.82; 37.93;
37.23; 33.20; 32.89; 31 .86; 29.76; 29.62; 29.50; 29.22; 28.91 ; 28.85; 27.38; 26.94; 26.58;
22.99; 22.66; 14.11 (Me) ; 14.10 (Me) MS (APCI) m/z: 714.6787 (M)+.
Ill
3-(bis(9-((2-butyloctyl)thio)nonyl)amino)propan-1-ol
was poured into ice-water (50 ml_). From the resulting emulsion, the product was extracted with chloroform (30 ml_). The dark extract was treated with active carbon and subsequently dried with sodium sulfate. After filtration through Celite 545, the filtrate was evaporated to a black solid and a yellow oil. Only the latter was soluble in n-
, , , , , , , , , , , Rf: 3.13 (Hexane/EtOAc: 9/1 ,v/v); MS (APCI) m/z (100%): 421.2805 (M+H)+.
11-((2-ethylhexyl)thio)undecyl methanesulfonate
To 11 -((2-ethylhexyl)thio)undecan-1 -ol (1 equivalent, 12.5 mmol, 4 g), dichloromethane (5 ml_), trietyl amine (3.04 equivalents, 5.3 ml_, 38.0 mmol) and methanesulfonic anhydride (1.53 equivalents, 3.2 g, 18.7 mmol) were added at 0 °C. The reaction was magnetically stirred while coming to room temperature for 2 hours. The reaction mixture was quenched with saturated aqueous NaHCOs(50 ml_), extracted with chloroform (3 x 30 mL) and dried with sodium sulfate. After filtration the salt, the sulfonate can be used without further purification.
MS (APCI) m/z (100%): 395.2650 (M+H)+.
Displacement of the sulfonate group by an amine:
1 -(11 -((2-ethylhexyl)thio)undecyl)azepane
1 equivalent of 11-((2-ethylhexyl)thio)undecyl prop-2-ene-1 -sulfonate (MW: 420.71 , 102 mg, 0.24 mmol), was heated with hexamethylene imine (14.8 equivalents, 400pL, 3.55 mmol) at 80 °C for 24 hours. The resulting biphasic reaction mixture was taken up in chloroform and washed twice with saturated sodium bicarbonate solution. The latter was dried over sodium sulfate. After removal of the salt, residual hexamethyleneimine was coevaporated with toluene four times successively. The resulting oil was chromatographed with n-hexane/ethyl acetate/TEA to afford an oil.
1H-NMR (CDCh) 5 [ppm]: 2.77 m, 4H; 2.56 m, 2H; 2.47 m, 4H; 1 .97 m, 4H ; 1 .72 m 4 H; 1 .59 m, 3H; 1 .2-1 .5 m, 24 H; 0.87 2 t J (11 Hz), 6H; 13C-NMR (CDCh) 5 [ppm]: 58.17; 55.20; 39.34; 36.74; 32.86; 32.40; 29.76; 29.52; 29.49; 29.44; 28.93; 28.88; 27.44; 26.99; 26.65: 26.55; 25.54; 22.98; 14.11 ; 10.80; MS (ESI) m/z (100%): 398.3809 (M + H)+.
N-(cyclopentylmethyl)-11 -((2-ethylhexyl)thio)undecan-1 -amine
1 equivalent of 11 -((2-ethylhexyl)thio)undecyl methanesulfonate (MW: 394.67, 788 mg,
2 mmol) was heated with DIPEA (1.5 equivalents, 538 mg, 3 mmol) and cyclopentylmethaneamine (1.05 equivalents, 208 mg, 2.1 mmol) to 60 °C for 24 hours. The resulting reaction mixture purified on a silica 60 column on a gradient of hexane/EtOAc 100-80/0-20 (v/v) followed by a gradient of hexane/EtOAc/TEA 80-76/20- 19/0-5 (v/v/v). The product fractions were combined.
A suspension of 11 -((2-ethylhexyl)thio)undecanal (2 equivalent; 618 mg; 2mmol), ammonium chloride (1 equivalent, 1 mmol, 53.5 mg) , anhydrous sodium sulfate (50 mg), diisopropyl ethylamine (1 equivalent, 1 mmol, 170pil_) in dichloromethane (5 mL) was magnetically stirred at room temperature for 30 minutes. Under a blanket of nitrogen was added portion wise triacetoxyboronhydride (4 equivalents, 847 mg, 4mmol) within a period of 30 minutes. After the reaction mixture was stirred for 12 hours at room temperature, it was quenched by addition of saturated aqueous sodium bicarbonate (20 mL). The product was extracted with chloroform (2x 20 mL). The organic phase washed with brine and then dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate. After removal of the salt, the crude product containing primary, secondary and tert, amine was purified by chromatography.
Bis(11-((2-ethylhexyl)thio)undecyl)amine via ammonium chloride and tetraisopropoxy titanium
A suspension of 11-((2-ethylhexyl)thio)undecanal (2 equivalent; 3 g; 9.7 mmol), ammonium chloride (1 equivalent, 19.4 mmol, 1039 mg) , tetraisopropoxytitanium (4 equivalents, 19.4 mmol, 5.51 g, 5.74ml_), triethylamine (2 equivalents 19.4 mmol, 1 .96 g, 2.7 mL) in dry ethanol (40 mL) was magnetically stirred under nitrogen at room temperature for 30 minutes. Under a blanket of nitrogen was added sodium boronhydride (2.25 equivalents, 21.82 mmol, 0.825g). After the reaction mixture was stirred for 12 hours at room temperature, it was quenched by addition of aqueous ammonia solution (35%, 50 mL). The reaction mixture was extracted with diethyl ether (2x 100 mL).
The combined organic phases were washed with brine (2x 100mL), NasSCT. After removal of the salt, the crude product containing primary, secondary and tert, amine was purified by chromatography.
Major product: MS (ESI) m/z (100%): 630.5654 (M + O + H)+
Retention time: 35.02 min HPLC,
Synthesis and Oxidation of various sulfur containing Lipid fragments
A solution of 2-butyloctan-1 -ol (10.0 g, 53.6 mmol, 1 .00 equiv.), and triethylamine (16.2 g, 160 mmol, 3.00 equiv.) in 100 ml DCM was stirred und argon at 0°C. Methanesulfonic anhydride (14.0 g, 80.4 mmol, 1.5 equiv.) was added in portions, the reaction mixture was warmed and stirred for 2h at rt. The progress of the reaction was monitored with TLC by using solvent mixture (n-hexane/EtOAc; 4:1 ). The reaction mixture was neutralized with (200 ml) NaHCOs, the organic layer was separated, and the aq. Layer was further extracted with (2 X 100 ml) DCM. The combined organic phase was washed with (2 X 100 ml) brine, dried over NaaSCXi, and the solvent was evaporated under reduced pressure. The product was used in the next step without any further purification.
2-Butyloctyl ethanethioacetate
A solution of 2-butyloctyl methanesulfonate (5.00 g, 20.5 mmol, 1.00 equiv.) in 10 ml DMF was stirred under argon at rt., potassium thioacetate (7.00 g, 61.5 mmol, 3.00 equiv.) was added in portions, the reaction mixture was stirred under argon at 85°C for 12 h. The resulting reaction mixture was subsequently diluted with (200 ml) EtOAc and washed with (100 ml) 1 M HCL, (100 ml) NaHCO3, (100 ml) H2O, and (2 X 100 ml) brine. The organic phase was collected, dried over Na2SO4, and the solvent was evaporated under reduced pressure. The product was purified with column chromatography (SiO2; n-hexane/EtOAc = 95/5).
A solution of NaOH (2.00 g, 50.0 mmol, 2.00 equiv.) in 2.5 ml H2O was added dropwise to a solution of 2-Butyloctyl ethanethioacetate (5.00 g, 24.7 mmol, 1 .00 equiv.) in 20 ml EtOH. The reaction mixture was stirred at 40°C for 2 h. The progress of the reaction was monitored with TLC by using solvent mixture (n-hexane). The reaction mixture was neutralized with 2 M HCI at 0°C, the mixture was diluted with (100 ml) diethyl ether, washed with (2 X 100 ml) H2O, and (2 X 100 ml) brine. The organic layer was collected, dried over Na2SO4, and the solvent was evaporated under reduced pressure. The product was purified with column chromatography (SiO2; n-hexane).
In a 3-neck round bottom flask, 60 ml MeOH was added under argon, NaH 60% (780 mg, 19.7 mmol, 1 .00 equiv.) was added in portions under argon at 0°C for 10 min, then 2-butyloctane-1 -thiol (4.00 g, 19.7 mmol, 1 .00 equiv.) was added under argon at rt., and the reaction mixture was stirred for 10 min, after that 9-bromonona-1 -ol (4.40 g, 19.7 mmol, 1.00 equiv.) was added under argon, the reaction mixture was stirred for 3 h at 65°C. The solvent was evaporated under reduced pressure, dilute the mixture was (200 ml) n-hexane, NaH was filtered, the filtrate was collected, washed (2 X 100 ml) brine. The organic layer was collected, dried over Na2SC>4, and the solvent was evaporated under reduced pressure. The product was purified with column chromatography (SiO2; n-hexane/EtOAc; 4/1 ).
A solution of 9-((2-butyioctayl)thio)nonan-1 -ol (4.00 g, 11.5 mmol, 1 .00 equiv.) in 10 ml glacic AcOH was stirred at rt. H2O2 30% (2.00 ml, 92.0 mmol, 8.00 equiv.) was added dropwise to the reaction followed by the addition of Na2WO4.2H2O as (5%, as a catalyst), and the reaction mixture was stirred for 2 h at 50°C. The reaction mixture was neutralized with (10 ml) NaHCOs at 0°C, the mixture was diluted (100 ml) EtOAc, washed with (2 X 50 ml) H2O, then with (2 X 50 ml) brine. The organic layer was collected, dried over Na2SO4, and the solvent was evaporated under reduced pressure. The product was purified with column chromatography (SiC ; n-hexane/EtOAc; 1/1).
A solution of 9-((2-butyloctyl)sulfonyl)nonan-1-ol (3.00 g, 8.00 mmol, 1.00 equiv.) in 10 ml DCM was stirred at rt., DMP (5.00 g, 12.0 mmol, 1.50 equiv.) was added to the reaction mixture, then H2O (159 pl, 8.80 mmol, 1.10 equiv.) was added dropwise over 30 min. The reaction was quenched with 10 ml H2O, diluted with (100 ml) DCM, washed with (2 X 100 ml) NaHCOs, (2 X 100 ml) brine. The organic layer was collected, dried over Na2SO4, and the solvent was evaporated under reduced pressure. The product was purified with column chromatography (SiO2; n-hexane/EtOAc; 4/1).
BNT-76, R = CH2-CH=CH-CH2-OH
A solution of 9-((2-butyloctyl)sulfonyl)nonanal (2.00 equiv.), NH2-R (1.00 equiv.) in 5 ml DCM was stirred under argon for 30 min . at rt., then NaBH(OAc)s (4.00 equiv.) was
added to the reaction mixture under argon and the reaction mixture was stirred for extra 12 h at rt. The reaction was diluted with (50 ml) DCM, washed with (3 X 50 ml) NaHCOs, (2 X 50 ml) brine. The organic layer was collected, dried over NasSCL, and the solvent was evaporated under reduced pressure. The product was purified with column chromatography (SiO2; from n-hexane/EtOAc/TEA; 4/1/1% to n-hexane/EtOAc/TEA; 1/1/1% for BNT-72, -73 & -76).
Synthesis of Certain Sulfonamide Lipids
Octyl hexyl amine (CAS:82223-69-6; CAS:86933-36-0 (HCI-salt) is commercially available by Enamine US Inc., Aidlab Chemicals, LLC, and Bridgewater Pharmtech, Inc. 7-Octene-1 -sulfonyl chloride (CAS:923279-52-1 ) is commercially available by Hong Kong Chemhere Co., Ltd., or otherwise prepared according to Kirschberg, Thorsten A.; et al. Bioorganic & Medicinal Chemistry Letters (2014), 24(3), 969-972. Specifically, 7- octene-1 -sulfonyl chloride can be prepared in high yield from 7-bromo-1 -octene with sodium sulfite and treatment of the resultant acid with phosphorylchloride.
The terminal alkene (compound 3) was converted to an aldehyde by ozonolysis to provide a compound 4.
General procedure for the synthesis of sulfonamides with terminal aldehydes was performed analogously as reported in W02021250102.
To a solution of 7-octene sulfonamide, dissolved in a mixture of DCM/MeOH 1/1 at -78°C was added a ozone. It was allowed to bubble through the reaction mixture till the blue color persisted. N2-was then bubbled through the solution to remove the access ozone (removal of the blue color), followed by the addition of triphenyl phosphine (Ph3P, 5 eq.).
The reaction was then slowly allowed to come to rt over a period of one hour. The resulting heterogenous mixture was filtered through a pad of Celite. The pad was washed with DCM. The filtrate was concentrated under reduced pressure and purified by flash column chromatography. The aldehyde compound (e.g., compound 4 in the scheme above) was reacted with the primary amine bearing the head group in presence of Na[HB(OAc)s], NaaSCXi, in DCM at RT to obtain the lipid with either a functional head group or a protected precursor of the final lipid.
BNT51 , 4-amino-butanol (CAS: 13325-10-5) was reacted with aldehydes of compound
4. The remaining head groups in the scheme above can be prepared using the reagents below, which are commercially available:
CAS: 127346-48-9: N-t-Butyloxycarbonyl-1 ,3-diaminopropane hydrochloride
CAS: 75178-96-0: tert-Butyl 3-aminopropylcarbamate
CAS: 68076-36-8: tert-Butyl 4-aminobutylcarbamate
CAS: 33545-98-1 : N-t-Butyloxycarbonyl-1 ,4-diaminobutane hydrochloride
The BOC-derivatized lipids can be deprotected using TFA. After removal of the protective 5 group the terminal amino groups were being deprotonated to afford the thioureas. The amino groups are then acylated by thioacyl halides in presence of DMAP and TEA.
The following reagents were used:
CAS: 16420-13-6: Dimethylthiocarbamoyl chloride, commercially available.
CAS: 2241238-65-1 : 1 -azeticinecabothioyl chloride, prepared according to the methods 10 described in WO2018140730
CAS: 19009-42-8: 1 -Pyrrolidinecarbothioyl chloride, commercially available.
CAS: 16420-13-6: Dimethylthiocarbamoyl chloride, commercial available.
CAS: 2241238-65-1 : 1 -azeticinecabothioyl chloride, prepared according to the methods described in WO2018140730.
15 CAS: 19009-42-8: 1 -Pyrrolidinecarbothioyl chloride, commercially available.
Thiolipid compounds of the present disclosure can be prepared according to analogous methods known to those of skill in the art.
Example 2: Manufacturability and in vitro investigation of LNP formulations 20 consisting of novel ionizable lipids, BNT-51, BNT-52, BNT-54, BNT-56, BNT-57 or BNT-59.
The present example describes process for preparing lipid nanoparticles (LNPs) using particular thiolipid compounds (e.g., BNT-51 , BNT-52, BNT-54, BNT-56, BNT-57 or BNT- 59) described herein, as well as in vitro biological effects. LNPs of the present example
25 have been prepared by microfluidic mixing of the lipid mixture in ethanol and RNA solution in aqueous, acidic buffer. The details of the formulations have been given in the table below.
The sizes of the LNPs have been analyzed by DLS (Figure 1). The hydrodynamic diameters for all formulations have been found to be below 111 nm except for BNT-56. The formulations have displayed narrow size distribution (PDI < 0.2). The lipids with identical sulfone-amide tails (tail group 1 : BNT-51 , BNT-52 and BNT-54; tail group 2: 5 BNT-56, BNT-57 and BNT-59) showed slightly different sizes due to different head groups. Lipids with the thiourea head group (BNT-52 and BNT-54 from tail group 1 ; BNT- 57 and BNT-59 from tail group 2) led to formulations with smaller sizes compared to lipids with hydroxyl head group (BNT-51 from tail group 1 and BNT-56 from tail group 2). For both tail groups; thiourea heads with the hydroxyl groups (BNT-54 from tail group 1 ; 10 BNT-59 from tail group 2) showed the lowest sizes in their corresponding groups. Tail group 1 showed smaller sizes compared to their tail group 2 analogs indicating that the branching position and the length of the branches effect the hydrodynamic diameters.
The zeta potential values of the formulations have been investigated by electrophoretic light scattering (Figure 2). The formulations showed neutral-to-negative zeta potential 15 values.
The mRNA encapsulation efficiency of the formulations has been investigated by Ribogreen assay (Figure 3A). All formulations except BNT-56, showed very high encapsulation efficiency (>87%). No free mRNA has been seen as shown by AGE (Figure 3B).
20 mRNA integrity of the formulations has been determined by capillary electrophoresis, fragment analyzer (Figure 4). As seen in the Figure 4, negligible amount of mRNA fragmentation has been observed for all formulations.
The cytotoxicity and transfection efficiency of the formulations have been tested at three different mRNA concentrations (12.5, 25 and 50 ng) on three different cell lines (C2C12,
HepG2, RAW 264.7) (Figures 5-6). The formulations did not show significant cytotoxicity at the tested conditions. All formulations were effectively able to transfect the cell lines that have been tested (Figure 6). BNT-51 has showed the highest transfection efficiency at all concentrations on all tested cell lines.
5
Example 3: Manufacturability and in vitro investigation of LNP formulations consisting of ionizable lipids, BNT-sulfo-01, BNT-sulfo-02, BNT-sulfo-03, or BNT- sulfo-04.
The present example describes manufacturability and in vitro biological effects of the0 LNPs consisting of the following lipids: BNT-sulfo-01 , BNT-sulfo-02, BNT-sulfo-03, or BNT-sulfo-04. BNT-51 and BNT-52 have also been formulated for the present example. Example LNPs have been prepared by microfluidic mixing of the lipid mixture in ethanol and RNA solution in aqueous, acidic buffer. The details of the formulations have been given in the table below. 5
The sizes of the LNPs were analyzed by DLS (Figure 7). The hydrodynamic diameters for all formulations have been found to be below 100 nm except BNT-sulfo-04. PDI values was found to be <0.2 indicating a narrow size distribution. Cyclic amine head
groups (BNT-sulfo-02 and BNT-sulfo-03) have been well accommodated and did not alter the size and size distribution significantly compared to the parent lipid, BNT-52. BNT-sulfo-01 has led to smaller size compared to BNT-52 (55 and 79 nm, respectively). The zeta potential values of the formulations have been investigated by electrophoretic light scattering (Figure 8). All formulations showed very similar (neutral-to-negative) zeta potential values.
The mRNA encapsulation efficiency of the formulations has been investigated by Ribogreen assay (Figure 9A). The formulations were able to effectively encapsulate the mRNA (encapsulation efficiency > 84%. No free mRNA has been seen as shown by AGE (Figure 9B). mRNA integrity of the formulations has been determined by capillary electrophoresis, fragment analyzer (Figure 10). As seen in the Figure 10, negligible amount of mRNA fragmentation has been observed for all formulations.
The cytotoxicity and transfection efficiency of the formulations have been tested at three different mRNA concentrations (12.5, 25 and 50 ng) on four different cell lines (C2C12, HepG2, RAW 264.7 and Hek 293) (Figures 11A-D and Figures 12A-D) In general, the formulations did not show significant cytotoxicity at the tested conditions. Formulations were effectively able to transfect the cell lines that have been tested (Figures 12A-D). BNT-51 has showed the highest in vitro transfection efficiency at all concentrations on all tested cell lines. BNT-sulfo-04 has showed the lowest transfection efficiency most likely due to decreased potency caused by the short tailing. BNT-52 showed slightly better expression than BNT-sulfo-01. The formulations with cyclic amine head groups (BNT-sulfo-02 and BNT-sulfo-03) showed similar in vitro performance with the parent lipid, BNT-52.
The in vitro hemolytic effect of the BNT-sulfo-02 and BNT-sulfo-03 has been investigated at the mRNA dose of 16 mg/kg (the mRNA dose equals to 16 mg/kg in in vivo matrix) (Figure 13A). Even the formulations have been tested at very high mRNA dosage, they have showed negligible hemolysis indicating that the formulations do not affect the integrity of red blood cells’ membranes (PBS as negative control, Triton (0-2%) as positive control). In addition, the effect of formulations on the complement activation has been determined (Figure 13B).
Example 4: In vitro investigation of the effect of helper lipid on the LNP formulations consisting of novel ionizable lipid, BNT-51
The present example investigates the manufacturability and in vitro biological effects of the LNPs consisting of BNT-51 with two different helper lipids (DSPC or DOPE). In particular, in the present example, LNPs with the same composition but different helper lipids have been prepared, characterized, and tested in vitro. LNPs have been prepared 5 by microfluidic mixing of the lipid mixture in ethanol and RNA solution in aqueous, acidic buffer. The details of the formulations have been given in the table below.
The sizes of the LNPs were analyzed DLS (Figure 14). The hydrodynamic diameter of 10 the DSPC having formulation was found to be higher than DOPE having BNT-51 formulation (106 and 72 nm, respectively). However, BNT-51_DOPE has displayed higher PDI (0.28) than BNT-51_DSPC (0.13).
The zeta potential values of the formulations have been investigated by electrophoretic light scattering (Figure 15). The helper lipid did not significantly affect the zeta potential 15 values. The formulations showed neutral zeta potential.
The mRNA encapsulation efficiency of the formulations has been investigated by Ribogreen assay (Figure 16A). Both formulations, regardless of the helper lipid, showed very high encapsulation efficiency (>90%). The high encapsulation efficiency has also been confirmed with AGE (Figure 16B).
20 mRNA integrity of the formulations has been determined by capillary electrophoresis, fragment analyzer (Figure 17). As seen in the Figure 17, no mRNA fragmentation was observed for the formulations.
The cytotoxicity and transfection efficiency of the formulations have been tested at three different mRNA concentrations (12.5, 25 and 50 ng) on four different cell lines (C2C12, 25 HepG2, RAW 264.7, HEK-293) (Figures 18A-D and Figures 19A-D) The formulations have not altered the cell viability significantly at the tested conditions (no cytotoxicity).
The luciferase expression levels showed that all formulations were able to effectively transfect the tested cell lines (RLU approx. 106 - 108).
Example 5: In vitro investigation of the effect of stealth lipid and the stealth lipid anchor on the LNP formulations consisting of novel ionizable lipid, BNT-51
The present example reports manufacturability and in vitro biological effects of the LNPs consisting of the same novel ionizable lipid (BNT-51 ), varying stealth lipids (PEG-DMG, 5 VE-(AEEA)14_AC_2 or DMG-(AEEA)14_AC_2) For this aim, LNPs with the same composition but different stealth lipids have been prepared, characterized, and tested in vitro. LNPs have been prepared by microfluidic mixing of the lipid mixture in ethanol and RNA solution in aqueous, acidic buffer. The details of the formulations have been given in the table below.
The sizes of the LNPs have been investigated by DLS (Figure 20). Well-defined formulations with diameters of < 100 nm and PDI of < 0.2 (narrow polydispersity) were able to be obtained. The hydrodynamic diameters and PDIs of the formulations are 15 substantially similar.
The zeta potential values of the formulations have been investigated by electrophoretic light scattering (Figure 21). All formulations have showed very similar, neutral-to-slightly negative, zeta potential values.
The mRNA encapsulation efficiency of the formulations was assessed by Ribogreen 20 assay (Figure 22A). The formulations having the same stealth lipid anchor (BNT- 51_PEG-DMG and BNT_51_DMG-AEEA) showed similar levels of encapsulation efficiency (82% and 88%, respectively). Whereas the formulation with vitamin E lipid anchor (BNT-51_VitE-AEEA) has showed lower encapsulation efficiency indicating that the stealth lipid anchor but not the stealth lipid itself had effect on the mRNA
encapsulation efficiency. To determine the free mRNA amount, agarose gel electrophoresis (AGE) has been performed. As seen in the electropherogram, no free mRNA has been observed for the BNT-51_PEG-DMG and BNT_51_DMG-AEEA formulations (Figure 22B). BNT-51_VitE-AEEA has showed negligible amount of free mRNA (8.5%, semi-quantified by Imaged analysis). mRNA integrity of the formulations has been determined by capillary electrophoresis, fragment analyzer (Figure 23). As seen in the graph, no mRNA fragmentation has bene observed for the formulations.
The cytotoxicity and transfection efficiency of the formulations have been tested at three different mRNA concentrations (12.5, 25 and 50 ng) on four different cell lines (C2C12, HepG2, RAW 264.7, HEK-293) (Figures 24A-D and Figure 25A-D) The formulations have not showed any cytotoxicity at the tested conditions. The luciferase expression levels showed that all formulations were able to effectively transfect the tested cell lines (RLU approx. 106 - 108) (Figures 25A-D). Dose and cell-line dependent differences in the transfection efficiency have been observed. Generally, BNT-51 formulations with DMG stealth lipid anchor (BNT-51_PEG-DMG and BNT_51_DMG-AEEA formulation) have showed slightly higher transfection efficiency than BNT-51 formulation with Vitamin E lipid anchor (BNT-51_VitE-AEEA).
Example 6: The in vivo investigation of the biodistribution and antibody expression level of LNP formulations consisting of novel ionizable lipids, BNT-51 or BNT-52.
The present example assesses the in vivo biodistribution profile of the LNPs composed of BNT-51 or BNT-52 ionizable lipids. In addition, the in vivo luciferase expression efficacy and antibody expression levels of the formulations have been investigated to reveal the potency of the formulations. For this aim, first LNPs having either BNT-51 or BNT-52 as ionizable lipids have been prepared and characterized in vitro and later tested in vivo. LNPs have been prepared by microfluidic mixing of the lipid mixture in ethanol and RNA solution in aqueous, acidic buffer. The details of the formulations have been given in the table below.
PEG* refers to a PEG lipid.
Quality characteristics and safety assessment of the formulations have been investigated in vitro. The sizes of the LNPs were assessed by DLS (Figure 26). Well- defined formulations with diameters of < 107 nm and PDI of <0.2 (narrow polydispersity) 5 were able to be obtained. Replacement of PEG-based stealth moiety with VE- (AEEA)14_Ac-2, has resulted in increase in the hydrodynamic diameters (approx. 20 nm increase). BNT-52 formulation showed significantly smaller size compared to BNT-51 formulation (approx. 25 nm smaller).
The zeta potential values of the formulations have been investigated by electrophoretic 10 light scattering (Figure 27). All formulations have showed very similar, neutral zeta potential values.
The mRNA encapsulation efficiency of the formulations was assessed by Ribogreen assay (Figure 28). The results have showed that for all the formulations, it was possible to obtain high encapsulation efficiency (>78%).
15 The cytotoxicity and transfection efficiency of the formulations has been tested at three different mRNA concentrations (12.5, 25 and 50 ng) on four different cell lines (C2C12, HepG2, RAW 264.7, HEK-293) (Figures 29A-D and Figures 30A-D). Overall all formulations have been well tolerated by the cells at the tested doses ( > 50% cell viability). The luciferase expression levels showed that all formulations were able to
20 effectively transfect the cells (Figures 30A-D).
The in vitro hemolytic effect of the formulations was investigated at the mRNA dose of 16 mg/kg (the mRNA dose equals to 16 mg/kg in in vivo matrix) (Figure 31 A). The formulations showed negligible hemolysis indicating that the formulations do not affect the integrity of red blood cells (PBS as negative control, Triton (0-2%) as positive control).
25 In addition, the effect of formulations on the complement activation has been determined (Figure 31 B). The final complement complex concentration (SC5b-9) has found to be
similar to the negative control, PBS, showing that the formulations do not lead to the complement activation (Cobra venom factor (CVF) as positive control, untreated SO (only serum sample), untreated S1 (only serum sample) and PBS as negative controls). After in vitro tests, formulations have been tested in vivo. For each formulation, 3 mice (Balb/cJRj) have been injected with 16 pg/mouse RNA dose (1 pg of mod. Luciferase mRNA + 15 pg of BNT-141 mRNA). After 6 h and 24 h, in vivo bioluminescence imaging (BLI) (3 animals) has been performed. After 24 h, blood collection has been carried out to investigate the BNT-141 mRNA expression in the sera. Later, the animals have been sacrificed and organs have been collected and ex vivo BLI has been performed. The details of the workflow have been presented in the table below.
BLI results showed that all tested formulations have showed strong signal in the liverspleen region after 6 h (Figure 32A and 32B). BNT-51_P(AEEA) showed the highest luciferase expression indicating that the replacement of PEG-lipid with the P( AEE A)-lipid had led to significant increase in the potency of the formulation. BNT-52 has showed higher total flux compared to BNT-51. It could be speculated that the replacement of PEG-lipid with P(AEEA)-lipid could lead to even higher expression that has been reached with BNT-51_P(AEEA). After 24 h, the expression has decreased for all formulations, without any significant change in the biodistribution (Figures 32A and 32C)
After 24 h, mice (three from each group) have been sacrificed and organs have been collected. The luciferase expression in the heart, lung, kidney, spleen, liver, axillary and inguinal lymph nodes (LNs) have been quantified (Figures 33A-C). All the formulations showed strong expression in the liver followed by spleen. The liver and spleen signal were found to be highest for BNT-51_P(AEEA). Similar to in vivo data, BNT-52 showed good expression. BNT-51 displayed slightly different biodistribution profile as the percent
liver and spleen signal was found to be approximately same with each other (Figure 33C). Whereas for other formulations, 74%-80% of the total signal has originated from the liver region (Figure 33C). Overall, the ex vivo results showed good harmony with in vivo data and proved the potency and distribution profile of the formulations.
In addition to luciferase expression, antibody expression (coded by BNT-141 mRNA) has also been investigated after 24 h (Figure 34) The serum analysis also confirmed that BNT-51_P(AEEA) has showed highest expression followed by BNT-52 and BNT-51 formulations.
Example 7: Preparation and characterization of RNA/DNA-lipid nanoparticles (BNT51/Ac-AEEA14-DMA/DSPE-PEG2k-Alfa-Tag lipid)
Manufacturing of pre-formed lipid nanoparticles (BNT51/Ac-AEEA14-DMA/DSPE- PEG2k-Alfa-Tag lipid) by ethanol injection
Alfa-tagged pre-formed lipid nanoparticles were prepared using a lipid mix consisting of BNT51 , DSPC, cholesterol, AC-AEEA14-DMA and DSPE-PEG2k-Alfa peptide (a DSPE- PEG2K polymer functionalized with an Alfa peptide, having a sequence of SEQ.ID.NO. 1) in a molar ratio of 47.5:10:40.5:1 .8:0.2 was dissolved in organic solvent (ethanol) at 20 mM total lipid concentration and mixed with an aqueous phase (5mM AcOH) in a 3:1 volume ratio (aqueous : organic), using a standard syringe pump based equipped with in-line dilution and a T mixing element (0.5 mm T mixer), at a total flow rate of 90 mL/min (45 ml/min for nucleic acid phase, 15 ml/min for lipid phase, 30 ml/min for in-line dilution). The organic solvent in the obtained raw colloid nanoparticles was removed by dialysis against 5mM AcOH using Slide-A-Lyzer dialysis cassettes of 10K molecular weight cutoff (MCWO) (Thermo Fisher Scientific, Waltham, MA, USA). The nanoparticles were concentrated to 2X times through centrifugation at 3000rpm x 10 min at 4°C, using Amico Ultra-15 of 30K molecular weight cut-off (MCWO) (Merck, Darmstadt, Germany). After concentration, the nanoparticles were diluted to a sucrose concentration of 10%.
Frozen stability of pre-formed lipid (BNT51/Ac-AEEA14-DMA/DSPE-PEG2k-Alfa-Tag lipid) nanoparticles
The frozen stability of the pre-formed lipid nanoparticles was assessed by cycling the formulations from -20 °C and -80 °C (overnight) to +25 °C (2 h) for at least three times. The particle size and polydispersity index of the formulations were measured for freezethaw samples. The formulations between thaw and freeze cycles were mixed by gentle
RECTIFIED SHEET (RULE 91) ISA/EP
inversions before the next freezing cycle. It was observed that the colloidal stability of nanoparticles at -20°C and -80°C conditions were maintained for at least 3 freeze-thaw cycles, as depicted in Figure 35. cturing of functionalized RNA/DNA-lipid particles by aqueous-aqueous protocol
RNA/DNA-lipid particles were prepared by an aqueous-aqueous protocol (LNP2), as described herein. Reporter Thy1.1 RNA and reporter Venus DNA were used for characterization experiments. Briefly, RNA (Thy1.1 ) in aqueous buffer (HEPES 10 mM, EDTA 0.1 mM, pH 7.0) and DNA (Venus) in water were mixed with pre-formed lipid nanoparticles composed of BNT51 , DSPC, cholesterol, Ac-AEEA14-DMA and DSPE- PEG2k-alfa peptide in a molar ratio of 47.5:10:40.5:1.8:0.2, respectively, in aqueous solution (5 mM acetic acid, 10% sucrose), in a volume ratio of 1 :1. The mixing was achieved using a standard syringe pump based set-up with a total flow of 360 ml/min (180 ml/min for each phase) using T mixing element (2.4mm T mixer, 1.6 mm tubing). The resulting RNA/DNA-lipid particles were then functionalized with an aCD3-VHH ligand at ligand/cargo ratio of 0.48 w/w, and further diluted with 60 mM HEPES pH 6.0, 20% (w/v) sucrose to a final nucleic acid concentration of 0.1 mg/ml_ (final buffer composition: 22 mM HEPES, 9% sucrose, pH ~5). The RNA/DNA-lipid particles were prepared at N/P ratio of 6:1 and filtered through a 0.22 pm polyethersulfone (PES) filter.
Manufacturing of functionalized RNA/DNA-lipid particles by aqueous-organic protocol (LNP1)
RNA/DNA-lipid particles were alternatively prepared by an aqueous-ethanol mixing protocol (LNP1 ), as described herein. Reporter Thy1.1 RNA and reporter Venus DNA were also used for characterization experiments. Briefly, RNA (Thy1 .1 ) in aqueous buffer condition (HEPES 10 mM, EDTA 0.1 mM, pH 7.0) and DNA (Venus) in water were mixed with ethanolic lipid mix comprising BNT51 , DSPC, cholesterol, Ac-AEEA14-DMA and DSPE-PEG2k-alfa peptide in a molar ratio of 47.5:10:40.5:1.8:0.2, respectively, at 14.4 mM total lipid concentration, in a volume ratio of 3 parts nucleic acids and 1 part lipid mix. The mixing was achieved using a standard syringe pump based set-up equipped with in-line dilution, with a total flow of 90 ml/min (45 ml/min for nucleic acid phase, 15 ml/min for lipid phase, 30 ml/min for in-line dilution) using T mixing element (0.5 mm T mixer). The organic solvent in the obtained raw colloid nanoparticles was removed by dialysis against 20 mM HEPES pH 5.5 using Slide-A-Lyzer dialysis cassettes G2 of 10K
molecular weight cut-off (MCWO) (Thermo Fisher Scientific, Waltham, MA, USA). The resulting RNA/DNA-lipid particles were then functionalized with an aCD3-VHH ligand at ligand/cargo ratio of 0.48 w/w, and further diluted to a final nucleic acid concentration of 0.1 mg/ml_ and storage matrix of 20 mM HEPES pH 5.5, 10% (w/v) sucrose. Typically, the RNA/DNA-lipid particles were prepared at N/P ratio of 6:1 and filtered through a 0.22 pm polyethersulfone (PES) filter.
Characterization of the formulations
Particle size was determined by dynamic light scattering using a DynaPro Plate Reader II (Wyatt, Dernbach, Germany). From the measurements, size (Z-average) and polydispersity indices (Pdl) were calculated from the cumulant analysis using Dynamics 7.8.1 .3 software. For the measurement, samples were diluted 1 :10 in water and analysis was performed in triplicates. pH was measured on 150 pL sample after calibration of the device with pH 4, 7, and 10 standards. Successful cargos incorporation was verified via Agarose Gel Electrophoresis.
Size and PDI was determined for functionalized sterile filtered RNA/DNA-LNP1 and RNA/DNA-LNP2 (prepared as described above) stored at final nucleic concentration of 0.1 mg/ml_ via DLS measurement. It was observed that aCD3-VHH-functionalized RNA/DNA-LNP1 and RNA/DNA-LNP2 can be successfully manufactured with Ac- AEEA14-DMA stealth moiety, resulting in particles of size < 100 nm and a PDI < 0.3 ((A) in Figure 36). Successful cargo incorporation was verified via Agarose gel electrophoresis: no RNA or DNA bands are present in the samples, indicating that the formulation did not have any free cargo. Moreover, all the respective RNA and DNA bands were clearly visible when the samples were treated with a release solution (controls), confirming the successful encapsulation of all the cargos ((B) in Figure 36).
Stability of functionalized RNA/DNA-lipid nanoparticles (BNT51/Ac-AEEA14-DMA/Alfa- Tag lipid) and freeze thaw studies
The stability of the RNA/DNA functionalized nanoparticles was assessed at 2-8°C and 25 °C. Freeze thaw studies were conducted by cycling the formulations from -20°C and -80 °C (overnight) to +25 °C (2 h) for at least three times. The particle size and polydispersity index of the formulations were measured for freeze-thaw samples. The formulations between thaw and freeze cycles were mixed by gentle inversions before the next freezing cycle.
Frozen stability was showed by both LNP1 and LNP2 formulations for up to 3 freeze thaw cycles as depicted in (C) in Figure 36. It was observed that the colloidal stability of nanoparticles at 2-8 °C and 25 °C conditions was maintained (for the currently evaluated 2 weeks) for functionalized RNA/DNA-LNP2 while size increase was observed for functionalized RNA/DNA-LNP1 ((C) in Figure 36).
Transfection in vitro studies
For transfection studies, 1 l or 10pl (100 or 1000 ng dose) of respective formulations were pre-diluted in 50 pl X-Vivo 15 in an ultra-low adhesion 96 well plate. 0.3e6 thawed human T cells were diluted in 100 % PHS and added to nanoparticle dilution. After 30 min of incubation (37°C, 5% CO2) 10OpI of X-Vivo 15 containing 200IU/ml IL-2 was added per well and cells were cultivated for additional 96h (37°C, 5% CO2). Cell-type specific transfection of Thy1 .1 RNA ((A) in Figure 37) and Venus DNA ((B) in Figure 37) was analyzed via flow cytometry after labelling of samples with cell type specific antibodies.
Figure 37 shows the percentages of transfected cell (CD14+ Monocytes, CD19+ B cells, CD4+ T cells or CD8+ T cells) within all transfected PBMCs (Transfection, y-axes) per tested formulation condition (as indicated) for both RNA (Thy1.1) and DNA (Venus). LNP2 samples showed a higher transfection rate for both RNA and DNA, as compared to the transfection rate of RNA and DNA for LNP1 samples, with expected variations related to Donor and dose used.
Example 8: Manufacturing of RNA/DNA lipid nanoparticles (BNT51/Ac-AEEA14- VitE/ DSPE-PEG2k-Alfa-Tag lipid)
Manufacturing of pre-formed lipid nanoparticles (BNT51/Ac-AEEA14-VitE/DSPE- PEG2k-Alfa-Tag lipid) by ethanol injection
For preparing a-tagged pre-formed lipid nanoparticles, a lipid mix consisting of BNT51 , DSPC, cholesterol, Ac-AEEA14-VitE and DSPE-PEG2k-a peptide in a molar ratio of 47.5:10:40.5:1.8:0.2 was dissolved in organic solvent (ethanol) at 20 mM total lipid concentration and mixed with an aqueous phase (5mM AcOH) in a 3:1 volume ratio (aqueous : organic), using a standard syringe pump based equipped with in-line dilution and a T mixing element (0.5 mm T mixer), at a total flow rate of 90 mL/min (45 ml/min for nucleic acid phase, 15 ml/min for lipid phase, 30 ml/min for in-line dilution). The organic solvent in the obtained raw colloid nanoparticles was removed by dialysis against 5mM AcOH using Slide-A-Lyzer dialysis cassettes of 10K molecular weight cut-off
(MCWO) (Thermo Fisher Scientific, Waltham, MA, USA). The nanoparticles were concentrated to 2X times through centrifugation at 3000rpm x 10 min at 4°C, using Amico Ultra-15 of 30K molecular weight cut-off (MCWO) (Merck, Darmstadt, Germany). After up-concentration, the nanoparticles were diluted to a sucrose concentration of 10%.
Frozen stability of pre-formed lipid (BNT51/Ac-AEEA14-VitE/DSPE-PEG2k-Alfa-Tag lipid) nanoparticles
The frozen stability of the pre-formed lipid nanoparticles has been investigated by cycling the formulations from -20 °C and -80 °C (overnight) to +25 °C (2 h) for at least three times. The particle size and polydispersity index of the formulations were measured for freeze-thaw samples. The formulations between thaw and freeze cycles were mixed by gentle inversions before the next freezing cycle. It was observed that the colloidal stability of nanoparticles at -20°C and -80°C conditions were maintained for at least 3 freezethaw cycles, as depicted in Figure 38.
Manufacturing of functionalized RNA/DNA-lipid particles by aqueous-aqueous protocol RNA/DNA-lipid particles were prepared by an aqueous-aqueous protocol (LNP2), as described herein. Briefly, RNA (Thy1.1) in aqueous buffer conditions (HEPES 10 mM, EDTA 0.1 mM, pH 7.0) and DNA (Venus) in water were mixed with pre-formed lipid nanoparticles composed of BNT51 , DSPC, cholesterol, Ac-AEEA14-VitE and DSPE- PEG2k-alfa peptide in a molar ratio of 47.5:10:40.5:1.8:0.2, respectively, in aqueous solution (5 mM acetic acid, 10% sucrose), in a volume ratio of 1 :1. The mixing was achieved using a standard syringe pump based set-up with a total flow of 360 ml/min (180 ml/min for each phase) using T mixing element (2.4mm T mixer, 1.6 mm tubing). The resulting RNA/DNA-lipid particles were then functionalized with an aCD3-VHH ligand at ligand/cargo ratio of 0.48 w/w, and further diluted with 60 mM HEPES pH 6.0, 20% (w/v) sucrose to a final nucleic acid concentration of 0.1 mg/ml_ (final buffer composition: 22 mM HEPES, 9% sucrose, pH ~5). The RNA/DNA-lipid particles were prepared at N/P ratio of 6:1 and filtered through a 0.22 pm polyethersulfone (PES) filter.
Manufacturing of functionalized RNA/DNA-lipid particles by aqueous-organic protocol RNA/DNA-lipid particles were prepared by an aqueous-ethanol mixing protocol (LNP1 ), as described herein. Briefly, RNA (Thy1 .1 ) in aqueous buffer conditions (HEPES 10 mM, EDTA 0.1 mM, pH 7.0) and DNA (Venus) in water were mixed with ethanolic lipid mix comprising BNT51 , DSPC, cholesterol, Ac-AEEA14-VitE and DSPE-PEG2k-alfa peptide
in a molar ratio of 47.5:10:40.5:1 .8:0.2, respectively, at 14.4 mM total lipid concentration, in a volume ratio of 3 parts nucleic acids and 1 part lipid mix. The mixing was achieved using a standard syringe pump-based set-up equipped with in-line dilution, with a total flow of 90 ml/min (45 ml/min for nucleic acid phase, 15 ml/min for lipid phase, 30 ml/min for in-line dilution) using T mixing element (0.5 mm T mixer). The organic solvent in the obtained raw colloid nanoparticles was removed by dialysis against 20 mM HEPES pH 5.5 using Slide-A-Lyzer dialysis cassettes G2 of 10K molecular weight cut-off (MCWO) (Thermo Fisher Scientific, Waltham, MA, USA). The resulting RNA/DNA-lipid particles were then functionalized with an aCD3-VHH ligand at ligand/cargo ratio of 0.48 w/w, and further diluted to a final nucleic acid concentration of 0.1 mg/ml_ and storage matrix of 20 mM HEPES pH 5.5, 10% (w/v) sucrose. The RNA/DNA-lipid particles were prepared at N/P ratio of 6:1 and filtered through a 0.22 pm polyethersulfone (PES) filter.
Characterization of the formulations
Particle size was determined by dynamic light scattering using a DynaPro Plate Reader II (Wyatt, Dernbach, Germany). From the measurements, size (Z-average) and polydispersity indices (PDI) were calculated from the cumulant analysis using Dynamics 7.8.1 .3 software. For the measurement, samples were diluted 1 :10 in water and analysis was performed in triplicates. pH was measured on 150 pL sample after calibration of the device with pH 4, 7, and 10 standards. Successful cargos incorporation was verified via Agarose Gel Electrophoresis.
Size and PDI was determined for functionalized sterile filtered RNA/DNA-LNP1 and RNA/DNA-LNP2 stored at final nucleic concentration of 0.1 mg/ml_ via DLS measurement. It was observed that aCD3-VHH-functionalized RNA/DNA-LNP1 and RNA/DNA-LNP2 can be successfully manufactured with Ac-AEEA14-VitE stealth moiety, resulting in particles of size < 100 nm and a PDI < 0.3 ((A) in Figure 39). Successful cargo incorporation was verified via Agarose gel electrophoresis: no RNA or DNA bands are present in the samples, indicating that the formulation did not have any free cargo. Moreover, all the respective RNA and DNA bands were clearly visible when the samples were treated with a release solution (controls), confirming the successful encapsulation of all the cargos ((B) in Figure 39).
Stability of functionalized RNA/DNA-lipid nanoparticles (BNT51 /Ac-AEEA14-VitE/DSPE-
PEG2k-Alfa-Tag lipid) and freeze thaw studies
The stability of the RNA/DNA functionalized nanoparticles has been investigated at 2- 8°C and 25°C. Freeze thaw studies were conducted by cycling the formulations from - 20°C and -80°C (overnight) to +25°C (2 h) for at least three times. The particle size and polydispersity index of the formulations were measured for freeze-thaw samples. The formulations between thaw and freeze cycles were mixed by gentle inversions before the next freezing cycle. Frozen stability was showed by both LNP1 and LNP2 formulations up to 3 freeze thaw cycles, as depicted in Figure 7C. It was observed that the colloidal stability of nanoparticles at 2-8°C and 25°C conditions was maintained (for the currently evaluated 2 weeks) for functionalized LNP2 while size increase was observed for functionalized LNP1 ((C) in Figure 39).
Transfection in vitro studies
For transfection studies, 1 pl or 10 pl (100 or 1000 ng dose) of respective formulations were pre-diluted in 50 pl X-Vivo 15 in an ultra-low adhesion 96 well plate. 0.3e6 thawed human T cells were diluted in 100 % PHS and added to nanoparticle dilution. After 30 min of incubation (37°C, 5% CO2) 10OpI of X-Vivo 15 containing 200IU/ml IL-2 was added per well and cells were cultivated for additional 96h (37°C, 5% CO2). Cell-type specific transfection (Thy1 .1 RNA and Venus DNA) was analyzed via flowcytometry after labelling of samples with cell type specific antibodies.
Figure 40 shows the percentages of transfected cell (CD14+ Monocytes, CD19+ B cells, CD4+ T cells or CD8+ T cells) within all transfected PBMCs (Transfection, y-axes) per tested formulation condition (as indicated) for both RNA (Thy1.1) and DNA (Venus). LNP2 samples showed a higher transfection for both RNA and DNA as compared to that observed for LNP1 samples, with expected variations related to Donor and dose used.
Example 9: Manufacturing of RNA/DNA lipid nanoparticles (BNT51/Ac-AEEA14- DMA DSPE-pAEEA14-Alfa-Tag lipid)
Manufacturing of pre-formed lipid nanoparticles (BNT51/Ac-AEEA14-DMA/DSPE- pAEEAl 4-Alfa-Tag lipid) by ethanol injection
For preparing Alfa-tagged pre-formed lipid nanoparticles, a lipid mix consisting of BNT51 , DSPC, cholesterol, Ac-AEEA14-DMA and DSPE-pAEEA14-alfa peptide in a molar ratio of 47.5:10:40.5:1.8:0.2 was dissolved in organic solvent (ethanol) at 20 mM total lipid concentration and mixed with an aqueous phase (5mM AcOH) in a 3:1 volume ratio (aqueous : organic), using a standard syringe pump based equipped with in-line dilution and a T mixing element (0.5 mm T mixer), at a total flow rate of 90 mL/min (45 ml/min for nucleic acid phase, 15 ml/min for lipid phase, 30 ml/min for in-line dilution). The
organic solvent in the obtained raw colloid nanoparticles was removed by dialysis against 5mM AcOH using Slide-A-Lyzer dialysis cassettes of 10K molecular weight cut-off (MCWO) (Thermo Fisher Scientific, Waltham, MA, USA). The nanoparticles were concentrated to 2X times through centrifugation at 3000rpm x 10 min at 4°C, using Amico Ultra-15 of 30K molecular weight cut-off (MCWO) (Merck, Darmstadt, Germany). After concentration, the nanoparticles were diluted to a sucrose concentration of 10%.
Frozen stability of pre-formed lipid (BNT51/Ac-AEEA 14-DMA/DSPE-pAEEA14-Alfa-Tag lipid) nanoparticles
The frozen stability of the pre-formed lipid nanoparticles has been investigated by cycling the formulations from -20°C and -80°C (overnight) to +25°C (2 h) for at least two times. The particle size and polydispersity index of the formulations were measured for freezethaw samples. The formulations between thaw and freeze cycles were mixed by gentle inversions before the next freezing cycle. It was observed that the colloidal stability of nanoparticles at -20°C and -80°C conditions were maintained for at least 2 freeze-thaw cycles, as depicted in Figure 41A.
Manufacturing of functionalized RNA/DNA-lipid particles by aqueous-aqueous protocol RNA/DNA-lipid particles were prepared by an aqueous-aqueous protocol (LNP2), as described herein. Briefly, RNA in aqueous buffer conditions of HEPES 10 mM, EDTA 0.1 mM, pH 7.0 and DNA in water were mixed with pre-formed lipid nanoparticles composed of BNT51 , DSPC, cholesterol, Ac-AEEA14-DMA and DSPE-pAEEA14-alfa peptide in a molar ratio of 47.5:10:40.5:1 .8:0.2, respectively, in aqueous solution of 5 mM acetic acid, 10% sucrose, in a volume ratio of 1 :1. The mixing was achieved using a standard syringe pump based set-up with a total flow of 360 ml/min (180 ml/min for each phase) using T mixing element (2.4mm T mixer, 1.6 mm tubing). The resulting RNA/DNA-lipid particles were then functionalized with an aCD3-VHH ligand at ligand/cargo ratio of 0.48 w/w, and further diluted to a final nucleic acid concentration of 0.1 mg/ml_ and storage matrix 22 mM HEPES pH 5.5, 10% (w/v) sucrose. The RNA/DNA-lipid particles were prepared at N/P ratio of 12:1 and filtered through a 0.22 pm polyethersulfone (PES) filter.
Characterization of the formulations and freeze thaw studies
Particle size was determined by dynamic light scattering using a DynaPro Plate Reader II (Wyatt, Dernbach, Germany). From the measurements, size (Z-average) and polydispersity indices (PDI) were calculated from the cumulant analysis using Dynamics
7.8.1 .3 software. For the measurement, samples were diluted 1 :10 in water and analysis was performed in triplicates. pH was measured on 150 pL sample after calibration of the device with pH 4, 7, and 10 standards. Successful cargos incorporation was verified via Agarose Gel Electrophoresis.
Freeze thaw studies were conducted by cycling the formulations from -20°C and
-80°C (overnight) to +25°C (2 h) for at least two times. The particle size and polydispersity index of the formulations were measured for freeze-thaw samples. The formulations between thaw and freeze cycles were mixed by gentle inversions before the next freezing cycle.
Size and PDI was determined for functionalized sterile filtered RNA/DNA-LNP2 stored at final nucleic acid concentration of 0.1 mg/ml_ via DLS measurement. It was observed that aCD3-VHH-functionalized LNP2 can be successfully manufactured with Ac- AEEA14-DMA stealth moiety and DSPE-pAEEA14-Alfa lipid, resulting in particles of size < 100 nm and a PDI < 0.3 (Figure 41 B). Successful cargo incorporation was verified via Agarose gel electrophoresis. Frozen stability up to 2 freeze thaw cycles was observed, as depicted in Figure 41 B.
Example 10: Manufacturing of RNA/DNA lipid nanoparticles (BNT52/Ac-AEEA14- DMA DSPE-pAEEA14-Alfa-Tag lipid)
Manufacturing of pre-formed lipid nanoparticles (BNT52/Ac-AEEA14-DMA/DSPE- pAEEAl 4-Alfa-Tag lipid) by ethanol injection
For preparing Alfa-tagged pre-formed lipid nanoparticles, a lipid mix consisting of BNT52, DSPC, cholesterol, Ac-AEEA14-DMA and DSPE-pAEEA14-alfa peptide in a molar ratio of 47.5:10:40.5:1.8:0.2 was dissolved in organic solvent (ethanol) at 20 mM total lipid concentration and mixed with an aqueous phase (5mM AcOH) in a 3:1 volume ratio (aqueous : organic), using a standard syringe pump based equipped with in-line dilution and a T mixing element (0.5 mm T mixer), at a total flow rate of 90 mL/min (45 ml/min for nucleic acid phase, 15 ml/min for lipid phase, 30 ml/min for in-line dilution). The organic solvent in the obtained raw colloid nanoparticles was removed by dialysis against 5mM AcOH using Slide-A-Lyzer dialysis cassettes of 10K molecular weight cut-off (MCWO) (Thermo Fisher Scientific, Waltham, MA, USA). The nanoparticles were concentrated to 2X times through centrifugation at 3000rpm x 10 min at 4°C, using Amico Ultra-15 of 30K molecular weight cut-off (MCWO) (Merck, Darmstadt, Germany). After concentration, the nanoparticles were diluted to a sucrose concentration of 10%.
Frozen stability of pre-formed lipid nanoparticles (BNT52/Ac-AEEA14-DMA/DSPE- pAEEA 14-Alfa-Tag lipid)
The frozen stability of the pre-formed lipid nanoparticles has been investigated by cycling the formulations from -20°C and -80°C (overnight) to +25°C (2 h) for at least two times. The particle size and polydispersity index of the formulations were measured for freezethaw samples. The formulations between thaw and freeze cycles were mixed by gentle inversions before the next freezing cycle. It was observed that the colloidal stability of nanoparticles at -20°C and -80°C conditions were maintained for at least 2 freeze-thaw cycles, as depicted in Figure 42A.
Manufacturing of functionalized RNA/DNA-lipid particles by aqueous-aqueous protocol RNA/DNA-lipid particles were prepared by an aqueous-aqueous protocol (LNP2), as described herein. Briefly, RNA in aqueous buffer condition (HEPES 10 mM, EDTA 0.1 mM, pH 7.0) and DNA in water were mixed with pre-formed lipid nanoparticles composed of BNT52, DSPC, cholesterol, Ac-AEEA14-DMA and DSPE-pAEEA14-alfa peptide in a molar ratio of 47.5:10:40.5:1 .8:0.2, respectively, in aqueous solution of 5 mM acetic acid, 10% sucrose, in a volume ratio of 1 :1 . The mixing was achieved using a standard syringe pump based set-up with a total flow of 360 ml/min (180 ml/min for each phase) using T mixing element (2.4mm T mixer, 1.6 mm tubing). The resulting RNA/DNA-lipid particles were then functionalized with an aCD3-VHH ligand at ligand/cargo ratio of 0.48 w/w, and further diluted to a final nucleic acid concentration of 0.1 mg/ml_ and storage matrix 22 mM HEPES pH 5.5, 10% (w/v) sucrose. The RNA/DNA-lipid particles were prepared at N/P ratio of 12:1 and filtered through a 0.22 pm polyethersulfone (PES) filter.
Characterization of the formulations and freeze thaw studies
Particle size was determined by dynamic light scattering using a DynaPro Plate Reader II (Wyatt, Dernbach, Germany). From the measurements, size (Z-average) and polydispersity indices (Pdl) were calculated from the cumulant analysis using Dynamics 7.8.1 .3 software. For the measurement, samples were diluted 1 :10 in water and analysis was performed in triplicates. pH was measured on 150 pL sample after calibration of the device with pH 4, 7, and 10 standards. Successful cargos incorporation was verified via Agarose Gel Electrophoresis. Freeze thaw studies were conducted by cycling the formulations from -20°C and -80°C (overnight) to +25°C (2 h) for at least two times. The particle size and polydispersity index of the formulations were measured for freeze-thaw
samples. The formulations between thaw and freeze cycles were mixed by gentle inversions before the next freezing cycle.
Size and PDI were determined for functionalized sterile filtered RNA/DNA-LNP2 stored at final nucleic acid concentration of 0.1 mg/ml_ via DLS measurement. It was observed that aCD3-VHH-functionalized LNP2 can be successfully manufactured with Ac-
AEEA14-DMA stealth moiety and DSPE-pAEEA14-Alfa lipid, resulting in particles of size < 100 nm and a PDI < 0.3 (Figure 42B). Successful cargo incorporation was verified via Agarose gel electrophoresis. Frozen stability up to 2 freeze thaw cycles was observed, as depicted in (B) in Figure 42.
Example 11 : Use of thiolipids for target transfection of T-cells
The present example assessed the suitability of LNPs containing thiolipids described herein for cell-specific targeting by introducing a targeting system specific for primary T- cells. The present example compared thiolipids BNT51 and BNT52 with the known ionizable lipid DODMA, formulated in functionalized LNPs. The composition of the LNPs, which were produced at an N/P ratio of 6, can be found in the following table.
In order to test for both RNA and DNA delivery, a cargo mixture containing both Thy1 .1 RNA and Venus nanoplasmid DNA was formulated into an LNP with the above lipid
mixture, using methods known to those of skill in the art. Tag-lipid DSPE-PEG2k-ALFA containing LNPs were incubated with an anti-CD3 specific VHH_NbAlfa construct, which binds to the AlfaTag (having a sequence SEQ.ID.NO. 1) presented on the LNP surface. The resulting particles showed acceptable particle properties (by DLS: diameter <200nm, PDI <0.5) and negligible amounts of free RNA/DNA as evaluated by Agarose gel electrophoresis. The particles thus obtained were tested in a PBMC assay.
For transfection studies, 10 pl of respective formulations were prediluted in 50 pl X- Vivo15 in an ultra-low adhesion 96 well plate. 1e6 thawed human PBMC were diluted in 50 pl clotted PHS and added to nanoparticle dilution (1000 ng formulated nucleic acid cargo / 1e6 PBMCs). After 30 min of incubation (37 °C, 5 % CO2) 3e5 of the transfected PBMCs were transferred to new plates and cultured in 200 pl in X-Vivo15 + 5% PHS + 100 U/ml IL-2 for 4 days (37 °C, 5 % CO2). PBMCs were analyzed for cell type-specific Thy1.1-RNA and Venus-Nanoplasmid DNA transfection by flow cytometry.
The LNPs containing thiolipids described herein showed greater RNA and DNA transfection in T-cells in comparison to DODMA containing LNPs.
Figure 42 is a set of bar graphs illustrating use of thiolipids described herein for targeted transfection of T-cells. In vitro evaluation in hPBMCs. Comparison ofthree different LNPs containing three different ionizable lipids show the superior RNA and DNA transfection efficiency of thiolipids described herein which were formulated in LNP2 and LNP3. Depicted in the upper graph are the percentages of Thy 1.1 -expressing cell subtypes (CD4+ T cells, CD8+ T cells, CD19+ B cells) out of all single and alive cells (y-axes). Depicted in the lower graph are the percentages of Venus-Nanoplasmid expressing cells for CD4+ T cells and CD8 + T cells.
Example 12: Use of additional thiolipid compounds for targeted transfection of T- cells
The present example assesses lipid BNT52 and lipid BNT76 formulated in functionalized LNPs. The composition of the LNPs, which were produced at an N/P ratio of 12, can be found in the following table.
In order to test for both RNA and DNA delivery, a cargo mixture containing both Thy1 .1 RNA and Venus nanoplasmid DNA was formulated into an LNP with the above lipid mixture, using methods of the art. Tag-lipid DSPE-PEG2k-ALFA containing LNPs were incubated with an anti-CD3 specific VHH_NbAlfa construct, which binds to the AlfaTag presented on the LNP surface. The resulting particles showed acceptable particle properties (by DLS: diameter <200nm, PDI <0.5) and negligible amounts of free RNA/DNA as evaluated by Agarose gel electrophoresis. The particles thus obtained were tested in a PBMC assay.
For PBMC transfection studies, 1 pl of the respective nanoparticle formulations (total cargo concentration = 0.1 pg/piL) were prediluted in 50 pl X-Vivo15 in an ultra-low adhesion 96 well plate. 1 e6 thawed human PBMCs were diluted in 50 pl human serum from male AB clotted whole blood and added to the nanoparticle dilution. After 30 min of incubation (37 °C, 5 % CO2), 100 pl of X-Vivo15 with human IL-2 [200 U/ml] were added per well. Cells were cultivated (37 °C, 5 % CO2) for an additional 96 h. Figures 44A and 44B show cell type-specific RNA-transfection (Thy1.1-RNA expression) and DNA- transfection (Venus-Nanoplasmid DNA expression), analyzed via flow cytometry.
The RNA and DNA transfection observed in B-cells and Monocytes is low for both LNPs. The LNPs containing the novel lipids show high RNA and DNA transfection in T-cells. Both tested novel lipids are potent candidates for targeted transfection of T-cells.
Figures 44A and 44B illustrate the use of reported thiolipids for targeted transfection of T-cells. In vitro evaluation in hPBMCs. Comparison of two different LNPs containing two different ionizable lipids show high RNA and DNA transfection efficiency of reported thiolipids which were formulated in LNP1 and LNP2. Depicted in Figure 44A are the percentages of Thy1 .1 -expressing cell subtypes (CD4+ T cells, CD8+ T cells, CD19+ B cells, CD14+ Monocytes) out of all single and alive cells (y-axes). Depicted in Figure 44B
are the percentages of Venus-Nanoplasmid expressing cells for CD4+ T cells and CD8 + T cells.
Example 13: Manufacturability and in vitro investigation of LNP formulations 5 consisting of novel ionizable lipid, BNT-72
The present example assessed the manufacturability and in vitro biological effects of the LNP formulations consisting of provided lipids (with sulfone-branched tail and hydroxyl head), BNT-72. For this aim BNT-72 has been formulated against a benchmark (BM) formulation and LNPs have been characterized and tested in vitro. To determine the 10 effect of N/P ratio on BNT-72 formulation, the particles have been prepared at three different N/P ratios. LNPs have been prepared by microfluidic mixing of the lipid mixture in ethanol and RNA solution in aqueous, acidic buffer. The details of the formulations have been given in the table below.
15
The sizes of the LNPs was assessed by DLS (Figure 45A). The hydrodynamic diameter of the benchmark formulation was found to be 70 nm as expected. The size of BNT-72 formulation has changed with the N/P ratio. At N/P 4 and 8 formulations with diameter of 148 nm and 191 nm has been obtained, respectively. At N/P of 12 the size of the BNT-
72 formulation has significantly decreased (114 nm) PDI values was found to be <0.2 indicating a narrow size distribution. The zeta potential values of the formulations was assessed by electrophoretic light scattering (Figure 45B). Formulations have showed neutral zeta potential.
The mRNA encapsulation efficiency of the formulations was assessed by Ribogreen assay (Figure 46A). BNT-72 formulation has showed high accessibility at N/P of 4 and 8. mRNA integrity of the formulations was assessed by capillary electrophoresis, fragment analyzer (Figure 46B). In general, no fragmentation has been observed for the formulations.
The cytotoxicity and transfection efficiency of the formulations was assessed at three different mRNA concentrations (12.5, 25 and 50 ng) on three different cell lines (C2C12, HepG2, RAW 264) (Figure 47). In general, the formulations did not show significant cytotoxicity at the tested conditions. Formulations were effectively able to transfect the cell lines that have been tested (Figure 48). The transfection ability of the BNT-72 formulation has increased significantly with the increase in N/P ratio. At all N/P ratios, BNT-72 formulation was able to outperform to BM formulation with the exception of HepG2 cells (comparable transfection efficiency at N/P of 4 and 8).
Example 14: Comparative Analysis of Tail Groups
The present example considers differences in transfection efficiency across different cell lines, size, and physical characteristics of complexes comprising a thiolipid (BNT -76) and a traditional lipid (BNT-90):
Methods for characterizing complexes are provided in the various Examples herein.
Figure 49 is a bar graph illustrating the size (nm) and polydispersity index (PDI) of complexes comprising BNT-76, BNT-90 or a benchmark lipid CM12_BM.
Figure 50 is a bar graph illustrating Z-potential (mV) of complexes comprising BNT-76, BNT-90 or a benchmark lipid CM12_BM.
Figure 51 is a bar graph illustrating RNA integrity (%) of complexes comprising BNT-76, BNT-90 or a benchmark lipid CM12_BM.
Figure 52 is a bar graph illustrating osmolarity and pH of complexes comprising BNT-76, BNT-90 or a benchmark lipid CM12_BM. Figures 53A-53D are a series of bar graphs illustrating transfection efficiency in C2C12 cells (Figure 53A), HepG2 cells (Figure 53B), RAW cells (Figure 53C) and Hek293 cells (Figure 53D).
Figures 54A-54D are a series of bar graphs illustrating cell viability in C2C12 cells (Figure 54A), HepG2 cells (Figure 54B), RAW cells (Figure 54C) and Hek293 cells (Figure 54D).
The embodiments of the disclosure described above are intended to be merely exemplary, numerous variations and modifications will be apparent to those skilled in the art. All such variations and modifications are intended to be within the scope of the present invention as defined in any appended claims.
Claims
I or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein:
L1 and L2 are each independently an optionally substituted C1-C30 aliphatic group;
L3 is a bond, optionally substituted C1-C10 aliphatic group, or optionally substituted 2- to 10-membered heteroaliphatic group;
X1 and X2 are each independently selected from a bond, -OC(O)-, -C(O)O-, -S(O)2N(R1)- , -N(R1)S(O)2, -S(O)-, -S(O)2-, -S(O)2C(R1)2-, -OC(S)C(R1)2-, -C(R1)2C(S)O-, and -S-, wherein one or both of X1 or X2 is selected from -S(O)2N(R1)-, -N(R1)S(O)2, -S(O)-, - S(O)2-, -S(O)2C(R1)2-, -OC(S)C(R1)2-, -C(R1)2C(S)O-, and -S-; each R1 is, independently, at each instance, optionally substituted Ci-C2o aliphatic or H;
T1 and T2 are each independently an optionally substituted C3-C30 aliphatic;
G is -N(R2)C(S)N(R2)2, -OH, -N(R2)2, -N+(R3)3, -N(R5)C(O)R3, -N(R5)S(O)2R3, - N(R5)C(O)N(R3)2, -CH(N-R2), or -R4; each R2 is, independently, at each instance, selected from the group consisting of H, optionally substituted Ci-Ce aliphatic or OR3; or two instances of R2 come together with the atoms to which they are attached to form an optionally substituted 4- to 12-membered heterocycle ring or an optionally substituted 4- to 12-membered heteroaryl ring; each R3 is, independently, at each instance, selected from the group consisting of H and optionally substituted C1-C10 aliphatic; and
R4 is optionally substituted 4- to 12-membered heterocycle, optionally substituted 4- to 12 membered heteroaryl, Ce-Ci2 aryl substituted with one or more of -(CH2)o e-OH or - (CH2)O-6-N(R5)2, or Cs-Ci2 cycloaliphatic substituted with one or more of oxo, -(CH2)o-6- OH, or -(CH2)O-6-N(R5)2; each R5 is independently selected from H and optionally substituted Ci-Ce aliphatic.
2. The compound of claim 1 , wherein L1 and L2 are each C1-C30 alkylene.
3. The compound of claims 1 or 2, wherein L1 and L2 are each independently - (CH2)6-IO-.
4. The compound of any one of claims 1 -3, wherein L1 and L2 are the same.
5. The compound of any one of claims 1 -3, wherein L1 and L2 are different.
6. The compound of any one of claims 1 -5, wherein X1 and X2 are each independently selected from a -S(O)2N(R1)-, -N(R1)S(O)2, -S(O)-, -S(O)2-, -S(O)2C(R1)2- , -OC(S)C(R1)2-, -C(R1)2C(S)O-, and -S-.
7. The compound of any one of claims 1 -5, wherein one of X1 and X2 is a bond, - OC(O)-, or -C(O)O-, and the other of X1 and X2 is -S(O)2N(R1)-, -N(R1)S(O)2, -S(O)-, - S(O)2-, -S(O)2C(R1)2-, -OC(S)C(R1)2-, -C(R1)2C(S)O-, or -S-.
8. The compound of any one of claims 1 -5, wherein X1 is -S(O)2N(R1)-, where R1 is C1-C10 aliphatic, and X2 is -C(O)O-.
9. The compound of any one of claims 1 -5, wherein X1 and X2 are each -S(O)2N(R1)- , where each R1 is independently R1 is C1-C10 aliphatic.
10. The compound of any one of claims 1 -5, wherein X1 and X2 are the same.
1 1 . The compound of any one of claims 1 -5, wherein X1 and X2 are different.
12. The compound of any one of claims 1 -1 1 , wherein T1 and T2 are each independently selected from optionally substituted Cs-C2o alkyl.
17. The compound of any one of claims 1 -16, wherein L3 is optionally substituted Ci- C aliphatic.
18. The compound of any one of claims 1 -17, wherein G is -N(R2)C(S)N(R2)2 or - N(R5)S(O)2R3.
19. The compound of claim 18, wherein G is -N(R2)C(S)N(R2)2.
20. The compound of claim 19, wherein G is -N(H)C(S)N(R2)2, where each R2 is selected from optionally substituted Ci-Ce aliphatic and OH.
21 . The compound of any one of claims 1-17, wherein G is -OH.
22. The compound of any one of claims 1 -17, wherein G is optionally substituted 4- to 12-membered heterocycle.
Ila or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
He or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
Illc or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
Hid or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
36. The compound of claim 1 , wherein the compound is selected from Table 1 .
37. A particle comprising a compound of any one of claims 1 -36, and a nucleic acid.
38. The particle of claim 37, wherein the nucleic acid is RNA, DNA, or mixtures thereof.
39. The particle of claim 38, the RNA is mRNA.
40. The particle of claim 39, wherein the RNA is modRNA, circRNA, saRNA, taRNA, or uRNA.
41 . The particle of claim 37, wherein the DNA is linear DNA, plasmid DNA, minicircle DNA, nanoplasmid DNA, doggybone DNA, or a transposon.
42. The particle of any one of claims 37-41 , wherein the particle further comprises one or more of a helper lipid, a polymer-conjugated lipid, or a sterol.
43. The particle of claim 42, wherein the helper lipid is a phospholipid.
44. The particle of claim 43, wherein the phospholipid is selected from: phosphatidylcholines, phosphatidylethanolamines, phosphatidylglycerols, phosphatidic acids, phosphatidylserines and sphingomyelins, more preferably selected from the group consisting of distearoylphosphatidylcholine (DSPC), dioleoylphosphatidylcholine (DOPC), dimyristoylphosphatidylcholine (DMPC), dipentadecanoylphosphatidylcholine, dilauroylphosphatidylcholine, dipalmitoylphosphatidylcholine (DPPC), diarachidoylphosphatidylcholine (DAPC), dibehenoylphosphatidylcholine (DBPC), ditricosanoylphosphatidylcholine (DTPC), dilignoceroylphatidylcholine (DLPC), palmitoyloleoyl-phosphatidylcholine (POPC), 1 ,2-di-O-octadecenyl-sn-glycero-3- phosphocholine (18:0 Diether PC), 1 -oleoyl-2-cholesterylhemisuccinoyl-sn-glycero-3- phosphocholine (OChemsPC), 1 -hexadecyl-sn-glycero-3-phosphocholine (C16 Lyso PC), dioleoylphosphatidylethanolamine (DOPE), distearoyl-phosphatidylethanolamine (DSPE), dipalmitoyl-phosphatidylethanolamine (DPPE), dimyristoylphosphatidylethanolamine (DMPE), dilauroyl-phosphatidylethanolamine (DLPE), diphytanoyl-phosphatidylethanolamine (DPyPE), and combinations thereof.
45. The particle of any one of claims 42-44, wherein the polymer-conjugated lipid is selected from the group consisting of a polyethylene glycol) (PEG)-conjugated lipid, a poly(sarcosine) (pSar)-conjugated lipid, a poly(aminoethoxy ethoxy acetic acid) (pAEEA)-conjugated lipid; and a poly(2-methylaminoethoxy ethoxy acetic acid) (pmAEEA)-conjugated lipid.
46. The particle of any one of claims 42-45, wherein the polymer-conjugated lipid is a PEG-lipid selected from PEG-DAG, PEG-PE, PEG-S-DAG, PEG2000-DMG, PEG-cer, a PEG dialkyoxypropylcarbamate, ALC-0159, and combinations thereof.
47. The particle of any one of claims 42-46, wherein the sterol is selected from |3- sitosterol, stigmasterol, cholesterol, cholecalciferol, ergocalciferol, calcipotriol, botulin, lupeol, ursolic acid, oleanolic acid, cycloartenol, lanosterol, or a-tocopherol.
48. The particle of any one of claims 42-47, wherein the particle is characterized by an N/P ratio that is about 4 to about 16.
49. A method of increasing or causing increased expression of RNA in a target in a subject, the method comprising administering to the subject a composition comprising particles of any one of claims 42-48.
50. The method of claim 49, wherein the target is selected from the lungs, liver, spleen, heart, brain, lymph nodes, bladder, kidneys, and pancreas.
51. A method of treating a disease, disorder, or condition in a subject comprising administering to the subject a composition comprising the particles of any one of claims 42-48.
52. The method of claim 51 , wherein the disease, disorder, or condition is an infectious disease, cancer, a genetic disorder, an autoimmune disease, or a rare disease.
53. The method of any one of claims 48-52, wherein the particle is administered parenterally or intranasally.
54. The method of claim 53, wherein the particle is administered intramuscularly, subcutaneously, intradermally, or intravenously.
55. A particle of any one of claims 42-48 for use as a medicament.
56. A particle of any one of claims 42-48 for use in the treatment and/or prevention of a disease or disorder, wherein the disease or disorder is an infectious disease, cancer, a genetic disorder, an autoimmune disease, or a rare disease.
Priority Applications (4)
| Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
|---|---|---|---|
| PCT/EP2023/071270 WO2025026545A1 (en) | 2023-08-01 | 2023-08-01 | Ionizable thioplipids and uses thereof |
| TW113128599A TW202519509A (en) | 2023-08-01 | 2024-07-31 | Ionizable thiolipids and uses thereof |
| PCT/EP2024/071710 WO2025027089A1 (en) | 2023-08-01 | 2024-07-31 | Ionizable thiolipids and uses thereof |
| AU2024315222A AU2024315222A1 (en) | 2023-08-01 | 2024-07-31 | Ionizable thiolipids and uses thereof |
Applications Claiming Priority (1)
| Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
|---|---|---|---|
| PCT/EP2023/071270 WO2025026545A1 (en) | 2023-08-01 | 2023-08-01 | Ionizable thioplipids and uses thereof |
Publications (2)
| Publication Number | Publication Date |
|---|---|
| WO2025026545A1 true WO2025026545A1 (en) | 2025-02-06 |
| WO2025026545A8 WO2025026545A8 (en) | 2025-03-20 |
Family
ID=87567268
Family Applications (1)
| Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
|---|---|---|---|
| PCT/EP2023/071270 Pending WO2025026545A1 (en) | 2023-08-01 | 2023-08-01 | Ionizable thioplipids and uses thereof |
Country Status (1)
| Country | Link |
|---|---|
| WO (1) | WO2025026545A1 (en) |
Cited By (1)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| WO2025176732A1 (en) | 2024-02-20 | 2025-08-28 | BioNTech SE | Compositions and methods |
Citations (55)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| WO1999039741A2 (en) | 1998-02-03 | 1999-08-12 | Inex Pharmaceuticals Corporation | Systemic delivery of serum stable plasmid lipid particles for cancer therapy |
| US5965542A (en) | 1997-03-18 | 1999-10-12 | Inex Pharmaceuticals Corp. | Use of temperature to control the size of cationic liposome/plasmid DNA complexes |
| US6009076A (en) | 1995-06-15 | 1999-12-28 | Fujitsu Limited | Repeating installation |
| WO2001007548A1 (en) | 1999-07-26 | 2001-02-01 | The Procter & Gamble Company | Cationic charge boosting systems |
| US20040142025A1 (en) | 2002-06-28 | 2004-07-22 | Protiva Biotherapeutics Ltd. | Liposomal apparatus and manufacturing methods |
| US20050017054A1 (en) | 2003-07-23 | 2005-01-27 | Tom Iverson | Flyback transformer wire attach method to printed circuit board |
| US20050064595A1 (en) | 2003-07-16 | 2005-03-24 | Protiva Biotherapeutics, Inc. | Lipid encapsulated interfering RNA |
| WO2005038030A1 (en) | 2003-10-14 | 2005-04-28 | Johannes Gutenberg-Universität Mainz, Vertreten Durch Den Präsidenten | Recombinant vaccines and use thereof |
| US20050118253A1 (en) | 1998-02-03 | 2005-06-02 | Protiva Biotherapeutics, Inc. | Systemic delivery of serum stable plasmid lipid particles for cancer therapy |
| US20050175682A1 (en) | 2003-09-15 | 2005-08-11 | Protiva Biotherapeutics, Inc. | Polyethyleneglycol-modified lipid compounds and uses thereof |
| US20060008910A1 (en) | 2004-06-07 | 2006-01-12 | Protiva Biotherapeuties, Inc. | Lipid encapsulated interfering RNA |
| US20060083780A1 (en) | 2004-06-07 | 2006-04-20 | Protiva Biotherapeutics, Inc. | Cationic lipids and methods of use |
| US20070042031A1 (en) | 2005-07-27 | 2007-02-22 | Protiva Biotherapeutics, Inc. | Systems and methods for manufacturing liposomes |
| WO2007024708A2 (en) | 2005-08-23 | 2007-03-01 | The Trustees Of The University Of Pennsylvania | Rna containing modified nucleosides and methods of use thereof |
| WO2007036366A2 (en) | 2005-09-28 | 2007-04-05 | Johannes Gutenberg-Universität Mainz, Vertreten Durch Den Präsidenten | Modification of rna, producing an increased transcript stability and translation efficiency |
| US20100130588A1 (en) | 2008-04-15 | 2010-05-27 | Protiva Biotherapeutics, Inc. | Novel lipid formulations for nucleic acid delivery |
| WO2011015347A1 (en) | 2009-08-05 | 2011-02-10 | Biontech Ag | Vaccine composition comprising 5'-cap modified rna |
| US20110076335A1 (en) | 2009-07-01 | 2011-03-31 | Protiva Biotherapeutics, Inc. | Novel lipid formulations for delivery of therapeutic agents to solid tumors |
| US20110117125A1 (en) | 2008-01-02 | 2011-05-19 | Tekmira Pharmaceuticals Corporation | Compositions and methods for the delivery of nucleic acids |
| WO2011141705A1 (en) | 2010-05-12 | 2011-11-17 | Protiva Biotherapeutics, Inc. | Novel cationic lipids and methods of use thereof |
| US20110311583A1 (en) | 2008-11-10 | 2011-12-22 | Alnylam Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Novel lipids and compositions for the delivery of therapeutics |
| US20120027803A1 (en) | 2010-06-03 | 2012-02-02 | Alnylam Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Biodegradable lipids for the delivery of active agents |
| US20120172411A1 (en) | 2010-09-17 | 2012-07-05 | Protiva Biotherapeutics, Inc. | Novel trialkyl cationic lipids and methods of use thereof |
| US20120295832A1 (en) | 2011-05-17 | 2012-11-22 | Arrowhead Research Corporation | Novel Lipids and Compositions for Intracellular Delivery of Biologically Active Compounds |
| US20130017223A1 (en) | 2009-12-18 | 2013-01-17 | The University Of British Columbia | Methods and compositions for delivery of nucleic acids |
| US20130022649A1 (en) | 2009-12-01 | 2013-01-24 | Protiva Biotherapeutics, Inc. | Snalp formulations containing antioxidants |
| WO2013016058A1 (en) | 2011-07-22 | 2013-01-31 | Merck Sharp & Dohme Corp. | Novel bis-nitrogen containing cationic lipids for oligonucleotide delivery |
| US20130086373A1 (en) | 2011-09-29 | 2013-04-04 | Apple Inc. | Customized content for electronic devices |
| WO2013086373A1 (en) | 2011-12-07 | 2013-06-13 | Alnylam Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Lipids for the delivery of active agents |
| WO2013086322A1 (en) | 2011-12-07 | 2013-06-13 | Alnylam Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Branched alkyl and cycloalkyl terminated biodegradable lipids for the delivery of active agents |
| US20130195920A1 (en) | 2011-12-07 | 2013-08-01 | Alnylam Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Biodegradable lipids for the delivery of active agents |
| US20130245107A1 (en) | 2011-12-16 | 2013-09-19 | modeRNA Therapeutics | Dlin-mc3-dma lipid nanoparticle delivery of modified polynucleotides |
| US8569256B2 (en) | 2009-07-01 | 2013-10-29 | Protiva Biotherapeutics, Inc. | Cationic lipids and methods for the delivery of therapeutic agents |
| US20130323269A1 (en) | 2010-07-30 | 2013-12-05 | Muthiah Manoharan | Methods and compositions for delivery of active agents |
| US20130338210A1 (en) | 2009-12-07 | 2013-12-19 | Alnylam Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Compositions for nucleic acid delivery |
| WO2014008334A1 (en) | 2012-07-06 | 2014-01-09 | Alnylam Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Stable non-aggregating nucleic acid lipid particle formulations |
| US20140200257A1 (en) | 2011-01-11 | 2014-07-17 | Alnylam Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Pegylated lipids and their use for drug delivery |
| US20150203446A1 (en) | 2011-09-27 | 2015-07-23 | Takeda Pharmaceutical Company Limited | Di-aliphatic substituted pegylated lipids |
| WO2015199952A1 (en) | 2014-06-25 | 2015-12-30 | Acuitas Therapeutics Inc. | Novel lipids and lipid nanoparticle formulations for delivery of nucleic acids |
| WO2016005324A1 (en) | 2014-07-11 | 2016-01-14 | Biontech Rna Pharmaceuticals Gmbh | Stabilization of poly(a) sequence encoding dna sequences |
| WO2016005318A1 (en) * | 2014-07-08 | 2016-01-14 | Incella Gmbh | Synthesis and use of amino lipids |
| WO2017004143A1 (en) | 2015-06-29 | 2017-01-05 | Acuitas Therapeutics Inc. | Lipids and lipid nanoparticle formulations for delivery of nucleic acids |
| WO2017036889A1 (en) | 2015-08-28 | 2017-03-09 | Biontech Rna Pharmaceuticals Gmbh | Method for reducing immunogenicity of rna |
| WO2017053297A1 (en) | 2015-09-21 | 2017-03-30 | Trilink Biotechnologies, Inc. | Compositions and methods for synthesizing 5'-capped rnas |
| WO2017060314A2 (en) | 2015-10-07 | 2017-04-13 | Biontech Rna Pharmaceuticals Gmbh | 3' utr sequences for stabilization of rna |
| WO2017075531A1 (en) | 2015-10-28 | 2017-05-04 | Acuitas Therapeutics, Inc. | Novel lipids and lipid nanoparticle formulations for delivery of nucleic acids |
| WO2017162266A1 (en) | 2016-03-21 | 2017-09-28 | Biontech Rna Pharmaceuticals Gmbh | Rna replicon for versatile and efficient gene expression |
| WO2017162461A1 (en) | 2016-03-21 | 2017-09-28 | Biontech Rna Pharmaceuticals Gmbh | Trans-replicating rna |
| WO2018081480A1 (en) | 2016-10-26 | 2018-05-03 | Acuitas Therapeutics, Inc. | Lipid nanoparticle formulations |
| WO2018140730A1 (en) | 2017-01-27 | 2018-08-02 | Signalrx Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Thienopyranones and furanopyranones as kinase, bromodomain, and checkpoint inhibitors |
| WO2019027055A1 (en) * | 2017-08-04 | 2019-02-07 | 協和発酵キリン株式会社 | Nucleic acid-containing lipid nanoparticles |
| WO2021026358A1 (en) | 2019-08-07 | 2021-02-11 | Moderna TX, Inc. | Compositions and methods for enhanced delivery of agents |
| WO2021250102A1 (en) | 2020-06-10 | 2021-12-16 | Janssen Pharmaceutica Nv | Macrocyclic 2-amino-3-fluoro-but-3-enamides as inhibitors of mcl-1 |
| CN114989027A (en) * | 2022-08-03 | 2022-09-02 | 深圳市瑞吉生物科技有限公司 | Cationic lipid compounds and compositions for delivery of nucleic acids and uses |
| WO2023029928A1 (en) * | 2021-09-01 | 2023-03-09 | 深圳虹信生物科技有限公司 | Amino lipid and application thereof |
-
2023
- 2023-08-01 WO PCT/EP2023/071270 patent/WO2025026545A1/en active Pending
Patent Citations (73)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| US6009076A (en) | 1995-06-15 | 1999-12-28 | Fujitsu Limited | Repeating installation |
| US5965542A (en) | 1997-03-18 | 1999-10-12 | Inex Pharmaceuticals Corp. | Use of temperature to control the size of cationic liposome/plasmid DNA complexes |
| US20050118253A1 (en) | 1998-02-03 | 2005-06-02 | Protiva Biotherapeutics, Inc. | Systemic delivery of serum stable plasmid lipid particles for cancer therapy |
| WO1999039741A2 (en) | 1998-02-03 | 1999-08-12 | Inex Pharmaceuticals Corporation | Systemic delivery of serum stable plasmid lipid particles for cancer therapy |
| WO2001007548A1 (en) | 1999-07-26 | 2001-02-01 | The Procter & Gamble Company | Cationic charge boosting systems |
| US20040142025A1 (en) | 2002-06-28 | 2004-07-22 | Protiva Biotherapeutics Ltd. | Liposomal apparatus and manufacturing methods |
| US20110216622A1 (en) | 2002-06-28 | 2011-09-08 | Protiva Biotherapeutics, Inc. | Liposomal apparatus and manufacturing method |
| US20050064595A1 (en) | 2003-07-16 | 2005-03-24 | Protiva Biotherapeutics, Inc. | Lipid encapsulated interfering RNA |
| US20120058188A1 (en) | 2003-07-16 | 2012-03-08 | Protiva Biotherapeutics, Inc. | Lipid encapsulated interfering rna |
| US20060240093A1 (en) | 2003-07-16 | 2006-10-26 | Protiva Biotherapeutics, Inc. | Lipid encapsulated interfering rna |
| US20050017054A1 (en) | 2003-07-23 | 2005-01-27 | Tom Iverson | Flyback transformer wire attach method to printed circuit board |
| US20050175682A1 (en) | 2003-09-15 | 2005-08-11 | Protiva Biotherapeutics, Inc. | Polyethyleneglycol-modified lipid compounds and uses thereof |
| US20110091525A1 (en) | 2003-09-15 | 2011-04-21 | Protiva Biotherapeutics, Inc. | Polyethyleneglycol-modified lipid compounds and uses thereof |
| WO2005038030A1 (en) | 2003-10-14 | 2005-04-28 | Johannes Gutenberg-Universität Mainz, Vertreten Durch Den Präsidenten | Recombinant vaccines and use thereof |
| US20110060032A1 (en) | 2004-06-07 | 2011-03-10 | Protiva Biotherapeutics, Inc. | Lipid encapsulating interfering rna |
| US20060008910A1 (en) | 2004-06-07 | 2006-01-12 | Protiva Biotherapeuties, Inc. | Lipid encapsulated interfering RNA |
| US20060083780A1 (en) | 2004-06-07 | 2006-04-20 | Protiva Biotherapeutics, Inc. | Cationic lipids and methods of use |
| US20110262527A1 (en) | 2004-06-07 | 2011-10-27 | Protiva Biotherapeutics, Inc. | Cationic lipids and methods of use |
| US20070042031A1 (en) | 2005-07-27 | 2007-02-22 | Protiva Biotherapeutics, Inc. | Systems and methods for manufacturing liposomes |
| WO2007024708A2 (en) | 2005-08-23 | 2007-03-01 | The Trustees Of The University Of Pennsylvania | Rna containing modified nucleosides and methods of use thereof |
| WO2007036366A2 (en) | 2005-09-28 | 2007-04-05 | Johannes Gutenberg-Universität Mainz, Vertreten Durch Den Präsidenten | Modification of rna, producing an increased transcript stability and translation efficiency |
| US20110117125A1 (en) | 2008-01-02 | 2011-05-19 | Tekmira Pharmaceuticals Corporation | Compositions and methods for the delivery of nucleic acids |
| US20120183581A1 (en) | 2008-04-15 | 2012-07-19 | Protiva Biotherapeutics, Inc | Novel lipid formulations for nucleic acid delivery |
| US20100130588A1 (en) | 2008-04-15 | 2010-05-27 | Protiva Biotherapeutics, Inc. | Novel lipid formulations for nucleic acid delivery |
| US20110311583A1 (en) | 2008-11-10 | 2011-12-22 | Alnylam Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Novel lipids and compositions for the delivery of therapeutics |
| US20110311582A1 (en) | 2008-11-10 | 2011-12-22 | Muthiah Manoharan | Novel lipids and compositions for the delivery of therapeutics |
| US20160199485A1 (en) | 2008-11-10 | 2016-07-14 | Tekmira Pharmaceuticals Corporation | Novel lipids and compositions for the delivery of therapeutics |
| US20150265708A1 (en) | 2008-11-10 | 2015-09-24 | Tekmira Pharmaceuticals Corporation | Novel lipids and compositions for the delivery of therapeutics |
| US8569256B2 (en) | 2009-07-01 | 2013-10-29 | Protiva Biotherapeutics, Inc. | Cationic lipids and methods for the delivery of therapeutic agents |
| US20110076335A1 (en) | 2009-07-01 | 2011-03-31 | Protiva Biotherapeutics, Inc. | Novel lipid formulations for delivery of therapeutic agents to solid tumors |
| WO2011015347A1 (en) | 2009-08-05 | 2011-02-10 | Biontech Ag | Vaccine composition comprising 5'-cap modified rna |
| US20130022649A1 (en) | 2009-12-01 | 2013-01-24 | Protiva Biotherapeutics, Inc. | Snalp formulations containing antioxidants |
| US20130338210A1 (en) | 2009-12-07 | 2013-12-19 | Alnylam Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Compositions for nucleic acid delivery |
| US20130017223A1 (en) | 2009-12-18 | 2013-01-17 | The University Of British Columbia | Methods and compositions for delivery of nucleic acids |
| US20130123338A1 (en) | 2010-05-12 | 2013-05-16 | Protiva Biotherapeutics, Inc. | Novel cationic lipids and methods of use thereof |
| WO2011141705A1 (en) | 2010-05-12 | 2011-11-17 | Protiva Biotherapeutics, Inc. | Novel cationic lipids and methods of use thereof |
| US20160009637A1 (en) | 2010-06-03 | 2016-01-14 | Alnylam Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Biodegradable lipids for the delivery of active agents |
| US20120027803A1 (en) | 2010-06-03 | 2012-02-02 | Alnylam Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Biodegradable lipids for the delivery of active agents |
| US20130323269A1 (en) | 2010-07-30 | 2013-12-05 | Muthiah Manoharan | Methods and compositions for delivery of active agents |
| US20120172411A1 (en) | 2010-09-17 | 2012-07-05 | Protiva Biotherapeutics, Inc. | Novel trialkyl cationic lipids and methods of use thereof |
| US20140200257A1 (en) | 2011-01-11 | 2014-07-17 | Alnylam Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Pegylated lipids and their use for drug delivery |
| US20120295832A1 (en) | 2011-05-17 | 2012-11-22 | Arrowhead Research Corporation | Novel Lipids and Compositions for Intracellular Delivery of Biologically Active Compounds |
| WO2013016058A1 (en) | 2011-07-22 | 2013-01-31 | Merck Sharp & Dohme Corp. | Novel bis-nitrogen containing cationic lipids for oligonucleotide delivery |
| US20150203446A1 (en) | 2011-09-27 | 2015-07-23 | Takeda Pharmaceutical Company Limited | Di-aliphatic substituted pegylated lipids |
| US20130086373A1 (en) | 2011-09-29 | 2013-04-04 | Apple Inc. | Customized content for electronic devices |
| US20140308304A1 (en) | 2011-12-07 | 2014-10-16 | Alnylam Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Lipids for the delivery of active agents |
| WO2013086373A1 (en) | 2011-12-07 | 2013-06-13 | Alnylam Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Lipids for the delivery of active agents |
| US20150005363A1 (en) | 2011-12-07 | 2015-01-01 | Alnylam Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Branched Alkyl And Cycloalkyl Terminated Biodegradable Lipids For The Delivery Of Active Agents |
| US20150273068A1 (en) | 2011-12-07 | 2015-10-01 | Alnylam Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Biodegradable lipids for the delivery of active agents |
| US20130195920A1 (en) | 2011-12-07 | 2013-08-01 | Alnylam Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Biodegradable lipids for the delivery of active agents |
| WO2013086322A1 (en) | 2011-12-07 | 2013-06-13 | Alnylam Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Branched alkyl and cycloalkyl terminated biodegradable lipids for the delivery of active agents |
| US20130245107A1 (en) | 2011-12-16 | 2013-09-19 | modeRNA Therapeutics | Dlin-mc3-dma lipid nanoparticle delivery of modified polynucleotides |
| WO2014008334A1 (en) | 2012-07-06 | 2014-01-09 | Alnylam Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Stable non-aggregating nucleic acid lipid particle formulations |
| WO2015199952A1 (en) | 2014-06-25 | 2015-12-30 | Acuitas Therapeutics Inc. | Novel lipids and lipid nanoparticle formulations for delivery of nucleic acids |
| WO2016005318A1 (en) * | 2014-07-08 | 2016-01-14 | Incella Gmbh | Synthesis and use of amino lipids |
| WO2016005324A1 (en) | 2014-07-11 | 2016-01-14 | Biontech Rna Pharmaceuticals Gmbh | Stabilization of poly(a) sequence encoding dna sequences |
| WO2017004143A1 (en) | 2015-06-29 | 2017-01-05 | Acuitas Therapeutics Inc. | Lipids and lipid nanoparticle formulations for delivery of nucleic acids |
| WO2017036889A1 (en) | 2015-08-28 | 2017-03-09 | Biontech Rna Pharmaceuticals Gmbh | Method for reducing immunogenicity of rna |
| WO2017053297A1 (en) | 2015-09-21 | 2017-03-30 | Trilink Biotechnologies, Inc. | Compositions and methods for synthesizing 5'-capped rnas |
| US10519189B2 (en) | 2015-09-21 | 2019-12-31 | Trilink Biotechnologies, Inc. | Compositions and methods for synthesizing 5′-Capped RNAs |
| US10494399B2 (en) | 2015-09-21 | 2019-12-03 | Trilink Biotechnologies, Inc. | Compositions and methods for synthesizing 5′-Capped RNAS |
| WO2017060314A2 (en) | 2015-10-07 | 2017-04-13 | Biontech Rna Pharmaceuticals Gmbh | 3' utr sequences for stabilization of rna |
| WO2017075531A1 (en) | 2015-10-28 | 2017-05-04 | Acuitas Therapeutics, Inc. | Novel lipids and lipid nanoparticle formulations for delivery of nucleic acids |
| WO2017162266A1 (en) | 2016-03-21 | 2017-09-28 | Biontech Rna Pharmaceuticals Gmbh | Rna replicon for versatile and efficient gene expression |
| WO2017162461A1 (en) | 2016-03-21 | 2017-09-28 | Biontech Rna Pharmaceuticals Gmbh | Trans-replicating rna |
| WO2018081480A1 (en) | 2016-10-26 | 2018-05-03 | Acuitas Therapeutics, Inc. | Lipid nanoparticle formulations |
| WO2018140730A1 (en) | 2017-01-27 | 2018-08-02 | Signalrx Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Thienopyranones and furanopyranones as kinase, bromodomain, and checkpoint inhibitors |
| WO2019027055A1 (en) * | 2017-08-04 | 2019-02-07 | 協和発酵キリン株式会社 | Nucleic acid-containing lipid nanoparticles |
| WO2021026358A1 (en) | 2019-08-07 | 2021-02-11 | Moderna TX, Inc. | Compositions and methods for enhanced delivery of agents |
| US20220296517A1 (en) * | 2019-08-07 | 2022-09-22 | Moderna TX, Inc. | Compositions and methods for enhanced delivery of agents |
| WO2021250102A1 (en) | 2020-06-10 | 2021-12-16 | Janssen Pharmaceutica Nv | Macrocyclic 2-amino-3-fluoro-but-3-enamides as inhibitors of mcl-1 |
| WO2023029928A1 (en) * | 2021-09-01 | 2023-03-09 | 深圳虹信生物科技有限公司 | Amino lipid and application thereof |
| CN114989027A (en) * | 2022-08-03 | 2022-09-02 | 深圳市瑞吉生物科技有限公司 | Cationic lipid compounds and compositions for delivery of nucleic acids and uses |
Non-Patent Citations (11)
| Title |
|---|
| "Handbook of Chemistry and Physics", article "Periodic Table of Elements" |
| "March's Advanced Organic Chemistry", 2001, JOHN WILEY & SONS |
| "Remington's The Science and Practice of Pharmacy", 2006, LIPPINCOTT, WILLIAMS & WILKINS |
| CAS, no. 923279-52-1 |
| KACZMAREK, J. C. ET AL., GENOME MEDICINE, vol. 9, 2017, pages 60 |
| KIRSCHBERG, THORSTEN A. ET AL., BIOORGANIC & MEDICINAL CHEMISTRY LETTERS, vol. 24, no. 3, 2014, pages 969 - 972 |
| KOPPEL, D., J. CHEM. PHYS., vol. 57, 1972, pages 4814 - 4820 |
| REMINGTON: "The Science and Practice of Pharmacy", 2005, LIPPINCOTT WILLIAMS & WILKINS |
| S. M. BERGE ET AL.: "describes pharmaceutically acceptable salts in detail", J. PHARMACEUTICAL SCIENCES, vol. 66, 1977, pages 1 - 19 |
| TENCHOV ET AL., ACS NANO, vol. 15, no. 11, 2021, pages 16982 - 17015 |
| THOMAS SORRELL: "Organic Chemistry", 1999, UNIVERSITY SCIENCE BOOKS |
Cited By (1)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| WO2025176732A1 (en) | 2024-02-20 | 2025-08-28 | BioNTech SE | Compositions and methods |
Also Published As
| Publication number | Publication date |
|---|---|
| WO2025026545A8 (en) | 2025-03-20 |
Similar Documents
| Publication | Publication Date | Title |
|---|---|---|
| AU2021409638A1 (en) | Nanomaterials comprising carbonates | |
| US20240335541A1 (en) | Nanomaterials comprising diamines | |
| JP2019508371A (en) | Compounds and compositions for intracellular delivery of drugs | |
| AU2024315222A1 (en) | Ionizable thiolipids and uses thereof | |
| WO2022159475A1 (en) | Nanomaterials comprising an ionizable lipid | |
| AU2022421708A1 (en) | Nanomaterials comprising tetravalent lipid compounds | |
| WO2023121964A1 (en) | Nanomaterials comprising disulfides | |
| CA3241488A1 (en) | Ionizable amine lipids and lipid nanoparticles | |
| AU2021409377A1 (en) | Nanomaterials comprising acetals | |
| EP4402149A1 (en) | Disulfide oligosaccharide compounds and complexes | |
| EP4401788A1 (en) | Oligosaccharide complexes and uses | |
| WO2025026545A1 (en) | Ionizable thioplipids and uses thereof | |
| JP2025538939A (en) | Lipid compounds and uses thereof | |
| CN120309564B (en) | Ionizable cationic lipids targeting immune cells, compositions comprising same and uses | |
| WO2024094211A1 (en) | Lipid composition | |
| WO2025134062A2 (en) | Ionizable lipids | |
| WO2025134066A1 (en) | Ionizable lipids | |
| EP4286004A1 (en) | Disulfide oligosaccharide compounds and complexes | |
| EP4286394A1 (en) | Oligosaccharide compounds and complexes | |
| EP4285933A1 (en) | Oligosaccharide complexes and uses | |
| WO2025262672A1 (en) | Lipid compositions for nucleic acid delivery | |
| EP4186528A1 (en) | Oligosaccharide complexes and uses | |
| WO2025097659A1 (en) | Lipids and lipid nanoparticle formulations | |
| WO2025209467A1 (en) | Lipids and lipid nanoparticle formulations | |
| CN118369122A (en) | Oligosaccharide complex and use thereof |
Legal Events
| Date | Code | Title | Description |
|---|---|---|---|
| 121 | Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application |
Ref document number: 23751891 Country of ref document: EP Kind code of ref document: A1 |
















































































































































